Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology

Transcription

Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology
(Programme Code 8C012)
comprising
Associate in Engineering
工程學副學士
Associate in Information Technology
資訊科技副學士
Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business
商業統計及電子計算副學士
Associate of Science
理科副學士
Definitive Scheme Document
September 2009
This Definitive Scheme Document applies to students enrolling in programmes under the
Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology in the 2009/2010 academic year. The
Document is subject to review and HKCC may make appropriate changes at any time.
Students will be informed of the changes as and when appropriate.
Last updated in March 2010
Table of Contents
Page
1.
Host Department
1
2.
Scheme Operation and Management
2.1 Programmes under the Scheme
2.2 Scheme and Programme Leaders
2.3 Scheme Management Committee
1
1
1
1
3.
Aims and Intended Learning Outcomes
1
4.
Entry Requirements
4
5.
Granting of Award
4
6.
Mode and Duration of Study
4
7.
Attendance
5
8.
Curriculum Structure
8.1 Subject Level and Subject Code
8.2 Subject Nature
8.3 Credit and Level Requirements
8.4 General Education Requirements
8.5 Award-specific Requirements
8.5.1 Associate in Engineering
8.5.2 Associate in Information Technology
8.5.3 Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business
8.5.4 Associate of Science
8.6 Programme Curriculum Maps
6
6
6
6
7
9
9
12
14
15
21
9.
Medium of Instruction
33
10.
Teaching and Learning Methods
33
11.
Assessment and Examinations
11.1 Principles of Assessment
11.2 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel
11.3 Role of Board of Examiners
11.4 Assessment Methods
11.5 Academic Probation
11.6 Progression and De-registration
11.7 Grading
11.8 Retaking of Subjects
11.9 Plagiarism and Dishonesty
11.10 Guidelines for Award Classification
33
33
34
34
34
41
41
42
43
44
44
Page
11.11 Student Appeals
11.12 Exceptional Circumstances
11.13 Other Regulations
44
45
45
Section Two: Syllabuses
Subject Code
CC1002
CC1003
CC1005
CC1006
CC1007
CC1008
CC2002
CC2005
CC2006
CC2007
CC2008
CC2009
CC2010
CC2011
CC2012
CC2014
CC2016
CC2019
CC2028
CC2030
CC2031
CC2033
CC2034
CC2036
CC2042
CC2048
CC2053
CC2101
CC2102
CC2104
CC2110
CC2126
CC2131
CC2201
CC2202
CC2203
CC2204
CC2205
CC2302
CC2305
CC2307
Subject Name
Astronomy and Fortune-telling
Chinese Calligraphy and Painting
Buddhist Culture and Art
Foundation of Chinese Medicine
The Art of Chinese Board Games
Appreciation of Asian and Western Music
Creative and Critical Thinking
Applied Computing
Introduction to Internet Technology
Environmental Science
Chinese Civilisation
Chinese Language
Elementary French
Japanese I
Elementary Putonghua
Aesthetics and Art Appreciation
Understanding Society
Introduction to Psychology
Grammar in Context
Mathematics
Japanese II
Introduction to Philosophy
The History and Culture of Hong Kong
Introduction to Chinese Literature
English for Academic Studies (Science and Technology)
English for Workplace Communication (Science and Technology)
Introduction to Calculus and Linear Algebra
Financial Accounting
Theory and Practice of Management
Introduction to Microeconomics
Food Service Operations
Introduction to Marketing
Chinese for Business Communication
Principles of Programming
Computer System Architectures
Data Structures and Algorithms
Discrete Mathematics
General Physics
Engineering Mathematics
Basic Electricity and Electronics
Engineering Science
Page
46
49
52
55
58
61
64
67
69
71
73
75
78
80
82
84
86
88
91
93
95
97
99
102
104
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
124
126
128
130
132
134
136
139
Subject Code
CC2404
CC2406
CC2417
CC2418
CC2422
CC2425
CC2439
CC2441
CC3003
CC3004
CC3006
CC3008
CC3011
CC3015
CC3016
CC3017
CC3018
CC3020
CC3021
CC3022
CC3023
CC3024
CC3025
CC3026
CC3027
CC3028
CC3029
CC3030
CC3031
CC3121
CC3122
CC3129
CC3135
CC3143
CC3144
CC3145
CC3150
CC3153
CC3201
CC3202
CC3203
CC3204
CC3205
CC3206
Subject Name
Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care
Calculus
Human Biology I
Human Biology II
Linear Algebra
Statistics for Business I
General Chemistry
Basic Laboratory Techniques and Safety
Contemporary Social Problems
Development of Pearl River Delta
The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures
Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health
Gender Issues
Logic
Mass Media and Culture
Social Psychology
The History of Modern China and the World (From 1842 - Now)
Oral Communication in English
Politics and Government
History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of East Asia
History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of Southeast Asia
Japanese III
Japanese IV
Chinese Film and Fiction
Discourse in Popular Cultures
Issues in Applied Ethics
Modern Western Thought
Selected Readings of Hong Kong Fiction
Wisdom in Eastern Tradition
Business Environment in China
China’s Economy
Business Putonghua
Inventory and Warehousing Management
Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management
Practicum in Workplace
Extensive Practicum in Workplace
Organisational Behaviour
Principles of Knowledge Management
Fundamentals of Database Systems
Software Engineering
Information Systems Analysis and Design
Data Communications and Networking
Operating Systems
Programming Project
Page
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
159
161
164
168
170
172
174
176
178
180
182
184
187
190
192
194
197
199
201
203
206
208
210
213
215
217
220
222
224
226
229
231
233
235
237
239
Subject Code
CC3207
CC3208
CC3209
CC3210
CC3301
CC3302
CC3303
CC3304
CC3305
CC3306
CC3307
CC3308
CC3309
CC3310
CC3311
CC3312
CC3313
CC3314
CC3315
CC3316
CC3317
CC3318
CC3319
CC3401
CC3403
CC3406
CC3409
CC3411
CC3423
CC3430
CC3434
CC3456
CC3458
CC3467
CC3471
CC3475
CC3476
CC3477
CC3487
CC3492
CC3728
CC3729
CC3730
CC3731
Subject Name
Object Oriented Programming
Internet Programming
Internetworking Protocols and Systems
Database Design and Implementation
Communication Systems Principles
Computer Systems Principles
Design of Production and Service Systems
Digital System Design
Engineering Management
Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods
Manufacturing Technology
Quality Engineering
Society and the Engineer
Statistics and Probability
Engineering Materials
Thermofluids
Linear Systems
Engineering Project
Applied Mechanics
Architectural Technology in the Built Environment
Food Chemistry
Physical Chemistry
Organic Chemistry
Applied Business Computing Project
Applied Statistical Methods
Basic Immunology
Business Forecasting Methods
Chinese Family and Culture
Economic and Social Statistics
Financial Mathematics
General Microbiology
Management Information Systems
Operations Research for Business
Social Development in China
Social Problems and Social Issues in Contemporary China
Statistical Data Analysis
Statistics for Business II
Survey Design and Analysis
Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology
Chinese Government and Politics
Analytical Chemistry
Computer Game Programming
Dynamics and Control
Electrical Engineering
Page
241
243
245
247
249
251
253
255
257
259
261
263
265
267
270
272
275
277
280
282
285
288
291
293
295
298
301
303
305
307
309
311
313
315
317
319
321
323
325
330
332
334
336
338
CC3732
CC3733
CC3734
CC3735
CC3736
CC3744
CC3745
CC3751
Engineering Graphics and Computing
Further Calculus
General Biochemistry
Intermediate Environmental Science
Multimedia and User Interface Design
Biotechnology
Cell Biology
Science of Human Movement
340
343
345
347
349
351
353
355
Section One: General Information
1.
Host Department
The Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology (‘The Scheme’) is hosted by
Hong Kong Community College (‘HKCC’), with academic support from the Department
of Applied Mathematics (AMA) of The Hong Kong Polytechnic University for the
Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business programme.
2.
Scheme Operation and Management
2.1
Programmes under the Scheme
The Scheme comprises the four programmes below:
Programme Title
• Associate in Engineering
• Associate in Information Technology
• Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business
• Associate of Science
2.2
Programme Code
8C012-ENG
8C012-IT
8C012-SCB
8C012-AS
Scheme and Programme Leaders
A Scheme Leader (SL) is appointed to provide academic support in the realm of quality
assurance in both teaching and learning. The SL, with the assistance of an Assistant
Scheme Leader, also provides input in staffing, student admission, assessment and
feedback, and programme development.
Programme Leaders and Assistant / Deputy Programme Leaders (where appropriate) are
appointed to manage the various programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme.
2.3
Scheme Management Committee
The Scheme Management Committee (SMC) assumes overall academic responsibility. It
comprises Scheme Leader, Assistant Scheme Leader, Programme Leaders, Assistant /
Deputy Programme Leaders, Subject Leaders / Lecturers and student representatives who
will periodically review the academic content, student feedback, and pedagogical issues.
The Student/Staff Consultative Group (SSCG) provides a channel through which students’
views can be obtained. During the meetings, teaching staff and student representatives
meet for constructive discussion on matters of the Group relating to student workload,
teaching methods, the relevance of the course content and possible improvements.
3.
Aims and Intended Learning Outcomes
All the programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology
(ADSST) aim to help students develop a foundation of generic skills and broad-based
knowledge that nurture life-long learning. These programmes are designed primarily to
provide students with fundamental domain-specific knowledge as well as generic
knowledge for future academic pursuits, and secondarily to facilitate their entry into the
job market as associate professionals.
1
The curriculum structure of ADSST is intended to provide students with choices of
specialisms and elective subjects, and to offer them more flexibility. Such choices and
flexibility will enable students to make informed decisions on the best ways to enhance
their chances for further studies and career development.
The intended learning outcomes of the Scheme centre around generic and professional
competencies which encompass the attitude, knowledge, and skills expected of AD
graduates. These can be specified in great details in the following outcomes:
Scheme Outcomes - Outcomes relating to all-roundedness and generic skills
Upon graduation from the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology,
students will be able to:
1.
critically assess propositions and arguments commonly encountered in daily life, at
work and in tertiary level studies;
2.
invoke creativity and other problem solving skills in dealing with problems
encountered in daily life, at work and in tertiary level studies;
3.
effectively use current information technology to carry out tasks commonly
encountered in daily life, at work and in tertiary level studies;
4.
demonstrate a professional attitude in terms of sense of responsibility, integrity,
self-confidence, service attitude, and teamwork;
5.
effectively communicate in spoken and written English at a competence level
required of associate professionals; and
6.
demonstrate ability for self-reflection and language skills which are prerequisites
for lifelong learning and continuous professional development.
Professional Outcomes
In addition to the shared learning scheme outcomes for the Associate Degree Scheme in
Science and Technology as a whole, graduates of individual ADSST programmes will be
able to:
Associate in Engineering
E1.
possess the foundation of specific professional skills and knowledge in engineering
for further academic and professional development;
E2.
understand basic engineering / computing principles and analytical skills;
E3.
apply engineering principles and analytical skills to solve daily life and engineering
problems using mathematical techniques, graphical methods and computer
technologies at a competence level required of an associate engineer;
2
E4.
design engineering components, processes or systems to meet design needs at a
competence level required of an associate engineer;
E5.
understand the trends of various engineering developments;
E6.
demonstrate an understanding of the responsibility and ethics of an associate
engineer; and
E7.
effectively communicate with engineers and non-engineering professionals in
written and spoken English.
IT1.
identify information technology (IT) problems, analyze requirements and apply
systematic approaches in the evaluation, design, implementation, and maintenance
of hardware and software solutions;
IT2.
communicate with IT and non-IT professionals in both written and spoken English
at a level of effectiveness sufficient for the presentation of IT systems or projects;
IT3.
build on the foundation of specific professional IT skills and knowledge acquired
in this programme with the potential to continue academic and professional
development in IT and IT-related fields; and
IT4.
recognise and appreciate potential opportunities and trends of IT to sustain a
competitive advantage in the IT industry.
Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business
SC1.
acquire a sound knowledge of computing technology and statistical principles and
techniques, including data analysis and operations research;
SC2.
use statistical methods to analyse relevant problems in business and industry; and
SC3.
apply necessary skills to provide solution to problems related to the analysis of
financial and business activities with the knowledge and techniques learned in the
programme.
Associate of Science
AS1. possess the broad education necessary to understand the major findings and ideas in
a variety of disciplines such as science, engineering, information technology and
business;
AS2. demonstrate understanding of methods, skills, tools and systems commonly used in
a variety of scientific and technological disciplines; and
3
AS3. pursue further academic development, clarify career goals and plan ahead for their
future - on the basis of better self-understanding of their own interests and
aptitudes, as well as better knowledge about different science-related disciplines.
4.
Entry Requirements
The minimum requirements for entry into the first year of the two-year programmes under
the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology are as follows:
(i) Satisfactory completion of Form 6; and
Grade E in 1 Hong Kong Advanced Level Examination (HKALE) subject; or,
Grade E in 2 HKALE (AS-Level) subjects, which may include Use of English, and
Chinese Language and Culture; and
Grade E in 5 Hong Kong Certificate of Education Examination (HKCEE) subjects
including English Language and Chinese Language or Grade E in 3 Hong Kong
Certificate of Education Examination (HKCEE) subjects plus Level 2 or above in
English and Chinese; or
(ii) Satisfactory completion of a one-year Pre-Associate Degree Programme offered by a
recognised institution; or
(iii) The equivalents of the above requirements.
For those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached the age
of 25 by 1 September in the admission year, they may apply as “mature” students. Mature
candidates are expected to demonstrate proficiency in English to study for the programme
to the satisfaction of the admissions panel.
5.
Granting of Award
Students would be eligible for the Associate Degree award if they satisfy all the conditions
listed below:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
6.
successful completion of the compulsory and elective subjects for a total of 60
credits within the permissible maximum duration;
satisfying the level, general education and award-specific requirements of
individual awards as stipulated in the Curriculum Structure of Section 8; and
having an Award GPA of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme.
Mode and Duration of Study
The four Associate Degree programmes within the Scheme are offered in full-time mode
of study. There are 2 semesters per year, each 14 weeks long. Students are required to
complete 15 credits per semester. Prior approval is needed for students to study more or
less than 15 credits per semester. The normal duration of the programmes is 2 years, and
the maximum duration allowed for completion is 4 years.
Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy all the conditions for an award
(see Section 5 above).
4
7.
Attendance
Students are required to have attained at least 70% of attendance in each of the subjects
they study; otherwise students may be disallowed to sit for the subject examination, downgraded or awarded fail grades for unsatisfactory attendance, participation and / or
punctuality.
Regular and punctual attendance at lectures, seminars and tutorials is important. If
students are late by 15 minutes for a tutorial or 30 minutes for a lecture, they will be
regarded as absent for that particular tutorial or lecture. Students who are often absent or
late for class will be asked to explain to their lecturers or tutors. In case of illness, the
original doctor’s certificate will be required.
Students must only attend the subject groups in which they are registered in. They will
have their names listed on the finalised class registers after the add / drop period only if
they are officially registered in that particular subject group. Attendance in other nonregistered classes is not allowed.
5
8.
Curriculum Structure
The four Associate Degree programmes offered under the Scheme are in full-time mode
based on a credit-based programme of study. To qualify for graduation, students are
required to complete a total of 60 credits specified as below:
•
•
•
36 credits of award-specific subjects
21 credits of general education (GE) subjects
3 credits of either a GE or an award-specific subject
The general education subjects provide students with fundamental generic skills and
chances to broaden their horizon through subject choices in a wide range of disciplines
such as arts, humanities, culture, history, China studies, languages, social sciences,
business studies as well as science and technology. The award-specific subjects provide
students with working knowledge in the selected discipline, and a foundation on which
further qualification may be obtained.
8.1
Subject Level and Subject Code
All subjects offered under the Scheme are at Level 1, 2, or 3, and most subjects are of 3
credits each. The first digit of the subject code denotes the level of the subject; for
example, CC2002 is a Level-2 subject.
8.2
Subject Nature
Each subject is classified as a science (S) or non-science (N-S) subject.
8.3
Credit and Level Requirements
Students are required to successfully complete a total of 60 credits of which
at least 24 credits are at Level 3;
at most 12 credits are below Level 2.
6
8.4
General Education Requirements
Students pursuing an award under the Scheme are required to successfully complete 5
compulsory plus 2 or 3 elective subjects in general education (GE) studies for a total of 21
or 24 credits.
(I)
GE Compulsory Subjects (15 credits)
Students are required to complete the following 5 GE compulsory subjects:
(II)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking
CC2005 Applied Computing
CC2042 English for Academic Studies (Science and Technology)
CC2048 English for Workplace Communication (Science and Technology)
(5)
For Associate in Engineering programme
• CC2030 Mathematics
For Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business programme
• CC2406 Calculus
For Associate in Information Technology and Associate of Science
programmes
• CC2053 Introduction to Calculus and Linear Algebra
GE Elective Subjects (6 or 9 credits)
Students are given the flexibility to complete 6 or 9 credits in GE elective subjects,
of which at least one subject should be selected from Group A of the following
subject areas listed in Table 1:
Group A
• Liberal Arts
Group B
• Business Studies
• China Studies
• Languages
• Liberal Arts
• Science and Technology
Should students decide to take 9 credits in GE elective subjects, they will have to
complete a total of 24 credits in GE subjects and 36 credits in award-specific
subjects for graduation. Should students choose to take 6 credits in GE elective
subjects, they will have to take an additional award-specific elective and complete a
total of 21 credits in GE subjects and 39 credits in award-specific subjects for
graduation.
Nonetheless, students are not allowed to take the individual programme’s awardspecific subjects (both compulsory and elective) as GE elective subjects, even
though those award-specific subjects are listed in Table 1.
Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement
of subject fee upon fulfillment of all the following conditions: (i) they have successfully completed the subject;
(ii) they have attained at least 50% of the mark of the subject assessments; and (iii) they have attended at least
70% of the classes of the subject. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the
subject.
7
Table 1 - General Education Elective Subjects
Group / Area
Nature
Subject Code & Title
GROUP A
Liberal Arts
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
CC2008
CC2014
CC2016
CC2019
CC2033
CC2034
CC2036
CC3003
CC3004
CC3006
CC3011
CC3015
CC3016
CC3017
CC3018
CC3021
CC3022
CC3023
CC3026
CC3027
CC3028
CC3029
CC3030
CC3031
Chinese Civilisation
The History and Culture of Hong Kong
Gender Issues
Logic
Social Psychology
The History of Modern China and the World (From 1842 - Now)
History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of Southeast Asia
Selected Readings of Hong Kong Fiction
GROUP B
N-S
CC2101 Financial Accounting
CC2102 Theory and Practice of Management
N-S
N-S
CC2104 Introduction to Microeconomics
N-S
CC2126 Introduction to Marketing
Business Studies
N-S
CC3144 Practicum in Workplace
N-S
CC3145 Extensive Practicum in Workplace^
CC3150 Organisational Behaviour
N-S
N-S
CC3153 Principles of Knowledge Management
N-S
CC3121 Business Environment in China
N-S
CC3122 China's Economy
N-S
CC3411 Chinese Family and Culture
China Studies
N-S
CC3467 Social Development in China
N-S
CC3471 Social Problems and Social Issues in Contemporary China
N-S
CC3492 Chinese Government and Politics
N-S
CC2009 Chinese Language
N-S
CC2010 Elementary French
N-S
CC2011 Japanese I
N-S
CC2012 Elementary Putonghua
N-S
CC2028 Grammar in Context
N-S
CC2031 Japanese II
Languages
CC2131 Chinese for Business Communication
N-S
N-S
CC3020 Oral Communication in English
N-S
CC3024 Japanese III
N-S
CC3025 Japanese IV
N-S
CC3129 Business Putonghua
N-S
CC1002 Astronomy and Fortune-telling
N-S
CC1003 Chinese Calligraphy and Painting
N-S
CC1005 Buddhist Culture and Art
Liberal Arts
N-S
CC1007 The Art of Chinese Board Games
N-S
CC1008 Appreciation of Asian and Western Music
S
CC1006 Foundation of Chinese Medicine
S
CC2006 Introduction to Internet Technology
S
CC2007 Environmental Science
Science and Technology
S
CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health
S
CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science
S = Science subject
N-S = Non-science subject
^ Subject of 6 credits
Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee upon
fulfillment of all the following conditions: (i) they have successfully completed the subject; (ii) they have attained at least 50% of the
mark of the subject assessments; and (iii) they have attended at least 70% of the classes of the subject. Students are required to open a
CEF account before commencement of the subject. HKCC reserves the right to cancel and / or not to offer individual subjects.
8
8.5
Award-specific Requirements
8.5.1. Associate in Engineering
Apart from the general education subjects, all students under Associate in Engineering
programme are required to complete 7 award-specific compulsory and 5 or 6 awardspecific elective subjects# for a total of 36 or 39 credits in the area of Engineering.
(I) Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (21 credits)
Students are required to complete the following 7 award-specific compulsory subjects.
These subjects provide students with a broad foundation and essential knowledge
needed for various disciplines of engineering. The 4 Level-2 subjects below are
normally to be taken in Stage 1.
•
•
•
CC2201
CC2302
CC2305
•
CC2307
Level 2
Basic Electricity and
Electronics
Engineering Science
•
•
•
Level 3
Engineering
Management
CC3305
CC3309 Society and the Engineer
CC3732 Engineering Graphics and
Computing
(II) Award-specific Elective Subjects* (15 or 18 credits#)
Students are required to complete 5 or 6 subjects chosen freely from the pool of
subjects below OR concentrate in one of the listed streams.
Level 2
• CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms
Level 3
• CC3202
• CC3203
• CC3204
• CC3209
• CC3301
• CC3302
• CC3303
• CC3304
• CC3306
• CC3307
• CC3308
• CC3310
• CC3311
• CC3312
• CC3313
• CC3314
• CC3315
• CC3316
• CC3730
Quality Engineering
Thermofluids
Linear Systems
Engineering Project
Applied Mechanics
9
•
CC3731 Electrical Engineering
Students who wish to concentrate in one of the following streams should complete at
least 4 subjects (12 credits) in that stream. The chosen stream will be added in
parentheses in the transcript of study for students successfully complete 4 or more
subjects from one single stream.
Electrical and Electronics Engineering Stream
• CC3204 Data Communications and Networking
• CC3301 Communication Systems Principles
• CC3302 Computer Systems Principles
• CC3304 Digital System Design
• CC3313 Linear Systems
• CC3731 Electrical Engineering
Industrial and Systems Engineering Stream
• CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems
• CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods
• CC3307 Manufacturing Technology
• CC3308 Quality Engineering
• CC3310 Statistics and Probability
• CC3311 Engineering Materials
• CC3314 Engineering Project
Information Engineering Stream
• CC3202 Software Engineering
• CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design
• CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems
Mechanical and Building Services Engineering Stream
• CC3312 Thermofluids
• CC3314 Engineering Project
• CC3315 Applied Mechanics
• CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment
• CC3730 Dynamics and Control
• CC3731 Electrical Engineering
#
*
Please refer to Section 8.4 General Education Requirements
The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some
subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for
individual subjects, please refer to Table 7.
10
Table 2 - Study Pattern for Associate in Engineering*
Stage
1
Semester 1
Semester 2
CC2002 Creative and Critical
Thinking
CC2048 English for Workplace
Communication (Science and
Technology)
CC2201 Principles of Programming
CC2030 Mathematics
CC2302 Engineering Mathematics
CC2042 English for Academic Studies CC2305 Basic Electricity and
(Science and Technology)
Electronics
CC3732 Engineering Graphics and
CC2307 Engineering Science
Computing
CC3309 Society and the Engineer
2
CC3305 Engineering Management
TWO award-specific elective subjects #
THREE award-specific elective
subjects #
ONE GE elective subject #
ONE GE / award-specific elective
subject #
* HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern.
#
Students should ensure that the general education and / or award-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level,
general education / subject domain and award-specific requirements. It is students’ sole responsibility to ensure that they have
completed all the requirements for graduation.
11
8.5.2
Apart from the general education subjects, all students under Associate in Information
Technology programme are required to complete 8 award-specific compulsory and 4 or
5 award-specific elective subjects# for a total of 36 or 39 credits in the area of IT.
These subjects provide students with the core knowledge and working skills required
by information technology professionals. The 3 Level-2 subjects below are normally
to be taken in Stage 1. A Programming Project offered in the semester before
graduation provides an opportunity for students to integrate and apply their knowledge
and skills.
Level 2
Level 3
• CC2201 Principles of Programming
• CC3201 Fundamentals of Database
Systems
• CC2202 Computer System
Architectures
• CC2203 Data Structures and
• CC3204 Data Communications and
Algorithms
Networking
• CC3205 Operating Systems
• CC3206 Programming Project
subjects below. Students who wish to concentrate in one or more areas of studies may
choose their award-specific elective subjects accordingly.
Computing
CC2204
CC3203
CC3207
CC3208
CC3209
CC3210
Internet and Multimedia Technology
• CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics
• CC3207 Object Oriented Programming
• CC3208 Internet Programming
• CC3729 Computer Game Programming
• CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design
#
*
12
Table 3 - Study Pattern for Associate in Information Technology*
Stage
1
Semester 1
Semester 2
Thinking
Technology)
CC2202 Computer System Architectures
English for Academic Studies
CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms
CC2053 Introduction to Calculus and
ONE award-specific elective subject #
Linear Algebra
CC2042
CC3201 Fundamentals of Database
Systems
CC3206 Programming Project
CC3202 Software Engineering
2
CC3204 Data Communications and
Networking
subjects #
CC3205 Operating Systems
subject #
#
13
8.5.3. Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business
Apart from the general education subjects, all students under Associate in Statistics and
Computing for Business programme are required to complete 9 award-specific
compulsory and 3 or 4 award-specific elective subjects# for a total of 36 or 39 credits.
The 4 Level-2 subjects below are normally to be taken in Stage 1.
•
Level 2
•
•
•
•
CC2422 Linear Algebra
CC2425 Statistics for Business I
•
•
•
•
Level 3
Systems
Applied
Business
CC3401
Computing Project
CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods
CC3430 Financial Mathematics
CC3476 Statistics for Business II
subjects below.
Level 3
CC3203
CC3208
CC3210
CC3409
CC3423
CC3456
CC3458
CC3475
CC3477
CC3733
#
*
Further Calculus
14
Table 4 - Study Pattern for Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business*
Stage
Semester 1
1
Semester 2
Technology)
CC2042
CC2406 Calculus
CC2422 Linear Algebra
CC2425 Statistics for Business I
Systems
CC3401 Applied Business Computing
Project
2
TWO award-specific elective subjects#
ONE award-specific elective subject #
subject #
#
8.5.4. Associate of Science
Apart from the 7 or 8 general education subjects, all students under Associate of Science
programme are required to complete 3 award-specific compulsory and 9 or 10 awardspecific elective subjects# for a total of 36 or 39 credits.
The Level-2 subjects below are normally to be taken in Stage 1.
•
•
CC2201
CC2203
•
OR
CC2205
OR
CC2417
•
Level 2
Data Structures and
Algorithms ^
•
CC3310
Level 3
General Physics ^
Human Biology I ^
^ The mutually exclusive compulsory subject enables students to focus in a certain area of study.
15
Students are required to complete 9 or 10 subjects either chosen freely from the pool of
subjects below OR concentrate in one of the listed area of concentration.
Level 2
• CC2007 Environmental Science
• CC2101 Financial Accounting
• CC2110 Food Service Operations
• CC2202 Computer System Architectures 1
• CC2204 Discrete Mathematics
• CC2205 General Physics
• CC2302 Engineering Mathematics
• CC2307 Engineering Science
• CC2404 Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care
• CC2417 Human Biology I
• CC2418 Human Biology II
• CC2439 General Chemistry
• CC2441 Basic Laboratory Techniques and Safety
Level 3
• CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health
• CC3135 Inventory and Warehousing Management
• CC3143 Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management
• CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems
• CC3205 Operating Systems 2
• CC3206 Programming Project 3
• CC3207 Object Oriented Programming
• CC3208 Internet Programming
• CC3210 Database Design and Implementation
• CC3302 Computer Systems Principles 1 2
• CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems
• CC3305 Engineering Management
• CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods
• CC3307 Manufacturing Technology
• CC3308 Quality Engineering
• CC3309 Society and the Engineer
• CC3313 Linear Systems
• CC3314 Engineering Project 3
16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CC3315 Applied Mechanics
CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment
CC3317 Food Chemistry
CC3318 Physical Chemistry
CC3319 Organic Chemistry
CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project 3
CC3406 Basic Immunology
CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods
CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics
CC3434 General Microbiology
CC3456 Management Information Systems
CC3458 Operations Research for Business
CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis
CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis
CC3487 Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology
CC3728 Analytical Chemistry
CC3729 Computer Game Programming
CC3730 Dynamics and Control
CC3731 Electrical Engineering
CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing
CC3733 Further Calculus
CC3734 General Biochemistry
CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design
CC3744 Biotechnology
CC3745 Cell Biology
CC3751 Science of Human Movement
Area of Concentration
Students who wish to concentrate in one of the following subject areas should
complete at least 6 subjects (18 credits) in that area. The area of concentration will be
added in parentheses in the transcript of study for students successfully complete 6 or
more subjects from one single area of concentration.
Applied Physics
• CC2205 General Physics
• CC2302 Engineering Mathematics
• CC2307 Engineering Science
• CC2404 Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care
• CC3315 Applied Mechanics
Applied Biological and Chemical Sciences
17
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CC2110 Food Service Operations
CC2417 Human Biology I
CC2418 Human Biology II
CC2439 General Chemistry
CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health
CC3406 Basic Immunology
CC3434 General Microbiology
CC3728 Analytical Chemistry
• CC2007 Environmental Science
• CC2417 Human Biology I
• CC2418 Human Biology II
• CC2439 General Chemistry
• CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment
• CC3434 General Microbiology
• CC3487 Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology
• CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science
Information and Management Science
• CC2204 Discrete Mathematics
• CC3135 Inventory and Warehousing Management
• CC3143 Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management
• CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems
• CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods
• CC3458 Operations Research for Business
• CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis
• CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis
• CC3733 Further Calculus
#
*
1
2
3
CC2202 and CC3302 are mutually exclusive.
18
Table 5 - Study Pattern for Associate of Science*
(I)
Study Pattern A
Study Pattern A is more suitable for students who wish to concentrate in the area of Information
and Management Science.
Stage
1
Semester 1
Semester 2
Thinking
Technology)
CC2042 English for Academic Studies
Linear Algebra
subjects #
CC3310 Statistics and Probability
subjects #
2
subjects #
subject #
19
(II)
Study Pattern B
Study Pattern B is more suitable for other areas of concentration.
Stage
1
Semester 1
Semester 2
Thinking
Technology)
CC2042 English for Academic Studies
Linear Algebra
CC2205 General Physics
OR
subjects #
CC3310 Statistics and Probability
subjects#
2
subjects #
ONE GE elective subject#
subject #
#
20
8.6
Programme Curriculum Maps
Each of programme curriculum maps in Table 6.1 - 6.4 presents a mapping of the subjects
available to students of that programme in relation to the intended learning outcomes as
presented in Section 3. Each programme curriculum map denotes how each of the Scheme
and Programme-specific outcomes are introduced, reinforced and assessed. It is worth
noting that the Scheme and Programme-specific outcomes are achieved not just through
the content of the subjects, but also through the variety of learning and teaching activities
through which the contents are delivered.
Furthermore, co-curricular student development activities organised by the Student
Development Committee, the Student Union or other organisations also contribute to the
Scheme and Programme-specific outcomes.
Key to Table 6.1 – 6.4:
I
R
A
The learning leading to the particular outcome is introduced in that subject
The learning leading to the particular outcome is reinforced in that subject
The learning leading to the particular outcome is assessed in that subject
21
Table 6.1 – Programme Curriculum Map of Associate in Engineering
Subject
Code
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity
and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
Scheme
Outcome
5
Communication Skills
(English)**
Scheme
Outcome
6
Selfreflection,
Skills for
Life Long
Learning,
etc.**
Prog.
Outcome
E1#
Prog.
Outcome
E2#
Prog.
Outcome
E3#
Prog.
Outcome
E4#
Prog.
Outcome
E5#
Prog.
Outcome
E6#
Prog.
Outcome
E7#
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I
I
I,A
I,A
I,R,A
I
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I,A
I,A
I
General Education Compulsory Subjects (15 credits)
CC2002
I,A
I,A
CC2005
Applied Computing
R
R,A
CC2030
Mathematics
I,A
R,A
CC2042
CC2048
I,A
R
English for Workplace
Technology)
I.A
General Education Elective Subjects (6-9 credits)
Over 50
subjects
from 2
groups
General Education Electives
(6 or 9 credits)
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I,R,A
I,R,A
R,A
I,R,A
I,R,A
R,A
Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (21 credits)
CC2201
A
A
CC2302
I,R,A
I,A
I
I
I,R,A
I,R
I
CC2305
Basic Electricity and
Electronics
I
I
I
I,R,A
I,R
I
CC2307
Engineering Science
I
I
I
I,R
I
CC3305
I,A
I,R
I,R,A
R
R
I,R
CC3309
R
I,R,A
R
I,R
I,R
CC3732
Engineering Graphics and
Computing
I
I
I
I
I,R,A
I
I
I
I,R,A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Award-specific Elective Subjects (15-18 credits)
CC2203
Data Structures and
Algorithms
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I
I,R
CC3202
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
22
I
I
I,A
I
Subject
Code
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity
and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
Scheme
Outcome
5
(English)**
Scheme
Outcome
6
Selfreflection,
Skills for
Life Long
Learning,
etc.**
Prog.
Outcome
E1#
Prog.
Outcome
E2#
Prog.
Outcome
E3#
Prog.
Outcome
E4#
Prog.
Outcome
E5#
I,A
I
Prog.
Outcome
E6#
Prog.
Outcome
E7#
Award-specific Elective Subjects (cont’d)
CC3203
CC3204
CC3209
CC3301
Information Systems Analysis
and Design
Data Communications and
Networking
Internetworking Protocols
and Systems
Communication Systems
Principles
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
I
I
I,R
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
R,A
R,A
I
I,R
CC3302
CC3303
Design of Production and
Service Systems
CC3304
CC3306
Industrial Engineering
Techniques and Methods
CC3307
I,R
CC3308
Quality Engineering
I,R
CC3310
CC3311
CC3312
Thermofluids
CC3313
Linear Systems
CC3314
Engineering Project
CC3315
Applied Mechanics
CC3316
Architectural Technology in
the Built Environment
I
CC3730
R
CC3731
R
**
#
I
R
R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I
I,R
R
I
I
I,R
R
R
I
I,R
R,A
R,A
I,R,A
R
R
I
I
R
For the full outcome statements of the AD Scheme, please refer to Section 3.
For the full outcome statements of the Associate in Engineering programme, please refer to Section 3.
23
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,A
I
I,R
R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R
R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I
I,R
I,R
R,A
I,R
I
I
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I
I
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I
I
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I
I,R
I,R
R
R,A
R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I
I,R
I,R
I
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
I
I,R
R
I,R
I
Table 6.2 - Programme Curriculum Map of Associate in Information Technology
Subject
Code
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity
and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
Scheme
Outcome
5
Communication
Skills
(English)**
Scheme
Outcome
6
Selfreflection,
Skills for
Life Long
Learning,
etc.**
I,A
I,A
Prog.
Outcome
IT1#
Prog.
Outcome
IT2#
Prog.
Outcome
IT3#
Prog.
Outcome
IT4#
I,A
I,A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I,A
I,A
CC2002
CC2005
CC2042
CC2048
CC2053
I,A
I,A
Applied Computing
R
R,A
English for Academic Studies (Science
and Technology)
English for Workplace Communication
Introduction to Calculus and Linear
Algebra
I,R
I,A
R
I,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I
Over 50
subjects
from 2
groups
General Education Electives
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
CC2201
A
A
I
I
CC2202
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
CC2203
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
CC3201
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
CC3202
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
CC3204
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3205
Operating Systems
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3206
Programming Project
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
24
I,A
Subject
Code
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity
and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
R,A
I,A
I,A
I
I
Scheme
Outcome
5
(English)**
Scheme
Outcome
6
Selfreflection,
Skills for
Life Long
Learning,
etc.**
Prog.
Outcome
#
IT1
Prog.
Outcome
#
IT2
Prog.
Outcome
#
IT3
Prog.
Outcome
#
IT4
CC2204
CC2305
CC3203
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3207
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3208
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3209
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3210
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3304
I
I,R
CC3729
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3736
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
**
#
R,A
R,A
I
For the full outcome statements of the Associate in Information Technology programme, please refer to Section 3.
25
I,A
I,A
R,A
R
I,R
R,A
R,A
R
I
I
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
Table 6.3 - Programme Curriculum Map of Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business
Subject
Code
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
Scheme
Outcome
5
Communication
Skills (English)**
Scheme
Outcome
6
Self-reflection,
Skills for Life
Long Learning,
etc.**
I,A
I,A
Prog.
Outcome
#
SC1
Prog.
Outcome
#
SC2
Prog.
Outcome
#
SC3
CC2002
I,A
I,A
CC2005
Applied Computing
R
R,A
CC2042
CC2048
CC2406
I,A
R
English for Workplace Communication
Calculus
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
Over 50
subjects
from 2
groups
General Education Electives (6
credits)
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
CC2101
I,A
I,A
CC2201
A
A
CC2422
Linear Algebra
I,A
I,A
CC2425
I,A
CC3201
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
CC3401
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3403
R,A
CC3430
CC3476
I
I
I,A
I,A
I,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3203
Information Systems Analysis and
Design
R,A
R,A
R,A
26
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
Subject
Code
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
Scheme
Outcome
5
Communication
Skills (English)**
R,A
Scheme
Outcome
6
Self-reflection,
Skills for Life
Long Learning,
etc.**
Prog.
Outcome
SC1#
Prog.
Outcome
SC2#
Prog.
Outcome
SC3#
CC3208
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3210
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3409
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3423
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3456
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3458
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3475
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3477
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3733
Further Calculus
R,A
R,A
I,R
**
#
R,A
R,A
I
For the full outcome statements of the Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business programme, please refer to Section 3.
27
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
Table 6.4 - Programme Curriculum Map of Associate of Science
Subject
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity
and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
Scheme
Outcome
5
Communication
Skills
(English)**
Scheme
Outcome
6
Self-reflection,
Skills for Life
Long Learning,
etc.**
Prog.
Outcome
AS1#
I,A
I,A
I
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I
I,A
I,A
I
Prog.
Outcome
AS2#
Prog.
Outcome
AS3#
I,R
R
CC2002
I,A
I,A
CC2005
Applied Computing
R
R,A
CC2042
CC2048
CC2053
I,A
R
English for Academic Studies (Science and
Technology)
English for Workplace Communication (Science
and Technology)
I,R
I
I
Over 50
subjects
from 2
groups
General Education Electives (6 or 9 credits)
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
A
I
I
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I/R/A
I,A
I,A
R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,A
I,A
CC2201
CC3310
A
R
I,R
One of the following three subjects:
CC2203
R,A
R,A
CC2205
General Physics
I,R,A
I,R
CC2417
Human Biology I
I,R
I,R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,R
I,R
CC2007
I,R
CC2101
I,A
CC2110
CC2202
R,A
R,A
R
R,A
I
I,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
28
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
Subject
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity
and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
Scheme
Outcome
5
Communication
Skills
(English)**
I,A
Scheme
Outcome
6
Self-reflection,
Skills for Life
Long Learning,
etc.**
Prog.
Outcome
AS1#
Prog.
Outcome
AS2#
Prog.
Outcome
AS3#
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I
I,A
I,A
I
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I
I
I,A
I,A
I
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R,A
CC2203
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
CC2204
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
CC2302
I,R,A
I,A
CC2305
I
CC2307
Engineering Science
I
I
CC2205
General Physics
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
CC2404
Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health
Care
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
CC2417
Human Biology I
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
CC2418
Human Biology II
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
CC2439
General Chemistry
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
CC2441
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R,A
CC3008
I,R
I,R,A
R
I,R
R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
R
I
R
I,R
CC3135
I
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R
I
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
CC3143
Business Logistics and Supply Chain
Management
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
CC3201
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
I,A
CC3202
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,A
I
CC3203
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,A
I,R,A
R
CC3204
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
CC3205
Operating Systems
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
CC3206
Programming Project
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
CC3207
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
29
Subject
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity
and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
Scheme
Outcome
5
Communication
Skills
(English)**
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
Scheme
Outcome
6
Self-reflection,
Skills for Life
Long Learning,
etc.**
Prog.
Outcome
#
AS1
Prog.
Outcome
#
AS2
Prog.
Outcome
#
AS3
R,A
R,A
R
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
I,R,A
I,R,A
R
I,R,A
I,R,A
R
I,R
I,A
I,R,A
I
I,R
R,A
R,A
R
R
I,R
I
I
I,R
I,A
I,R,A
I,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
R,A
I,R
R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
R
R,A
R
I,R
R,A
R,A
R
I,R
I
R,A
R
I,R
I
I
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
R,A
R,A
R
CC3208
R,A
CC3209
CC3210
CC3301
CC3302
CC3303
CC3304
CC3305
I,A
CC3306
R
CC3307
I,R
CC3308
Quality Engineering
I,R
CC3309
R
I,R,A
CC3311
R
I
CC3312
Thermofluids
CC3313
Linear Systems
CC3314
Engineering Project
CC3315
Applied Mechanics
CC3316
CC3401
R,A
CC3403
R,A
R,A
R,A
I
I,R
I
R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
R
I
I
I,R
R
I,R
R,A
R,A
I,R,A
R
R
I
I
I
R,A
R,A
30
R,A
R,A
R
Subject
Subject Title
Scheme
Outcome
1
Critical
Thinking**
Scheme
Outcome
2
Creativity
and
Problem
Solving**
Scheme
Outcome
3
Information
Technology**
Scheme
Outcome
4
Professional
Attitude**
I,R,A
R
R
Scheme
Outcome
5
Communication
Skills
(English)**
Scheme
Outcome
6
Self-reflection,
Skills for Life
Long Learning,
etc.**
Prog.
Outcome
AS1#
Prog.
Outcome
AS2#
Prog.
Outcome
AS3#
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
R
CC3406
Basic Immunology
CC3409
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
CC3423
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
CC3430
R,A
R,A
R
CC3434
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
CC3456
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3458
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3475
R,A
I,R,A
I,R,A
CC3476
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I
R
R,A
R
I,R
R
R,A
R
I,R
R
R,A
R
I
I,R,A
I
R,A
R,A
I,R,A
I,R
R
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
R,A
R,A
R
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3477
CC3487
Introduction to Pathophysiology and
Pharmacology
CC3728
I,R
I,R
I,R,A
R
I,R,A
I,R
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
I,R,A
I,R
I,R,A
I,R
I,R,A
R
I,R
CC3729
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3730
R
CC3731
R
CC3732
I
CC3733
Further Calculus
CC3734
I,R,A
R,A
R
I,R,A
I
I
I
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3735
I,R
I,R,A
R
I,R
CC3736
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3744
Biotechnology
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
31
R,A
R
CC3745
Cell Biology
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
R,A
R,A
R,A
CC3751
R,A
R,A
R,A
R,A
R
R,A
R,A
R,A
**For the full outcome statements of the AD Scheme, please refer to Section 3.
# For the full outcome statements of the Associate of Science programme, please refer to Section 3.
32
9.
The medium of instruction is English, unless otherwise specified in the subject syllabuses.
10.
Teaching and Learning Methods
The teaching and learning philosophy underlying the Scheme is based on a holistic,
diversified, and flexible approach – one which enables students to achieve the intended
learning outcomes. Different teaching and learning methods are used. Some are more
effective in building up students’ subject knowledge while others contribute more to
developing students’ generic skills and professional competence.
Teaching and learning methods may vary from subject to subject and may include
interactive lectures, tutorials, case-based learning, problem-based learning, simulation, role
plays, group work, practicum, experiential learning, fieldwork, guest talks, company visits,
study tours, etc. The diversity of teaching and learning methods addresses the need to use
the most appropriate ways to achieve the intended learning outcomes of each subject.
Teaching is conducted through lectures as well as tutorials and/or seminars. To maximise
students’ learning, subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new concepts and
imparting knowledge, but also act as facilitators to encourage students to share their ideas
and experience through class discussions, case studies, oral presentations, and group
activities. Laboratory sessions and/or practicum may include for practical subjects to
provide hands-on practice. For award-specific subjects, more emphasis will be given to
the competence-based and practical orientation of the curriculum.
11.
Assessment and Examinations
11.1
Principles of Assessment
Assessments used in the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology can be
developmental, summative or both. For summative assessment, the prime purpose is to
enable students to demonstrate that they have met the aims and intended learning
outcomes of the programme and, in particular, that they have fulfilled the requirements of
each subject and have achieved the standard commensurate with the award at the end of
their studies. Methods of assessment will be selected on the basis of their suitability to
assess the extent to which students have achieved the intended learning outcomes.
Assessment will also provide constant feedback to students, thus serving a developmental
function as well. Students will be informed of their performance in the assessment so that
they are aware of the extent to which they have attained the intended learning outcomes,
and of the areas that they need to make improvements.
33
11.2
Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel
The Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic
standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results. SARP reviews the
distribution of grades within a subject and finalises the grades at the end of each semester /
term before submitting them to the Board of Examiners (BoE). SARP is also responsible
for granting late assessments to students and deciding the form of late assessments.
The SARP is chaired by the Director of HKCC or his delegate. Members of the SARP
include the relevant subject examiners / lecturers, and where appropriate, the Scheme
Leader, the Assistant Scheme Leader, Programme Leaders, Assistant Programme Leaders,
the Deputy Programme Leader, and other co-opted members.
11.3
Role of Board of Examiners
The Board of Examiners (BoE) meets at the end of each semester to review students’
progress and is responsible to the Academic Board of the College of Professional and
Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decisions on:
1.
2.
3.
the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the
programme;
de-registration cases; and
cases with extenuating circumstances.
The BoE is chaired by the Director of HKCC or his delegate. Members of the BoE include
the Scheme Leader, the Assistant Scheme Leader, Programme Leaders, the Deputy
Programme Leader (where appropriate) and other co-opted members.
11.4
Assessment Methods
Students’ performance in a subject shall be assessed by coursework and/or examinations,
as deemed appropriate. Where both methods are used, the weighting of each in the overall
subject grade has been clearly stated in this definitive scheme document. To pass a
subject, students must obtain a pass grade in both coursework AND examination, if
any. Satisfying (or otherwise) the attendance requirement as stipulated in Section 7 will
also affect the pass and failure of a student in a subject.
All assessment methods will be designed on the basis that they can assess the extent to
which students have attained the intended learning outcomes. The methods will include
objective questions, open-ended essays, group projects, field study, laboratory work,
presentations, reflective journals, learning portfolios, case study, and various forms of
classroom participation.
At the beginning of each semester, the subject lecturer will inform students of the details
of the assessment methods to be used within the assessment framework as specified in the
definitive scheme document.
34
Table 7 - Assessment Weighting
Subject Domain
Subject
Code
CC2101
CC2102
Subject Title
CC2104
CC2126
CC3144
CC3145
CC3150
Coursework
(%)
40
Exam
(%)
60
50
50
Nature
Prerequisite
N-S
Nil
N-S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
Introduction
to
Marketing
Business Studies
100
N-S
Nil
Practicum in Workplace1
100
N-S
Nil
Extensive Practicum in Workplace1
50
50
N-S
Nil
Organisational Behaviour2
Principles of Knowledge
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC3153
Management
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC3121 Business Environment in China
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC3122 China’s Economy
100
N-S
Nil
CC3411 Chinese Family and Culture
China Studies
100
N-S
Nil
CC3467 Social Development in China
Social Problems and Social Issues in
100
N-S
Nil
CC3471
Contemporary China
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC3492 Chinese Government and Politics
60
40
N-S
Nil
CC2009 Chinese Language
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC2010 Elementary French
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC2011 Japanese I
60
40
N-S
Nil
CC2012
Elementary
Putonghua
General
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC2028 Grammar in Context
Education
50
50
N-S
CC2011*
CC2031 Japanese II
Subjects
100
N-S
Nil
CC2042
Languages
English for Workplace
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC2048 Communication (Science and
Technology)
Chinese for Business
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC2131
Communication3
100
N-S
Nil
CC3020 Oral Communication in English
50
50
N-S
CC2031#
CC3024 Japanese III
50
50
N-S
CC3024@
CC3025 Japanese IV
60
40
N-S
CC2012^
CC3129 Business Putonghua
60
40
N-S
Nil
CC1002 Astronomy and Fortune-telling
100
N-S
Nil
CC1003 Chinese Calligraphy and Painting
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC1005 Buddhist Culture and Art
100
N-S
Nil
CC1007 The Art of Chinese Board Games
Appreciation of Asian and Western
100
N-S
Nil
CC1008
Liberal Arts
Music
60
40
N-S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC2008 Chinese Civilisation
50
50
N-S
Nil
CC2014 Aesthetics and Art Appreciation
40
60
N-S
Nil
CC2016 Understanding Society
S = Science subject
1
2
CC2108 Organisational Behaviour and CC3150 are mutually exclusive.
3
CC2113 Chinese for Business Executives and CC2131are mutually exclusive.
* Or a minimum of 42 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official
document.
# Or a minimum of 84 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official
document.
@
Or a minimum of 126 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official
document.
^ Or equivalent proficiency of Putonghua, which must be supported by an official document.
CEF account before commencement of the subject. CC2012 and CC3129 are registered as one CEF course, students therefore have to
complete BOTH subjects in order to be eligible for CEF reimbursement. HKCC reserves the right to cancel and / or not to offer
individual subjects.
35
Table 7 - Assessment Weighting (Continued)
Subject Domain
Subject
Code
CC2019
CC2033
CC2034
CC2036
CC3003
CC3004
50
Nature
Prerequisite
N-S
N-S
Nil
Nil
50
N-S
Nil
60
40
40
60
N-S
N-S
Nil
Nil
40
60
N-S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
60
40
N-S
60
N-S
CC3015
Logic
40
CC3016
CC3017
60
60
40
40
N-S
N-S
50
50
N-S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
50
100
40
60
50
60
40
N-S
N-S
N-S
N-S
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
60
40
N-S
Nil
CC3031
CC1006
Social Psychology
The History of Modern China and
the World (From 1842 - Now)
History, Culture, Economic and
Social Development of East Asia
Social Development of Southeast
Asia
Selected Readings of Hong Kong
Fiction
Foundation of Chinese Medicine
Nil
CC2002 or
CC2427
Nil
CC2019
60
100
40
-
N-S
S
CC2005
Applied Computing 4
60
40
S
CC2006
CC2007
CC2030
Mathematics 5
Introduction to Calculus and Linear
Algebra 5
Calculus
Food Hygiene and Nutritional
Health
50
40
50
50
60
50
S
S
S
Nil
Nil
Basic
computer
knowledge and
window
operations
Nil
Nil
Nil
50
50
S
Nil
40
60
S
Nil
CC3021
CC3022
CC3023
CC3026
CC3027
CC3028
CC3029
CC3030
Science and
Technology
Exam
(%)
40
40
CC3011
CC3018
General
Education
Subjects
The History and Culture of Hong
Kong
Coursework
(%)
60
60
The Perspectives of Eastern and
Western Cultures
Gender Issues
CC3006
Liberal Arts
Subject Title
CC2053
CC2406
CC3008
CC3735
50
50
S
Nil
60
40
S
Nil
S = Science subject
4
CC2004 and CC2005 are mutually exclusive
5
CC2053, CC2003 and CC2030 are exclusive to each other.
36
Subject Domain
Subject
Code
CC2201
CC2203
CC2302
CC2305
CC2307
CC3202
Exam
(%)
Nature
Prerequisite
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
S
S
S
S
S
S
Nil
CC2201
Nil
Nil
Nil
CC2201
40
60
S
CC2201
40
60
S
Nil
40
60
S
CC3204
40
40
60
60
S
S
CC2302
Nil
40
60
S
Nil
40
40
60
60
S
S
CC2305
Nil
100
0
S
Nil
40
60
S
Nil
CC2003 OR
CC2030 OR
CC2053
Nil
CC2003 OR
CC2030 OR
CC2053
Nil
CC2302
CC2302
CC3732
CC2003 OR
CC2030 OR
CC2053
CC3307
CC3308
Quality Engineering
40
60
S
CC3309
70
30
S
CC3310
40
60
S
CC3311
CC3312
CC3313
CC3314
Thermofluids
Linear Systems
Engineering Project 7
40
40
40
100
60
60
60
0
S
S
S
S
CC3315
Applied Mechanics 8
40
60
S
40
60
S
Nil
40
40
60
60
S
S
CC2302
CC2305
100
0
S
Nil
CC3204
CC3209
CC3301
CC3302
CC3303
CC3304
CC3305
CC3306
Engineering
6
Coursework
(%)
Engineering Science
Design
Networking
Internetworking
Protocols
and
Systems
Design of Production and Service
Systems
Industrial Engineering Techniques
and Methods
CC3203
Awardspecific
Subjects
Subject Title
CC3316
CC3730
CC3731
CC3732
Architectural Technology in the
Built Environment 9
Computing
S = Science subject
6
CC2127 Principles of Business Programming and CC2201 are mutually exclusive.
7
CC3206 Programming Project, CC3314 and CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project are exclusive to each other.
8
CC2304 Engineering Mechanics and CC3315 are mutually exclusive.
9
CC2306 Built Environment and CC3316 are mutually exclusive.
37
Subject Domain
Subject
Code
CC2201
CC2202
CC2203
CC2204
CC2305
CC3201
CC3202
CC3203
CC3204
Awardspecific
Subjects
Information
Technology
Computer System Architectures 11
Design
Networking
Coursework
(%)
Exam
(%)
Nature
Prerequisite
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Nil
Nil
CC2201
Nil
Nil
CC2201
CC2201
40
60
S
CC2201
40
60
S
Nil
CC3205
Operating Systems 12
40
60
S
CC3206
CC3207
CC3208
100
50
50
0
50
50
S
S
S
40
60
S
CC3204
50
50
S
CC3201
CC3304
Programming Project 13
Internetworking Protocols and
Systems
Database Design and
Implementation
40
60
S
CC3729
50
50
S
CC2305
CC2005 &
CC2201
40
60
S
Nil
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
N-S
S
S
S
S
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
CC2201
40
60
S
CC2201
50
50
S
CC2201
50
50
S
CC3201
CC3210
100
-
S
#
CC3403
CC3409
CC3423
CC3430
CC3456
CC3458
CC3475
Multimedia and User Interface
Design 14
Principles of Programming 10
Linear Algebra
Design
Database Design and
Implementation
Applied Business Computing
Project 13
40
40
60
40
50
40
100
60
60
40
60
50
60
-
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
CC3476
40
60
S
CC3477
CC3733
Further Calculus
40
40
60
60
S
S
Nil
CC3403
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
CC2425 OR
CC3310
Nil
CC2406
CC3736
CC2101
CC2201
CC2422
CC2425
CC3201
CC3203
CC3208
CC3210
Statistics and
Computing for
Business
10
CC2202 &
CC2203
^
CC2201
CC2201
CC3209
Awardspecific
Subjects
Subject Title
CC3401
S = Science subject
10
11
CC2202 and CC3302 Computer Systems Principles are mutually exclusive.
12
CC3205 and CC3302 Computer Systems Principles are mutually exclusive.
13
CC3206, CC3314 Engineering Project and CC3401 are exclusive to each other.
14
CC3211Human Factors and User Interfaces and CC3736 are mutually exclusive.
# Satisfactory completion of 6 or more Award-specific subjects offered under the Associate in Statistics and Computing for
Business award including CC2201 and CC3403.
^ Satisfactory completion of 6 or more IT-major subjects offered under the Associate in Information Technology programme
including CC2201 and CC3202.
Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at www.hkcc-polyu.edu.hk.
38
Subject Domain
Subject
Code
CC2007
CC2101
CC2110
CC2201
CC2202
CC2203
CC2204
CC2205
CC2302
CC2305
CC2307
CC2404
CC2417
CC2418
CC2439
CC2441
CC3008
CC3135
Awardspecific
Subjects
Science
CC3143
CC3201
CC3202
CC3203
CC3204
CC3205
Coursework
(%)
Exam
(%)
Nature
Prerequisite
Principles of Programming 15
Computer System Architectures 16
Data Structures and Algorithms ^
General Physics
Engineering Science ^
Applied Physics and
Instrumentation in Health Care
Human Biology I ^
Human Biology II
General Chemistry
Basic Laboratory Techniques and
Safety
Food Hygiene and Nutritional
Health
Inventory and Warehousing
Management
Business Logistics and Supply
Chain Management
Design
Networking
40
40
60
40
40
40
40
50
40
40
40
60
60
40
60
60
60
60
50
60
60
60
S
N-S
N-S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
CC2201
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
40
60
S
Nil
60
60
60
40
40
40
S
S
S
Nil
Nil
Nil
60
40
S
*
50
50
S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
50
50
N-S
Nil
40
40
60
60
S
S
CC2201
CC2201
40
60
S
CC2201
40
60
S
Nil
Operating Systems 17
40
60
S
Subject Title
CC2202 &
CC2203
CC3302
@
CC2201
CC2201
Programming Project 18
100
S
50
50
S
50
50
S
Internetworking Protocols and
CC3209
40
60
S
CC3204
Systems
Database Design and
CC3210
50
50
S
CC3201
Implementation
CC3301 Communication Systems Principles
40
60
S
CC2302
CC3302 Computer Systems Principles 16 17
40
60
S
Nil
Design of Production and Service
CC3303
40
60
S
Nil
Systems
CC3304 Digital System Design
40
60
S
CC2305
CC3305 Engineering Management
40
60
S
Nil
S = Science subject
15
CC2127 Principles of Business Programming and CC2201 are mutually exclusive.
16
17
18
CC3206, CC3314 Engineering Project and CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project are exclusive to each other.
^ The compulsory subject enables students to focus in a certain area of study.
@
Satisfactory completion of 6 or more IT-major subjects offered under the Associate in Information Technology programme
including CC2201 & CC3202
* CC2417 Human Biology I or CC2418 Human Biology II or CC2439 General Chemistry or CC3434 General Microbiology or
CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology or CC3728 Analytical Chemistry or CC3734 General Biochemistry or CC3735
CC3206
CC3207
CC3208
39
Subject Domain
Subject
Code
Exam
(%)
Nature
Prerequisite
100
-
S
Nil
40
60
S
Nil
CC2003 OR
CC2030 OR
CC2053
Nil
CC2003 OR
CC2030 OR
CC2053
Nil
CC2302
CC2302
CC3732
CC2003 OR
CC2030
OR CC2053
CC3307
CC3308
Quality Engineering
40
60
S
CC3309
70
30
S
CC3310
40
60
S
CC3311
CC3312
CC3313
CC3314
Thermofluids
Linear Systems
Engineering Project 19
40
40
40
100
60
60
60
0
S
S
S
S
CC3315
Applied Mechanics 20
40
60
S
40
60
S
Nil
100
0
S
#
40
60
40
60
40
60
50
40
100
60
40
60
40
60
40
50
60
0
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Nil
Nil
CC3403
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
CC2425 OR
CC3310
Nil
CC3403
CC3406
CC3409
CC3423
CC3430
CC3434
CC3456
CC3458
CC3475
Architectural Technology in the
Built Environment 21
Applied Business Computing
Project 4 19
Basic Immunology
Operation Research for Business
CC3476
40
60
S
CC3477
40
60
S
60
40
N-S
Nil
CC3728
Introduction to Pathophysiology and
Pharmacology
60
40
S
CC3729
Computer Game Programmimg
50
50
S
CC3730
CC3731
Computing
Further Calculus
Multimedia and User Interface
Design 8
Biotechnology
Cell Biology
40
40
60
60
S
S
CC2439
CC2005 &
CC2201
CC2302
CC2305
100
-
S
Nil
40
50
60
60
50
40
S
S
S
CC2406
Nil
Nil
40
60
S
Nil
50
50
100
50
50
-
S
S
S
CC3734
Nil
CC2417
CC3316
CC3401
Science
Coursework
(%)
Industrial Engineering Techniques
and Methods
CC3306
Awardspecific
Subjects
Subject Title
CC3487
CC3732
CC3733
CC3734
CC3735
CC3736
CC3744
CC3745
CC3751
S = Science subject
19
CC3206 Programming Project, CC3314 and CC3401 are mutually exclusive to each other.
20
CC2304 Engineering Mechanics and CC3315 are mutually exclusive.
21
CC2306 Built Environment and CC3316 are mutually exclusive.
8
CC3211 Human Factors and User Interfaces and CC3736 are mutually exclusive.
# Satisfactory completion of 6 or more Award-specific subjects offered under the Associate in Statistics and Computing for
Business award including CC2201 & CC3403.
40
11.5
Academic Probation
If a student’s overall GPA is below 2.0, he/she will be put on academic probation in the
following semester. Once the student is able to pull his/her overall GPA up to 2.0 or
above at the end of the probation semester, the status of ‘academic probation’ will be lifted.
The status of ‘academic probation’ will be reflected in the examination result notification
but not in the transcript of studies.
11.6
Progression and De-registration
Students will normally have ‘progressing’ status unless they fall within the following
categories, any one of which may be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the
programme:
(1) they have exceeded the maximum duration of registration for that programme as
specified in this document; or
(2) their overall GPA is lower than 2.0 for two consecutive semesters and their Semester
GPA in the second semester is below 2.0; or
(3) their overall GPA is lower than 2.0 for three consecutive semesters.
Notwithstanding the above, the BoE has the flexibility to de-register a student with
extremely poor academic performance before the time specified in the categories (2) or (3)
above.
In the event that there are good reasons, the BoE has the discretion to recommend that
students who fall into categories as stated in (2) and (3) above be allowed to stay on the
programme, and these recommendations should be presented to the Academic Board of
CPCE for final decision.
41
11.7
Grading
All subjects will be graded on the basis of Criterion-Referenced Assessment (CRA).
Grades will reflect the extent to which a student has attained the Intended Learning
Outcomes. Grades are to be interpreted as follows:
Subject
grade
Grade
point
A+
4.5
A
4.0
B+
3.5
B
3.0
C+
2.5
C
2.0
D+
1.5
D
1.0
F
0
Short
description
Elaboration on subject grading description
The student’s work is exceptionally outstanding. It
Exceptionally
exceeds the intended subject learning outcomes in
Outstanding
all regards.
The student’s work is outstanding. It exceeds the
Outstanding intended subject learning outcomes in nearly all
regards.
The student’s work is very good. It exceeds the
Very Good intended subject learning outcomes in most
regards.
The student’s work is good. It exceeds the intended
Good
subject learning outcomes in some regards.
Wholly
The student’s work is wholly satisfactory. It fully
Satisfactory meets the intended subject learning outcomes.
The student’s work is satisfactory. It largely meets
Satisfactory
the intended subject learning outcomes.
The student’s work is barely satisfactory. It
Barely
marginally meets the intended subject learning
Satisfactory
outcomes.
The student’s work is barely adequate. It meets
Barely
the intended subject learning outcomes only in
Adequate
some regards.
The student’s work is inadequate. It fails to meet
Inadequate
many of the intended subject learning outcomes.
‘F’ is a subject failure grade, whilst all others (‘D’ to ‘A+’) are subject passing grades. No
credit will be earned if a subject is failed.
At the end of each semester, a Grade Point Average (GPA) will be computed as follows,
and based on the grade point of all the subjects:
GPA
=
∑ Subject Grade Point x Subject Credit Value
∑ Subject Credit Value
n
n
where n
= number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student
up to and including the latest semester, but for subjects which have been
retaken, only the grade obtained in the final attempt will be included in
the GPA calculation
42
In addition, the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Exempted subjects
Ungraded subjects
Incomplete subjects
Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved without any grade assigned
Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (i.e. those with the
grade ‘W’)
A student who is absent from examination will be given a fail grade. The respective
subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as “zero” grade point.
The GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for all relevant subjects,
including failed subjects (if a failed subject is retaken, only the grade obtained in the final
attempt will be included) taken by a student from the start of the programme to a particular
reference point in time. The GPA is an indicator of overall performance and is capped at
4.0.
Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken on top
of the prescribed credit requirements for an award shall not be taken into account in the
grade point calculation for award classification. However, if a student attempts more
elective subjects than the requirement for graduation in or before the semester within
which he/she becomes eligible for an award, the elective subjects with a higher
contribution (with the exception of the additional subjects taken out of interest and not for
satisfying the award requirements) shall be counted in the grade point calculation for
award classification (i.e. the subjects attempted with lower contribution will be excluded
from the grade point calculation for award classification), irrespective of when the
excessive elective subjects are enrolled. The same principle applies to mutually exclusive
compulsory subjects.
The Grade Point Average (GPA) and grade point calculation for award classification
(Award GPA) will both be shown in the transcript of studies.
11.8
Retaking of Subjects
If the failed subject is a compulsory subject, a student needs to retake that subject again. If
the failed subject is a mutually exclusive compulsory subject, a student may either retake
that same subject or another mutually exclusive compulsory subject. If the failed subject
is an elective subject, a student may retake that same subject or another elective subject
from the same elective subject set.
In addition to retaking a subject due to failure, a student may retake any subject for the
purpose of improving his/her grades. Retaking is with the condition that the maximum
study load of 21 credits per semester is not exceeded. A student wishing to retake passed
subjects will be accorded a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to
failure in a compulsory subject) and can only do so if places are available. Furthermore, if
a student is eligible to graduate upon completion of all graduation requirements of his/her
programme of study, he/she will not be allowed to retake any subject for the purpose of
improving the subject grade or GPA.
43
While only the grade obtained in the final attempt of retaking will be included in the
calculation of the Grade Point Average (GPA) and the Grade Point Average for award
classification (AGPA), the grades obtained in previous attempts will also be reflected in
the transcript of studies. This applies to the retake of the same subject only, and in cases
where students take another subject to replace a failed subject, the fail grade will be
retained and taken into account in the calculation of the GPA, despite the passing of the
other subject.
11.9
Plagiarism and Dishonesty
Students should be honest in completing academic assignments. The College takes a very
serious view against dishonesty in examinations / assessment and plagiarism in
coursework. In particular, all students should read the sections on “Conduct of
Examinations” and “Plagiarism and Bibliographic Referencing” in the HKCC Student
Handbook.
Penalties ranging from disqualification to expulsion will be imposed in cases of proven
dishonesty in examination / assessment and / or plagiarism.
11.10 Guidelines for Award Classification
In using these guidelines for award classification, the BoE shall exercise its judgement in
coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student, and where appropriate, may use
other relevant information. The following are guidelines only for the BoE’s reference in
determining award classifications:
Classification
Guidelines
Distinction
The student’s performance / attainment is outstanding, and
identifies him or her as exceptionally able in the field covered by
the programme in question.
Credit
The student has reached a standard of performance / attainment
which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding.
Pass
The student has reached a standard of performance / attainment
ranging from just adequate to satisfactory.
11.11 Student Appeals
A student may appeal on academic grounds. However, a student’s disagreement with the
decision of a SARP / BoE is not in itself an adequate ground for appeal. Any appeal
should be directed to the Director of HKCC. Details are set out in the HKCC Student
Handbook.
44
11.12 Exceptional Circumstances
Absence from an Assessment Component
If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to illness
or other circumstances beyond his/her control, and considered by the SARP as legitimate,
the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete the assessment and, if
so, by what means.
Late Assessment
If a student has been absent from an examination (or other assessments) because of illness,
injury or other unforeseeable reasons, he/she may apply for a late assessment. Where
appropriate, applications for late assessment will be referred to the Subject Assessment
Review Panels (SARP) for approval. Late assessment is not an automatic entitlement.
Should a late assessment be granted, the examination will be regarded as a first assessment
and the actual grade obtained will be awarded. Details of applications for late assessment
can be found in the Student Handbook.
Aegrotat Award
If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question due to
very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are beyond his/her control,
and considered by the BoE as legitimate, the College of Professional and Continuing
Education (CPCE) will determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award.
Aegrotat award will be granted under very exceptional circumstances.
A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either to
accept such an award, or request to be assessed on another occasion to be stipulated by the
BoE; the student’s exercise of this option shall be irrevocable.
The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him or her from any
subsequent assessment for the same award.
An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified, and the award parchment shall not state
that it is an aegrotat award. However, the BoE may determine whether the award should
be classified provided that they have adequate information on other students’ academic
performance.
Other Particular Circumstances
A student’s particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment but not
the standard of performance expected in assessment.
11.13 Other Regulations
Students of the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology are bound by all
other regulations of HKCC, the CPCE, and/or the University.
45
Section Two: Syllabuses
天文與占卜 Astronomy and Fortune-telling
CC1002
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
修讀的必備條件
評估方法
1
3
非科學
中文﹝粵語講授；中文書寫﹞輔以英文
28 小時課堂講授
14 小時導修課
無
60%課堂習作
40%期終考試
科目目標
科目目標
認識和掌握天文與占卜的一些基本知識和二者互相之間的聯繫，並能引發其跨學科的思考和學
習興趣。
認識中國星座和中國星名的含義，以及隱藏在星名後面的故事，進一步認識天文與中國曆法
（農曆）之間緊密的關係。
通過學習和實際觀測，學生能認識和分辨常見的星座；認識中外傳統的觀星方法和其他常用的
觀測天象運行的儀器。
課程內容將同時兼顧理論及實踐兩方面，務求同學不獨獲得天文學上的知識及訓練，還可加強
同學了解大自然現象及天體運行的知識。
學習成果
在完成此科目後，學生有足夠能力：
瞭解中外占卜術的歷史發展。
獲取中外占卜術背後的文化意義。
獲取中外占卜術與古代天文學知識的關係。
比較中外占卜術的異同。
運用天文的器材觀天象，瞭解天文星系的發展。
結合天文學知識，結合中外占卜術，可以探討天體運行的知識。
指示性教學內容
中外天文學與占卜術的關係
天文學的定義，簡述中外天文學的發展，占卜術與天文的關係。
中國天文學發展史
中國天文學自先秦至當代的發展，紫金山天文臺的意義。
西方天文學的歷程
加里略的發展，哥白尼定律，近代西方天文臺。
星空的初步認識
46
瞭解星雲的分佈，中國漢代的觀測儀器，西方的天文望遠鏡。
中國占星術
八卦，混天儀，星圖。
西方占卜術
塔羅牌與占卜術。
天文與中國傳統風水學
中國傳統風水學的定義，風水與四時星際的互動關係。
天文與地理學
觀天術的發展與地理環境的關係，火山爆發與星系的發展。
天文知識與農業社會
天文知識與農業社會
傳統農業社會與天文，天文與四時農業盛衰。
教學方法
課堂一般以講課、小組討論及小組報告等形式進行，課後進行各種有關占卜與天文的參觀與實踐；
學生需要在整個學習過程中主動參與課堂的討論及實習，務求理論與實踐並重。
評估方法
本課程評核將以個人習作、小組書面報告和課堂匯報，測驗及考試等形式進行。
1.
個人習作──主要以撰寫論文的方式，考核同學研究天文與占卜關係的基礎知識。
2.
3.
小組書面報告──主要從小組同學合作撰寫的報告中，考核同學合作能力及報告所獲的知識。
課堂匯報──主要考核同學報告能力，能否在有限時間內，發揮報告的重點。
指示性參考書目
》北京群言出版
出版 2004 年
推介教科書
-
陳九金：《形象解碼引領進入神秘的星座世界
香港
天文學會
編
：《觀星小
手冊》香港
：
：世界
2004
社，
社，
年
。
。
參考書
Prahalad, C.K., The Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid. N.J.: Wharton School Publishing
(2005).
Serviss, Garrett, Astronomy in a Nutshell. N.J.: Wharton School Publishing (1989).
Smith, Richard, Fortune-Tellers and Philosophers: Divination in Traditional Chinese Society.
Boulder: Westview Press (1991).
話》海海技出版
專英語選》北京商印館 1982 年
中國天文學史整理研究小組：《天文史
南京
編
大學外文系
：《天文
業
文
上
：上
：
47
科學
務
書
術
，
社，
1981
。
年
。
談錫永
微鬥數曜總談》香港博益出版集團 1988 年
江
》北京
出版公司 1988 年
傅隸樸周易》川巴蜀 1991 年
李心龍
》海口海南出版 1993 年
邵偉華
易預》安太藝出版 1994 年
袁俊慧
博采》北京電子工出版 1994 年
慧心齋編
微鬥數全集》香港
出版 1994 年
吳鑫溫詩編
十五》北京北京出版
：《紫
陳
星
：
風：《天文與人文
：《
理解
：《卜
：國際文化
四
：《占星術
基、
：
：
測學
：《天文地理知識
主
西
：
。
社，
。
白文
主
社，
：
業
：星星
：《現代天文學
。
，
書社，
：《紫
學
，
。
社，
社，
講
：
48
。
。
。
大學
社，
2005
年
。
中國書法與繪畫 Chinese Calligraphy and Painting
CC1003
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
評估方法
1
3
非科學
中文﹝粵語講授；中文書寫﹞
14 小時導修課
無
100%課堂習作
科目目標
繪畫素為
遺產
部份
著悠久
豐富涵它們融
精
味美欣賞為
也是
「
」呈
吸著眾多愛好遊
繪畫
畫
藉
繪畫融
性
情於
奇
剛勁陰柔物造型花鳥畫像臨摹描也呈
士道德
問特色
繪畫均無窮樂
尤導
字類
除導
繪畫全局設色層次摹貌特色畫
流變
亦
味
紹
規則
畫工設置畫
提煉許多具表性前賢
繪畫譜
藝
中國書法及
中國文化
科學、
神、趣
一，
術、文化
引
者神
大自然
學
的
的重要組成
、
，二者有
學和
一體，
傳統書法及
。學習書
趣，書法的
與
、人
，學習中國書法及
有
的人，能
、
的
歷史及
中國文化
書寫及
、
趣，故本科
內
天人合一
白
重教
，
的
，
合
現方式之
合個人的
現中國
中國傳統書法的
人
與
體種
及基礎知識。
了教
中國傳統書法及
會運用趣
的
的教學方法介
有代
的
、
、
書法的
書法及
形法
，基本
圖
的
及圖
、書
理論、歷史
外，
背後的文化知識，並從實習中
。
學習成果
明
語構
提高員創
多
藝
繪畫
念
畫
字流變
欣賞畫
藝根
美欣賞為融
白中國書法、
獲取漢
學
結
背後的文化理
及漢
作及
中國書
認識中國文化及
結合
術、文化、
與基本書
的知識。
的知識。
術
的能力。
基。
學和
一體的
通能力。
中國書法及繪畫的重要
角度析畫類
位
中國字體及繪畫藝術的種類及歷史
殷甲骨
魏晉
南北朝
元
明清泛甲骨鐘鼎篆隸楷
中國書畫藝術的美學及文化特色
從中外文化的
書法：
書法、
，分
中國書
在人
歷史文化上的地
文、秦代書法、漢代書法、
代書法、
書法；
論
書法、
、
、
49
、
、
。
唐
草
書法、
、行、
代書法、
五
各種書體。
代書法、
宋
代
畫美道修德三
中國書畫藝術的畫訣
語畫訣字起源流變
局訣
書畫分門細論
篆
草楷
畫
妙
書畫與人文
書畫與人文生活
畫
中國書
與
書法的術
要
學、
及
學及
，漢
者的關係，
的
由視覺藝到性靈
術
及書法基本
技巧
之教。
畫
，基本點
的形
態字
，
體的結
構章
及
法佈
。
書、行書、
書、
書；文人
、山水
畫
；人
物繪畫
的基本法
則宗畫奇
；
教
的
趣，
年畫精
的
。
了解人文社會進程與書
的互動關係。
教學方法
鼓勵積極
導修
演變亦
繪畫
繪畫
特色規則
透量案
描畫
梅
草木
賢
參與課堂及
的
，
課的教學
運用有關書法及
及
。
理論與實際並重，
文化的
過大
課進行書寫練習及
等自然
個
用各種評核
重
透授紹字畫
字繪畫譜
電子光碟視覺
導員
析
品深
師也藉導修
字
例品高低模帖著
家藉繪畫竹
摹繪
規則達到
想
動。
過講
介
及
書的體
及
各種
）
評
的運意與
歷代
，
學
體及
圖
了解中國書法及
名書法
，
及
理論與實踐並重的教學理
終期
終期
書實習、測驗及個人
面有
法、歷代
化課堂所教的知識。講
，
字
更公平全效
：小組書面報告、
學生的參與，
體、
器材，生動地教
（歷代及同學作
書法及
評估方法
廣泛利
機制
亦特別視
生所學，
分
山水，實習
，體會中國先
活
知識的
報告的評
鑑模
。
準確衡量
式，
學
地評核學生的能力。
本課程評核以個人習作、小組書面報告、課堂匯報、測驗及個人
報告的形式進行。
1.
小組書面報告──主要從小組同學合作撰寫的報告中，考核同學的合作能力，及從報告考
2
3
4
5
獲的知識。
字
.
個人
.
小組課堂匯報──主要考核同學報告重點及
.
測驗──考核同學所獲的知識。
.
個人
例
回應提出問題
篇約三千字
書實習──主要考核同學能運用各種書法體
終期
報告──要求
每位
（
所
，進行研習。
同學
同學撰寫論文一
察
的
。
），考核同學了解中國書
畫
的基礎知
識。
朱光潛談美》台北聖
推介教科書
：《
：
天堂
出版 200 年
社，
1
。
參考書
Lai, T.C., Chinese Characters. Hong Kong: Swindon Book Co. (1980).
Mote, Frederick, Calligraphy and the East Asian Book. Boston: Random House (1989).
Yen,Yuehping, Calligraphy and Power in Contemporary Chinese Society. London: Routledg Curzon
(2005).
50
楊再春編
工具手冊》北京北京育院出版 985 年
徐復
藝精》台灣
局 986 年
蔣彝
》海海畫出版 986 年
蔣彝
繒畫》海海畫出版 987 年
楊榮福編
手冊》北京
出版 988 年
徐建融編
》海海語育出版 988 年
王嘉良
美育綱》黑龍江黑龍江民出版 997 年
：《中國書法
觀：《中國
術
：《中國書法
：《中國
：
神
上
文化
：學生書
：上
上
書
：上
：《書法知識
：《中國書法
：《中國古代
體
術教
：上
。
社，1
。
書
史
外
社，1
，1
社，1
：國際文化
上
學
教
：
。
社，1
。
社，1
。
人
51
。
，1
。
佛教文化與藝術 Buddhist Culture and Art
CC1005
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
評估方法
1
3
非科學
14 小時導修課
無
50% 課堂習作
50% 期終考試
科目目標
科目目標
旨佛
衍
藝特別是佛
藝構
員修讀
初佛
明佛日活
造像佛繪畫像梵樂美建築茶道
員明印度佛
土融創造轉
員
佛如何透藝態表博精深
員
賞佛造像寺廟建築藝佛繪畫像
本課程
化和
學
與
學
學
學
在探討
術所
教的基本義理及其所
本科，可以
、
教
可以
生的文化與
術，
圖
白自
可以了解
步認識
、
傳入
教
可以學習觀
教的基本義理，
、
術
及
教與中國本
過各種
教各種
術形
及
教與
合、
與
白
及中
的義理。
術，
教
圖
學的大意
教義理與
與
能掌握中
教
的
學，與
從實習考
中可以
在
中引
常生
講
術的關係
教
的異同及其背後的文化意義
教及
教
教
的
思
的異同
及
的
教教義
佛教的基本義理、
佛教的基本義理、歷史及其特質
佛
印度佛
特色
佛學傳入中國的歷程
土佛
唐佛
的定義，
學的發展歷史及
自漢代至當代中
學的發展，
代
。
學發展的大義。
小乘、
小乘、大乘佛教與文化
大乘佛教與文化、
教與文化、藝術
乘乘佛
印度佛
小
、大
教教義，
藝
教與中國文化、
52
白
教義理
化的過程。
大
印度土佛
明佛
佛藝
土印度佛造像
土佛道儒家想
察欣賞佛造像繪畫特色
日活證師導佛
比較中
明佛
的關係，及
現其
學習
常生
的關係。
文化
，
白
學習成果
教在中國的發展與中國文
成的互動關係。
術的關係。
享受梵樂茶道
，並可以
及
。
印度佛教與中國佛教的異同
印度佛
土佛
印度佛
佛教文化的要義
土佛繪畫佛音樂佛詩詞佛
佛教造像藝術
唐敦煌佛造像南佛型佛像
佛教寺廟建築藝術
香港志蓮淨苑建築藝特色
佛教繪畫藝術
佛繪畫禪藝創佛
佛學與梵樂
佛音樂韻
佛學與茶道
日茶道
佛
日茶藝日
禪與人生
三菩薩
佛字
持守悟
教教義與中
中
教
，
代
教
教
與
意，
教
與
律。
教
方
教小
術的
。
術
的發展與
藏
，
與
教
中
教教義的異同，
意與
學方法，
與人生觀，
，
造像特色土音像
教
的
，中
的觀
。
說
教與小
。
佛
的異同，
佛造像演變
教的文化意義，
教
的
。
學。
道土佛
本
與
本神
的要義，
與
教。
及中
教的關係與書法。
教學方法
員積極
導修
活
由師
獻資料佛像佛
畫梵樂
佛寺廟建築藝
尤是電子光碟視覺
導員印度
佛
佛
賞佛藝
特色
而令更富味
邏輯師
也藉導修帶員出
寺廟察畫像導們
悟佛
藝
達到
想
學
需要
教圖
、
教與中國
會
教
參與課堂及
課的教學
及有關
的
教
教的異同，觀
課，
領學
術的要義，
動。在課堂上，主要
術及書法，
教
術文化的
外參觀
及觀
書
講
其
運用各種文
及
器材，教
、
了解
及要點，從
課程
圖
運用課堂上學習的知識，領
，引
他
趣
、
學
及科學
。講
。
評估方法
佛
藝
本課程評核將以個人習作、小組書面報告、課堂匯報、測驗及考試的形式進行。
1.
2.
個人習作──主要以撰寫論文的方式，考核同學了解
術的基礎知識。
小組書面報告──主要從小組同學合作撰寫的報告中，考核同學合作能力及從報告考
獲的
3.
佛
教文化及
教知識。
課堂匯報──主要考核同學報告能力，能否在有限時間內，發揮報告內容的重點。
賴永海
推介教科書
佛性》海海民出版
：《中國
論
上
：上
人
大學
1988
社，
參考書
53
年
。
察
同學所
Kalupahana, David, A History of Buddhist Philosophy: Continuities and Discontinuities. Honolulu:
University of Hawaii Press (1992).
Takeuchi, Yoshinori, ed. Buddhist Spirituality: Indian, Southern Asian, Tibetan, Early Chinese. New York:
SCM Press Ltd. (1993).
Takeuchi, Yoshinori, ed. Buddhist Spirituality: Later China, Korea, Japan and the Modern World. New
York: SCM Press Ltd. (1999).
Tang, Yi-jie, Confucianism, Buddhism, Daoism, Christianity and Chinese Culture. Peking: University of
Peking (1991).
Yamamoto, Chikyo, Introduction to Buddhist Art. New Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture
and Aditya Prakashan, (1990).
賴永海佛道詩禪佛
》北京青年出版 1970 年
賴永海佛儒》杭州浙江民出版 1992 年
高楠順次郎著
佛著譯叢編譯佛藝音樂戲劇美》台北華宇出版
年
楊曾編佛
》濟南齊魯 1989 年
李濤佛佛藝》安安交出版 1989 年
：《
：《
：
學與
，世界
教文化論
學
：
：中國
人
學名
社，
社，
《
教
術：
。
。
、
、
。
文
：《
：《
教文化面面觀
教與
教
術
西
：
：西
書社，
通大學
54
。
社，
。
術
：
社，
1988
中國醫學基礎知識 Foundation of Chinese Medicine
CC1006
1
3
理科
中文 [粵語講授 ; 中文書寫]
28 小時講課
10 小時導修
4 小時實驗
不適用
100% 課堂習作
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
評估方法
科目目標
醫素為
遺產
部份著悠久
豐富涵
精
味為也是呈
精「
」
遊
醫
醫
往往藉醫原劑融
道剛勁陰柔陰陽調濟
醫藥均無窮樂
使員明
醫
精
更旨
提高員
醫
中國
學
中國文化
理、文化
神和趣
神
傳統中
合
學
的重要
一體，
文化。學習中
與
，
的興趣，
學
學的人，
和相
基礎知識及文化要義，
，有
學
能
，學習中
白中國
掌握中國
的歷史及
現中國文化
的內
義
天人合一
學
理及
學
有
學的文化
方，
的
，
合個人
趣，故本科
神。同時，本科
在
學文化基礎知識。
學習成果
明
醫
白中國
特
員交流醫
類經脈
五臟六府構原
醫特色欣賞
精「
」養道
學文化的基礎知識及
運用掌握的基礎知識與各學
藉
從實習中分辨及了解人
了解中國
學的
點。
中
學文化。
的分佈及
，
中國文化
成的
義內
中醫學歷史及重要
醫位
醫
中醫學的特色
針灸骨骼原醫聞診問診切診
中醫經脈及診斷原理
李珍草綱》為心
中醫學與道學文化
氣功原醫
中國
以
學的地
、
的
時
《本
理與中
，自先秦至近代中國
理、中
目
、
中
天人合一
學的歷史發展。
及
。
的引介。
的發展。
55
它們融醫
倫
吸著眾多愛好
於
奇
糅
尤導
醫
增員
醫
合
的形式之一，
理。
生之
。
大自然
教
加學
學科學、
引
者
趣之中，
中國傳統
學的
學習中國
學
中醫兒科及方劑學
痲疹傷寒治療
中醫骨傷及婦科
跌打損傷治療應
五臟病理
五臟腸胃道家治療
中醫膏方及調養
藥飲料營養
中醫療傷
華陀醫為心
氣功與養生
道家氣功治療
中醫倫理學
醫醫德操守
及
的
方法。
與
、
用。
與
方法。
引介基本中
及
以
中
論
方法。
的討論。
方法。
中
的
及
。
教學方法
積極
導修
活
療
醫
尤多電子光碟
導
醫
蘊
使
醫經脈
學生需要
參與課堂及
方法，中國
教
學生了解中國
課，
評估方法
廣泛利
亦特別視
學
用各種評核方式，
所學，
重
醫
含的歷史文化，
科目
透
介
趣
的基礎知識，體會中國傳統
例如
講
中國
學知識、人體
及科學
的方法與
模
終期
公平全
討論、報告、實習、測驗及個人
過各種評核
學的基礎知識、
的
器材，
會
。
鑑模
效
報告的評
式，
及
。講
面有
式，
準確衡量
明丶
地評核學生
學生
白
醫
學基礎知識。
醫
診
每位
小組課堂匯報──主要考核同學在有限時間內報告重點及
測驗──考核同學了解中
終期
報告──要求
回應提出問題
醫病
篇約三千字
同學
的
後，撰寫中
理文化的報告。
（
），考核同學了解
化關係的基礎知識。
周萍
醫
推介教科書
：《中
學基本常識及
察
同
。
學理的基礎知識。
個人實習報告──考核同學觀
個人
運用
學基礎知識能力。
學所獲的中國
2.
3.
4.
5.
內有關中國
學生課堂的參與，務求
及實習所掌握的中國
1.
運用
學的要義及其
學生掌握中
由師紹醫
治
醫
經絡光盤視覺
使更富味邏輯師也藉導修
醫師斷診
規則
課的教學
學的內容，
針炙》肥安徽技出版
學
合
：
科學
56
術
985 年
社，1
。
經脈
與中國
食療
文
劉燕池
醫概》北京醫籍出版 986 年
向敬協
醫脈症治》北京
醫藥出版 998 年
奇
醫優長壽》慶技獻 988 年
黨毅醫營養食療》北京
出版 988 年
申卻驕
醫營養》北京醫籍出版 988 年
張榮
醫》都川技出版 99 年
楊
氣》北京北京技出版 995 年
門章
醫導》北京出版 200 年
李
醫痰病
治療》北京苑出版 2002 年
參考書
史方
：《中
學基礎
：《中
辨
：《中
發
法
：《中
學
：《中
學基礎
：《中
以義：《中
重
學
力：《中國運
九
：中
學
學
古
：中國中
生
：《中
論
成
：科學
古
：四
科學
科學
：科學
的現代研究與
術文
。
社，1
。
社，1
。
社，1
：中
：
論
：科學
社，1
。
社，1
術
術
。
社，1
社，1
社，
1
：學
57
1
。
。
。
社，
。
中國棋藝 The Art of Chinese Board Games
CC1007
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
評估方法
1
3
非科學
14 小時導修課
無
100% 課堂習作
科目目標
棋藝素為
優秀遺產部份它著悠久
豐富涵它融
藝
味競技為
吸著億萬愛好遊棋局
勝對局構精妙殘局
排局尤是臨局交兵競爭更是競技項
擬
著無窮樂魅
導員注
棋藝類
員除
味
更詳細紹棋藝規則棋藝
而員亦
戰
甚具特色棋例棋譜提升員棋藝
員
棋
明棋
殘局破
增玩藝樂
中國
化、趣
和
，
的一
一體，
其
力，故本科教
教
文化
和
，
引
時的
學
了運用趣
有
，
的教學方法外，
中了解
學
可從學習中國象
的
及
目所不能比
的種
介
，可以
的過程中，
和
的
。
中不同的
及
分
下棋陣棋藝
析
棋殘局破
棋藝類局
棋藝下棋
的佈
中國象
分辨中國
及
棋藝特色
道
規則
中，掌握中國
中的
及
的種
及佈
。
的
方法及
學習及實踐不同
解的
的
及其背後的文化理
理。
。
中國棋藝及遊藝活動的關係
棋藝
棋藝遊藝活
中國傳統棋藝的種類及歷史
紹
棋藝類特色
棋藝
中國傳統棋藝的文化特色
棋藝
念下棋規則
東西文化交融下的中國棋藝發展
東西文化交融下的中國棋藝發展
棋
棋
介
的定義，
與
中國主要
的種
了解中國
中國象
動的關係。
及
背後的文化理
及國際象
，了解中國
，
的
的歷史
。
。
58
，
術、文
思
的，有
解方法，
從
合科學、
的
的
的
背後的文化知識。
學習成果
。
趣和
及基礎知識。
的
學
白象
內
內。其引人入
其他
意中國傳統及當代
實
歷史及
者神
演變
。
念
。
加
的
學
趣。
從
棋盤和棋子的種類
紹
棋盤
棋子貌
棋藝的術語
紹棋藝專詞
棋藝的規則
紹棋藝則
念
棋藝文化
飛棋波子棋戰鬥棋鬥獸棋
棋藝佈局
棋圍棋
戰棋殘局破
介
中外不同的
介
不同
的
介
不同
的法
、
、
行
中國象
、
文化，不同
面
背後的文化理
念
。
有名
背後之文化理
、
、當代各種
、
及其
解之法
教學方法
員積極
導修
活
由師
棋盤棋子尤是電
子光碟棋盤視覺
導員
棋藝特色規則增
味
邏輯
師也藉導修使員
棋藝下棋遊戲
棋子走
「吃子」記錄
棋藝局規則達到
想
學
需要
參課堂及
及
講
課的教學
器材，教
會
課，
、
學
學
平日
本課程評核將以
文化的
講
的佈
與
，
運用各種
及
，
運用課堂上學習知識，進行不同
方法及不同
評估方法
了解中國
、
的
。
的
法、
。
終期
棋藝局
篇約千字
1. 個人習作──主要撰寫論文一（一
），考核同學了解中外
佈
的基礎知識。
2.小組書面報告──主要從小組同學合作撰寫的報告中，考核同學的合作能力，及從報告考
所獲的
棋藝
回應提出問題
篇約三千字
棋藝
知識。
3. 小組課堂匯報──主要考核同學在有限時間內報告重點及
同學
的
4. 測驗──考核同學所獲的知識。
5. 個人
報告──要求
（
），考核同學了解
終期
每位
動關係。
王楝:
推介教科書
國
棋藝
《中國
文化教程
》北京北京出版 2000 年
：
大學
社，
。
參考書
Frey, Peter, Chess Skill in Man and Machine. New York: Spring-Veriage (1983).
Levy, David, The Chess Scen. London: Faber (1974).
59
其
及科學
，實習
個人習作、小組報告、課堂匯報、測驗及個人
，
加課程的趣
察
同學
。
與社會文化的互
何明棋藝技》北京清華出版 980 年
王嘉良
棋高級》黑龍江黑龍江民出版 997 年
沈明
棋藝》北京北京民出版 2000 年
良
棋藝想》北京北京出版 2000 年
王楝
棋》北京北京出版 2002 年
棋藝》海旭日出版 2003 年
恒電子出版出版編
棋》光盤＋手冊北京北京光碟技
年
遠：《
術
：
大學
社，1
人
：《象
教程
：
世
：《中國
的歷史
：
陳文
：《中國
思
國
：《象
古盛名：《
大
：
教程
與文化
社
：
上
人
大學
大學
：
：《中國象
。
，1
大學
社，
社，
。
。
社，
社，
。
。
。
（
）
。
60
：
科
發展有限
公司 2004
，
中西音樂欣賞 Appreciation of Asian and Western Music
CC1008
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
評估方法
1
3
非科學
14 小時導修課
無
100% 課堂習作
科目目標
紹音樂由
十紀
樂曲
期音樂家或演奏使員明每
音樂
初
音樂藝
原
音樂
明欣賞
音樂
音樂
典音樂音樂藝
音樂類門派
演奏家藝造藝提升員欣賞音樂
擴闊員視野
介
中西
代
古代至二
世
的主要
、不同時
的
者，
步認識中西
白
術的基本
中西
了解中西
理、中西
一時
的種
學
的異同。
文化
及
與近代
，並認識西方
術發展的關係。
的
術
，
學
。
學習成果
明
白
的方法。
的發展歷程、中外古
了解中國
興趣，
學
發展與歷史文化的互動關係。
音樂演變
音樂樂
析音樂
單樂演奏音樂樂章
欣賞音樂
析樂
白中西
的歷史。
比較中西
基礎
分
文化的異同。
中西
運用簡
的
學習
器
理的異同。
中西
的方法，分
基礎
中西
。
理。
中西音樂的基本義理、
中西音樂的基本義理、歷史及其特質
導樂譜公元前今樂演變
中西樂器的介紹
紹
樂特
中西著名樂譜及演奏家
紹音樂家如貝多芬蕭百納
教
中西
及自
介
中西方常用的
介
西方的
，
至
器及
理的
。
點。
、
音樂家如聶耳
等；中國的
61
，
等。
中西
的能力及
了解中國
了解中國音樂的文化意義
音樂的文化意義
樂
念創
學習西方音樂與西方文化的關係
戰爭音樂
經濟音樂
欣賞中西音樂的方法
賞樂章樂譜聆聽樂音調
中西音樂的流派
典樂派
諧激昂樂派
了解中西音樂的風格
創旋樂樂
格
中西音樂文化
音樂
欣賞中國及西方音樂舉隅
歌泉映月馬塞軍曲藍色多惱河
中西古典音樂的風格
紹音樂家蕭伯納貝多芬
音樂家李叔
音樂藝術與人生
總音樂
音樂變換們心情
器背後的文化理
與
觀
、社會
及
作者
作
律與
比較中西
中國國
介
發展與
。
器
。
、中方的和
理、
與
理與個人風
的
。
的互動。
的異同。
、二
、
西方
結
意。
、學習
西方的近代與古
及
進行
及
及
。
等的名作、中國
與人生的發展、
與人
同等的名作。
的互動關係。
教學方法
員積極
導修
活
由師
獻資料音樂樂譜
樂尤是音樂光碟視覺
導員
音樂藝
聆聽欣賞
音樂藝
特色使更富味賞價值師也藉導修播放著樂曲使
員
明音樂
達到
想
學
需要
及各種中外
參與課堂及
器，
術文化的
課的教學
其
，
及
課程
運用課堂上所學習的知識，
趣
白
器材，教
及觀
學
。講
講
運用各種文
了解中西
會
、
術的異同，
課，
發展與時代文化的相互關係，
中外
中外
名
，
學
。
評估方法
本課程評核將以個人習作、小組報告、課堂匯報，測驗及個人
1.
2.
個人習作──主要撰寫論文一
（
一
樂
理的基礎知識。
學所獲的中外
3.
4.
5.
著樂章
篇約千字
終期
名
的知識。
回應提出問題
篇約三千字
著樂曲
小組課堂匯報──主要考核同學在有限時間內報告重點及
終期
每位
測驗──考核同學所獲的知識。
個人
報告──要求
會文化的互動關係。
62
（
同學
的
察
同
。
名
與社
推介教科書
Balimore, Md., Music and Technology in the Twentieth, NK: John Hopkins University Press (2002).
伍楝
國
音樂》海
：《中國
上
：上
海語丈育出版
外
999 年
社，1
。
參考書
Beranek, Leorn, Music, Acoustics And Architecture, NY: Rodert E.Keieger Pub. Co. (1979).
Guilford, Cone, Performing Arts of China : Instrument and Music, London: Norton Publishers (1992).
Health, Edwarder, Music: A Joy for Life, London: Sidgwick & Jackson (1976).
Kivy, Peter, Music alone: Philosophy Reflections on the Purely Musical Experience, (1990).
Leichtentritt, Hugo, Music, History and Ideas, Cambridge: Cambridge Mass.,Harvard University Press
(1973).
許衝
音樂
沈
音樂
朱瑞
音樂
黃翔鵬
音樂
林渝音樂美
劉承華
音樂
之
：《中國
》海商印館 939 年
綱》海海藝出版 982 年
復調維
》北京民音樂出版
物》鄭州出版 996 年
》香港
活叢出版 997 年
闡釋》海海音樂出版 2002 年
小史
知白：《中國
史
世
：《中國
中
思
：《中國
文
大系
：《
術
紫
與
：《中國
要
上
的人文
上
：
務
書
：上
文
，1
社，1
的形成與發展
：大象
：時代生
上
。
。
：人
社，1
書
。
社，1
：上
社，
63
992 年
社，1
。
。
。
CC2002
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
2
3
Non-Science
English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese)
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial / Workshop
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with critical and creative thinking skills. It provides the conceptual framework
to identify problems in both everyday life and specific domains and to make the right and appropriate
decisions. By widening their horizon and stimulating their multi-dimensional thinking style, it cultivates a
proper attitude which promotes students’ critical and creative power. Studying the subject will also help
develop students’ critical thinking and creative thinking for their life-long learning and facilitate their
future work prospect.
Learning Outcomes
On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to:
understand the importance of thinking skills in their everyday life
appreciate their existing thinking habits, mental blocks and attitudes that hinder them from being
creative and/or critical
be aware of the different types of thinking, how they are different, how they can complement each
other and how they can be applied to everyday situations
become more attuned to fallacious reasoning in everyday life and know how to correct the fallacies
found
apply the techniques for critical thinking in evaluating solutions and arguments
develop the attitude and techniques for creative problem solving
apply the basic skills for working in innovative problem solving teams
Indicative Contents
Thinking as a Skill
Concept of Thinking; Importance of thinking; Habitual thinking vs thinking as a deliberate skill that
can be controlled; Vertical (critical) vs lateral (creative) thinking; Attitude and psychological
preparations for thinking.
Critical Thinking: Introduction
Critical thinking; Role of critical thinking and how it can complement creative thinking in problem
solving; Logic and critical thinking.
64
Refining Solutions to Problems
Steps in refining: working out details, finding imperfections and complications, and making
improvements and decisions.
Evaluating Arguments
Common errors affecting truth including either/or thinking, issue avoidance, overgeneralization,
double standards, shifting burden of proof, and irrational appeal; Common errors affecting validity.
Creative Thinking: Introduction
Creativity as the ability to modify self-imposed constraints; Characteristics of creative people; Basic
elements affecting creativity in practice: person, process, product and climate; Introduction to stages in
the creative process.
Generating Ideas
Avoiding blocks to creativity; Stimulating ideas using various techniques and tools: forced uncommon
responses, free association, analogy, unusual combinations, visualization, brain storming, and Edward
de Bono’s various techniques such as the six thinking hats, Tony Buzan’s mindmapping technique, etc.
Creative and Critical Thinking in Teams
Characteristics of effective teams; Stimulating creativity and problem solving in teams;
Communication, trust building and conflict-reduction for teams.
Teaching/Learning Approach
The emphasis of the subject is on enabling students to acquire the attitudes and skills in practical thinking.
Lectures will be used to explain and demonstrate the topics and techniques introduced. Games, cases and
exercises will be used during tutorials to let students experience thinking in action. To motivate students to
actively change their own attitudes and participate in experiential workshop-style tutorials, a lot of
interesting and daily examples and cases will be used as illustration/demonstration during lectures, for
exercises during tutorials and for assignments.
To achieve the best learning outcomes, the
lecturer/instructor will try to create a climate that is challenging, dynamic and yet idea-supporting, trusting,
and playful. Debates and risk-taking will be encouraged, which facilitates students’ making their own
judgments in a rational as well as fluent way. Both English and Chinese will be used as the medium of
instruction and in assessments.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and
an examination designed to develop and assess creative and critical thinking as well as communication
skills.
Indicative Readings
Recommended Textbook
Greg Bassham., Critical Thinking: A student’s introduction. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
方
子華著批判》
等
《
思考
，
McGraw Hill (2005)
References
De Bono, Edward. Creativity. HarperCollins Publisher. (latest ed.).
65
李命著語析
》香港青屋 (1982)
勞光著想五新編》香港香港
(2000)
李命著
到
》香港明出版 (2002)
天
《
理分
思
《思
天
《從思考
方法
的思考方法
講
思考之上
：
：
：
文書
中文大學
報
社
66
CC2005
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Exclusion
Prerequisites
Assessment
Applied Computing
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Laboratory
CC2004 Introduction to Information Technology
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
The objective of this subject is to equip students with analytical skills in using and operating computers.
This subject provides training in the technical basics of the World Wide Web and ways to make use of the
Web particulars. It introduces the architecture of a computer system so that the students can understand
how a computer works from both the hardware and software perspectives. It also covers the use of
application software as well as basic programming in the operating system level and application level.
Learning Outcomes
outline Information Technology and its applications
develop end-user computing skills for use in business environments
integrate end-user computing techniques into business applications
appraise and analyse issues relating to Information technology and the computer system
apply Information Technology to business activities
Indicative Contents
Fundamentals of World Wide Web
Internet basics; Client/server model; Basic HTML; Browsers; Searching the web; Downloading
programs and files; Web graphics; Multimedia; Web programming tools.
Fundamentals of Information Technology
I/O devices; Number systems; Basic logic operations; Simple computer architecture; Simple computer
organisations.
Application Software and End User Computing
Privacy and ethics with software; Copyright and patent law; Word processing; Spreadsheet analysis;
Graphical presentation; Database; Computer drafting; Programming tools.
Operating System Basics
UNIX commands; Shells; Process; File systems; Handling files in UNIX; Running programs;
Compiling programs.
67
Lectures focus on delivering and explaining key concepts of applied computing, with specific reference to
the latest issues of information technology where appropriate. Relevant daily-life cases and examples will
be introduced for in-class discussion.
Laboratory sessions are organised for students to apply the concepts learnt in the lectures to real-life
computer applications. Students are provided with the opportunity to gain hands-on experience of using
different types of computer software and packages, as well as to work with the World Wide Web for
specific mandates.
Assessment Approach
The assessment consists of group or individual assignments covering the main topics taught. These
assignments are strategically designed to develop the problem solving and analytical techniques of
students to relate the learnt theories into application level.
Indicative Readings
Burd, S.D. Systems Architecture. Thomson Learning. (latest ed.).
References
Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C. How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Englander, I. The Architecture of Computer Hardware and Systems Software, An Information Technology
Approach. Wiley. (latest ed.).
Lopo, E.D.C., Aitken, P. and Jones, B.L. Teach yourself C for Linux Programming in 21 Days. SAMS.
(latest ed.).
Shelly, G.B., Cashman, T.J. and Vermaat, M.E. Discovering Computers 2006. Thomson Learning. (latest
ed.).
Shelly, G.B., Cashman, T.J. and Vermaat, M.E. Microsoft Office XP: Advanced Concepts and Techniques.
Thomson Learning. (latest ed.).
68
CC2006
Level
Credits
Nature
Mode of Study
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to introduce the basic concepts and essential knowledge of the applications and
technology on Internet and World Wide Web. It provides a conceptual framework to understand the
operation of Internet and to understand how computers are connected and talk to each other. Studying this
subject will also help develop students’ analytical ability on network technology.
Learning Outcomes
understand the basic concepts and applications of Internet and World Wide Web.
design and develop simple Internet applications with HTML.
apply relevant Internet knowledge to enhance their understanding of other situations of networking.
Indicative Contents
Fundamentals of World Wide Web
Internet basics; Client/server model; Basic HTML; Browsers; Searching the Web; Downloading
programs and files; Web graphics; Multimedia; Web programming tools.
Internetworking Technology
Concepts on internetworking; Internetworking architecture; Protocols and standards; IP, UDP, TCP,
SMTP, SNMP, and IP addresses; Domain name system; Agents; Intranets; Extranets.
Internet Applications
Client-server interactions; Electronic mail; Telnet and FTP; Electronic publishing, Electronic fund
transfer; Electronic data interchange; Internet service providers; Application service providers; Internet
applications and services in Hong Kong.
Internet Security
Security and firewall; Privacy and security issues; Introduction to Virtual Private Network (VPN).
69
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key Internet concepts, with specific reference to the
latest Internet technology wherever appropriate. The techniques of designing and developing small-scale
web-based programs will also be taught.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of different network configuration. The activities in
tutorials normally include hands-on exercises and program writing with various web programming
techniques.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, assignments, tests and examination
designed to develop and assess analytical skills of the students.
Indicative Readings
Jean Andrews, i-Net+ Guide to Internet, Course Technology (latest ed.).
References
Comer, D.E., Computer Networks and Internets, Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
Greenlaw, R., Fundamentals of the Internet and the World Wide Web, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
H. Albert Napier, Philip J. Judd, Discovering the Internet: Brief Concepts and Techniques, Course
Technology (latest ed.).
Karl Barksdale, Michael Rutter, Ryan Teeter, Internet BASICS, Course Technology (latest ed.).
Perry, Schneider. New Perspectives on the Internet, Thomson Learning (latest ed.).
70
CC2007
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
21 hours of Lecture
7 hours of Seminar
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject describes a list of environmental factors: heat, light, sound, electricity and magnetism, for
consideration in the design of buildings. Students will be introduced to the analysis and assessment of the
thermal, lighting, acoustic, irradiation and moisture performance characteristics of buildings. The concept
of maintaining the built environment of buildings and integrating the buildings with the macroenvironment will be emphasized. Environmental assessment methods will be introduced as a tool to assess
the impact of the built structure on the environment.
Learning Outcomes
On successfully completing of the subject, students will be able to:
appreciate the fundamental factors of environmental science: heat, light, sound, electricity and
magnetism, in building design
design and construct the built environment in accordance to the environmental science criteria
use the performance requirements to maintain a stable built environment for human comfort
analyse and assess the thermal, lighting, acoustic, irradiation and moisture performance characteristics
of buildings
integrate buildings into the macro-environment: geographical factor and the consequent social,
economic and ecological impact of the buildings
use environmental assessment methods such as environmental impact assessment and environmental
audit in some large-scale projects like reclamation and land filling
Indicative Contents
Meteorology and Climatology
Effects and impacts of meteorology and climatology on the micro-climate and human comfort of
buildings. Application in the design of buildings with consideration of weather and climate.
Heat
Nature of heat and heat transfer with heat gains or losses in buildings. Use of insulating materials,
thermal insulation and comfort with design of buildings. Moisture in buildings: gases and vapours,
humidity and condensation.
Light and Sound
Basic physics of light and electromagnetic radiation; lighting for vision. Nature of sound and its levels;
71
attenuation, control of noise with building acoustics.
Electricity and Magnetism
Induction of electricity by magnetism, and vice versa. Power supplies and distribution in buildings.
Water
Water supplies and fluid flow. Treatment of water before discharge.
Environmental Issues
Limits of Earth’s resources such as land, water, energy, mineral and food. Environmental pollution
such as in air, water or land, with chemical, radiation and noise. Problems of ecosystems and
conservation. Assessment methods: environmental audit and environmental impact assessment.
Teaching/Leaning Approach
A wide range of methods will be adopted, which include lectures, small group discussions, student
presentations, project based and problem-solving tasks and case study work. Lectures are for the
introduction of the basic environmental concepts in building. Discussions and presentations during tutorial
and seminars are used to stimulate students to appreciate and solve problems in environmental issues in
large-scale construction projects. Where appropriate, the use of computer assisted learning techniques will
be employed. It is intended to create an environment that encourages active learning.
Students will be encouraged to reflect on their learning activities to review what they have learned and to
plan further action and activity.
Assessment
Assessment such as individual assignments, tests and examination will be used to assess the application of
the knowledge assimilated in lectures and reinforced in tutorials. Students are trained to search for
information, comprehend, criticise and summarise in own words in the project reports and problem-solving
tasks. Students are required to present findings from project and case study in the seminars.
Indicative Reading
Burberry, P., Environment and Services. Longman, (latest ed.).
References
BRE (various), Digests and Current Papers. Building Research Establishment, Garston, Watford, U.K.,
(recent issues).
BSIRIA., Building Services Materials Handbook. CIBS, U.K., (latest ed.).
Hall, F., Building Services and Equipment. Longman, (latest ed.).
Markus, T.A. and Morris, E.B., Building Climate and Energy. Pitman Publishing Ltd., (latest ed.).
McMullan, R., Environmental Services in Building. The Macmillan Press Ltd., (latest ed.).
Redcuft, M., Sustainable Development – Exploring the Contradictions. Routledge, (latest ed.).
Wathern, P., Environmental Impact Assessment, Theory and Practice. Routledge, (latest ed.).
72
中國文化 Chinese Civilisation
CC2008
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
學習模式
評估方法
2
3
非科學
14 小時導修課
無
50% 課堂習作
50% 期終考試
科目目標
科目目標
紹
精特質
價值哲念差
構
價值極易日活到
既政治
倫
建
築藝繪畫經濟宗飲食
導
尤注
想為舉辦多次戶察
就察景物
擬
題
證導
香港
活
特質
命
本科主要介
會結
中國文化的基本
中，中國文化
術、
、
神及
容
、
從
教、
，簡論中西文化在
常生
中得
、法律等各方面教
學的中國文化知識，了解當代中國人所思所
定研究課
的
，撰寫報告及書面習作，引
，中國文化與現代社會的
系統及
體現，故本課程
，故
課堂教
學觀
從
的
有關中國文化知識，本科
同學
外考
的知識，在
的現實生
運。
察香港景物
層下層 ` 角度欣賞
多元視野析
培養宏微角度
日活應哲
現時
中，學習中西方文化的
特色
。
體會中國文化的意義。
學習從上
從
的
從
從
及
觀及
常生
的不同
中，分
觀的
中，
中國文化的要義
何謂
？「
中國古代建築藝術
寺廟祠道建築藝
中國飲食文化
南北飲食
中國家族倫理
長幼序
稱謂
研究
，
觀
中國
堂，
文化
，不同的
學及文化的知識。
」
術的
文化的異同，
有
點。
，探討中國文化。
用中國
中國文化
特
中國文化。
中國文化的要義及
，人
紹
的方法，介
當代中外學者
特色
。
飲食
具
文化的器
。
倫物便是道
理
。
73
對
中國文化的
看
考
的
，
中，體會中國文化
從觀
理、傳統
意同學運用所
，同學
學習成果
異。在傳統社
、社會、
法。
中國人的愛情觀
對親鄉鄰兄弟情男女愛情
中國人的諸神祟拜
道諸
佛
中國人的死後世界
死葬禮死
中國法律文化
刑具禮爭
中國軍事思想
墨子宋軍想鄭下洋
中國人
教
人，
神，中國
儀，
，
，
，
，
相
的
。
教，行業神。
後的世界與人間的互動。
法之
代
之
。
事思
，
和
西
。
評估方法
平
佔 50%
本課程評核將以個人習作、小組報告和課堂匯報，測驗及考試的形式進行。
時分
，考試
50%。
1.個人習作──主要以撰寫論文的方式，考核同學研究天文與占卜關係的基礎知識。
2.小組書面報告──同學要從外考中，撰寫有關報告，考核同學合作能力及報告所獲的知識。
3.課堂匯報──主要考核同學報告能力，能否在有限時間內，發揮報告的重點。
戶察
香港城市
心編
推介教科書
大學中國文化科目中
導讀》香港香港城市出版
：《中國文化
：
大學
1999
社，
年
。
參考書
Fairbank, John K., Late Ching China, 1800-1911, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1978.
Fairbank, John K. and Merle Goldman, ed. China: A New History, Cambridge: Harvard University Press,
1998.
王編
余英
李治安
力
》北京北京出版
物危機》海海民出版
官僚政治》北京
獻出版
：《中國古代文化史講座
時：《歷史人
：《中國古代
與文化
上
年
1987 年
1993 年
1989
：
大學
社，
。
：上
人
社，
。
：書目文
社，
74
。
CC2009
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
評估方法
2
3
非科學
無
60% 課堂習作
40% 期終考試
中國語文 Chinese Language
科目目標
培養閱讀
演說
字詞句培養閱讀
包括應
性章
本課程主要
中文的
同學
、
識，
、
、書寫、
；
同學
用文及學術
文
家著
紹
導
及撰寫中文學術論文的基本能力。課程教
演
學術論文及名
等；訓練同學在
名
表
的興趣及能力；介
講、討論及系統地發
撰寫各
規範
類章
技巧
同學
地運用
文
的基礎知
意見等各方面的
。
學習成果
字流變語語構
正字規範語
提高閱讀著
口語
章技巧想涵
類應
應付職
提高
章
例如恰歸納景料靈活
注釋
總項
而具備良好章表達織
辯
演說
效準確表達
功
據例
了解漢
通過個人
及漢
中文
掌握不同種
法結
的基礎知識，寫
作、書寫和
能力，理解不同文
用文體的寫作，以
獲取撰寫學術論文的基礎知識，
運用
、分論、
結等各
及討論，有
運用所學的知識，成
、
文
、
寫作學術文
地
分辨論點、論
（各
、事
結
通論
）
報告
求
及
。
和思
的基本能力，
的文
個人意見。
文
書
的
寫作要點，從
及
法通論
及簡化
的漢
內
。
業需求及其他社會事務的需要。
基礎中文
基礎中文
詞性句子篇章構
語語
字流變字
章閱讀技巧
實用文寫作訓練
信公私函件
歡迎辭
職信履表
漢
及
歷
75
的能力。
當
力、組
背
力和論
材
，
力等。
學術性文章寫作訓練
章
物影視
性資料搜集技巧
格
回
注釋
評論文
（時事、人
、
評論等）
學術
一般學術論文的
結論、
教學方法
證
顧、研究要點、
論及互評作
過大
、目
錄
、內容
等，進一步
個
分
（
作及
用中文、強化自
機制例如
透
持續
綜語
2
賞溝織
3
4
5
用各種評核
重
：
）
要、文
化課堂所教，並
。學生
章構章節安排
結
、
個人習作──主要以
各
寫作
合
過各文
修改
學生參與課堂報告、討
課，學習自評及
演說
、測驗及考試等評
的寫作及各
，
評估的方法，要求同學撰寫
文能力。
小組書面報告──小組同學要從
.
小組課堂匯報──主要考核同學
.
測驗───考核同學所獲有關撰寫學術論文及
.
考試──考核同學所獲有關撰寫學術論文及實用文的知識。
、
通組
的能力。
指定課本
涉
及的參考材
有關
名的
式，
、
用文及學術
.
，在實踐
學生所學，
面地評核學生的能力。
文體，以各
文
中，合作撰寫報告，以考核同學
、報告重點及
同學
的能力。
的知識。
料廣泛無指
較
，
定課本。
參考書
Lawrence, M. S. Writing as a Thinking Process. The University of Michigan Press (latest ed.).
Winkler A.C., Writing the Research Paper: a Handbook, Boston: Thomson/Heinle (latest ed.).
于鯤編
應》海復旦出版最新版
谷財經應
》海立信計出版最新版
吳宜澄盧姵綺
格手冊》台北桂冠股份公司最新版
呂叔湘
語百詞》香港商印館最新版
胡裕樹
語》香港三店最新版
高編
》南京南京出版最新版
張慶勳
手冊》台北心出版最新版
成
文天
主
：《現代
：《
、
用文
，上
用文寫作教程
：《論文寫作
：《現代漢
：《現代漢
小和
、
鑑模準確衡量
亦
模擬演辯更公平全
應
性
類章
閱讀著篇章
閱讀鑒
演說
回應提出問題
公函
類
討論、報告、
學生的參與，務求
核同學的
本課程
提
各種寫作理論。
評估方法
廣泛利
特別視
1.
標題
透量案析佳病例深
鼓勵
品
活
信提交類功
理論與實際並重，
中驗
式（學術
及參考書目等）
八
，
：《學術論文寫作
：《論文寫作
：
，上
大學
：
會
，
：
式
，
：
務
：
聯書
，
，
：
，
：
社，
理
書
。
社，
圖書
，
。
有限
。
。
大學
社，
76
社，
。
。
，
。
寫作考
、
路德慶編
盧丹懷編著
主
等
》
港應
：《寫作教程
：《中
，上
海華東師範出版最新版
全》香港商印館(香港) 公司最新版
：
用文傳意大
大學
，
：
77
社，
務
書
。
有限
，
。
CC2010
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
Elementary French
2
3
Non-Science
French, supplemented by English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject serves to introduce to students basic and fundamental French. The most practical aspects of
using French will be illustrated in daily life to enhance students’ proficiency. By means of understanding
French culture, students can learn the French language in easier ways.
Learning Outcomes
On successfully completing this course, students will be able to:
use the basic phonetics of French.
use the common phrases in French to cope with their travel needs.
express themselves in French to survive in French speaking countries.
appreciate some aspects of French culture.
Indicative Contents
French Pronunciation
The consonants and vowels of French; Words in company; Intonation.
Everyday Communication
Addressing others and introduction of oneself; Affirmative, negative and skeptical responses; Talking
about time, date, and weather; Expressing gratitude and apology.
Basic survival
Traveling by air, train and bus; Staying in a hotel, restaurant etc; Applying for a visa and at customs.
Social Life
Starting, changing and closing a conversation; Making telephone calls and appointments; Expressing
congratulations and good wishes; Meeting and seeing people off.
This foundation course, designed for students with no previous knowledge of the language, focuses on the
development of the students’ linguistic skills through practical use of the language. Both oral and written
forms are given equal emphasis. Heavy interaction between the lecturer and the students is expected.
78
Assessment Approach
Assessment such as individual and group assignments, presentation, tests and examination will be used to
assess the application of the learnt knowledge. Written assignments and presentations are, respectively, for
training written and oral communication skills.
Indicative Reading
Beacco di Giura, M., Kaneman-Pougatch, M., Jennepin, D. and Trevisi, S. Café Crème 1: Méthode de
français, Livre de l’élève and Cahier d’exercices. Paris: Hachette, 1997.
References
Charliac, L. and Motron, A.C. Phonétique progressive du français (and 2 cassettes). Clé International,
1998.
Grégoire, M. Grammaire progressive du français (Niveau débutant) and Corrigés. Clé International, 1997.
Kendris, C. French Vocabulary. Barron’s, 1990.
Oudot, S. French Verbs and Essentials of Grammar. Passport Books, 1991.
The Collins-Robert French/English English/French Dictionary. Collins-Robert, 1995.
Une journée de Français (Niveau débutant) (video). Clé International, 1997.
Audio-visual materials
L’espace des Français (Niveau débutant) (video). Clé International, 1996. (Materials developed by the
French section, ENGL)
79
CC2011
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
Preferred Background
Knowledge
Japanese I
2
3
Non-science
Japanese (supplemented by English and/or Cantonese)
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
An ability to understand and write Chinese characters
Aims
This course aims to introduce students to the basics of Japanese pronunciation, writing systems, sentence
structure and grammar, while stimulating their interests in both the Japanese language and its culture.
Learning Outcomes
know how to pronounce the Japanese sounds correctly.
recognize and know how to read and write Japanese characters (Hiragana, Katakana, Kanji and
Rōmaji).
develop a vocabulary repertoire of about 650 words (including Kanji, commonly used expressions and
phrases).
acquire a basic knowledge of the characteristics and grammar of Japanese language.
understand and engage in simple conversations on everyday matters.
create a preliminary interest in Japanese culture.
Indicative Contents
Phonetic Systems
All vowels and consonants, syllables, pitch accent, intonation
Writing Systems
Various writing systems (Rōmaji, Hiragana, Katakana, Kanji)
Vocabulary / Reading /Writing
Simple vocabulary (e.g. daily greetings, simple counting, numbers, currency, times and dates);
read simple dialogues and short passages; write simple sentences
Grammar
Simple verbs (present/past tense; affirmative/negative form), basic particles
80
Speaking / Listening
Simple daily conversation (e.g. introduce oneself and others, give a gift to someone, and simple
requests)
Culture / Society
Selected topics on Japanese culture and society
This foundation course, designed for students with no previous knowledge of the language, focuses on
enabling students to master the Japanese sounds and writing systems. Through direct drills, practices and
activities in classes, students will participate actively in the learning process. A multimedia approach will
be adopted whereby students will be exposed to audio and visual materials to enhance their understanding
of the Japanese language and culture.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including written assignments, oral presentations, case studies,
tests and examination designed to develop and assess students’ communication skills in the Japanese
language.
Indicative Readings
Recommended Textbooks
新局出版編輯部
家日語—初級 I》（『みんなの日本語』）台北
年 (First half of the textbook will be used.)
向日葵出版編日語假字簿》香港向日葵出版
大
書
社
《大
的
本
：大
新局
書
，
2002
。
社
《
名習
：
2004
社，
年
。
References
新局出版編輯部家日語—初級 ( 讀本篇)》台北新局 2004 年
新局出版編輯部家日語—初級 I, II (句型練習冊 )》台北新局 2003 年
新局出版編輯部家日語—初級 I, II (練習 C、会話イラストシート )》台北新
局 2002 年
向日葵出版編日本語 90 日 1》(90 Days of Japanese Language 1) 香港向日葵出版 2002
年
大新出版社編輯部新日本語の基礎》台北：大新書局，1998 年。
大
書
社
《大
的
本
大
書
社
《大
的
本
大
書
社
《大
的
本
書
，
：大
書
，
：大
。
書
，
。
：大
。
社
《
：
。
《
81
社，
初級普通話 Elementary Putonghua
CC2012
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
學習模式
評估方法
2
3
非科學
普通話
14 小時導修課
無
60% 課堂習作
40% 期終考試
科目目標
旨授語拼音
對普話粵語詞彙語區別
普話交流
本課程
用
在教
通
和
通
進行
學生漢
鞏固對普話語音
增
而使們恰準確流利日活
體系的基礎知識，
、
法之
其
的比較認識，從
通
他
的認識，在此基礎上
可
當、
、
地在
進學生
常生
中運
。
學習成果
在完成此科目後，學生有足夠能力：
語拼音
如讀聲母韻母聲調
對普話語音特如輕
聲兒變調
使恰準確效普話
看拼音讀語辭彙句子
普話粵語語音詞彙語
差別
把日粵語辭彙
句子翻譯普話語口語
普話表達溝技巧
摩來培養我
團隊
精
增
信心
掌握漢
、
的基礎知識
化、
認
的認識，
、寫漢
、
其可
和
當、
通
和
在
、
成
通
書面
和
。
掌握用
通
和基本
神，同時
、有
通
強個人自
和
、
、
、
化、
漢
寫基本
通
常用
通
及辨
訓練
、會
及
通
通
點
。
，並有能力
。通過小組合作和互相觀
。
介
漢
地運用
法上的基本
語拼音紹
語拼音聲母韻母聲調
輕聲兒
變調
語拼音拼
規則
普話聆聽
音
日
語對話
普話說話
話朗讀
普粵詞彙
對譯
普話量詞搭配
漢
等，同時加強其
。
瞭解及分辨
作的
、
和
訓練
比較和
通
82
自
常
常用
和
學習的能力和
合
教學方法
由師為
語音辭彙語
每
使聲光碟讀聆聽
導修由師準備
包括
口語
為角色扮演專題
主講課主要
堂課並
課
教
學生講解課文中的
用有
教
作領
及
、
和
法現象，學生
依次朗讀做
進行
及
書面練習，
訓練。
課外練習，
式可
、
書面練習和
或
訓練，學生可分小組
口語
個人進行；
模
訓練的
討論及小組報告等。
評估方法
連續
期末
均筆口
連續包括短
期
話
連續
包括
(i)
口語
短
(ii)
期
包括語拼音音看語拼音拼語詞語句子
粵語言詞語短句普話對譯普話破音字聽
(iii)
話
員為三
, 選題
編表演段情景話
期末
包括
口筆
以
評估和
講，
中測驗和會
考試兩種方式進行，二者
評估方式
評估：將以個人
中測驗：內容
方
與
辨
通
的
將分
評估
個人
；
漢
；
通
寫漢
；
至四人一組自
目，
及
；
力測
寫並
一
會
。
：
試
教科書及參考書目
指
普話
編普話
第冊》香港普話
定教科書
通
試兩種形式。其中
講的方式進行評估。
漢
及
評估：學
考試評估方式
試和
試與
：
個人
會
有
評估。
研習社
：《
通
課本（
一
）
：
通
2001
研習社，
年
。
院語言詞典編輯室編
語詞典》香港商印館 2001 年
曾子凡編著廣州話普話口語詞對譯手冊》香港三店 2002 年
李明石佩編著語普話語音正》北京北京語言
出版 1998 年
王安編張少彭增安著普話音功》香港商印館 1999 年
參考書目
中國社會科學
研究所
：《
、
國
主
加
理
通
文
：《漢
，
雲、
附資料
工
：《現代漢
：
通
辨
：《
普話網資源 ﹕
語心 (網語
（學習
大學中國
通
上
通
上
聯書
：
發
文學習
http://www.clc.polyu.edu.hk/
，
：
漢
自學
通
通
通
目
，
。
社，
書
，
。
。
資源庫 -- 普話音節表語音聆聽
、漢
http://resources.emb.gov.hk/%7Echi/frontpage.html
香港電台普話台(收聽普話節
書
。
務
通
、
香港育城語拼音網頁(普話聲韻表語拼音板拼讀
教
務
文化大學
基本
）
文中
：
) http://www.rthk.org.hk
83
和
)
練習等
和
練習
)
CC2014
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
2
3
Non-science
English and Chinese
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Seminar
Prerequisites
Assessment
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
The subject aims at giving students a brief historical survey on aesthetics of both the West and the East.
This includes the introduction to the basic concept and definition of aesthetics and art appreciation,
analysis and critique of various artworks/ performances. Students should be able to apply relevant
concepts and principles to artworks/ performances appreciation and understand the relationship between
aesthetics, art and culture.
Learning Outcomes
understand the basic concept and definition of aesthetics and art appreciation.
appreciate, analyse and criticise artworks/ performances.
apply relevant concepts and principles to artworks/ performances appreciation through watching the
artwork and performances.
recognise the relationship between aesthetics, art and culture.
Indicative Contents
The Concept and Definition of Aesthetics
What is aesthetics?
Introduction to Western aesthetics and Chinese aesthetics
The Concept and Definition of Art Appreciation
What is art?
Introduction to art appreciation
Appreciating Paintings
Appreciate, analyse and criticise western/ Chinese paintings
Apply relevant concepts and principles to western/ Chinese paintings appreciation
Understand the relationship between aesthetics, paintings and western/ Chinese culture
Appreciating Sculptures
Appreciate, analyse and criticise western/ Chinese sculptures
Apply relevant concepts and principles to western Chinese sculptures appreciation
Understand the relationship between aesthetics, sculptures and western/ Chinese culture
84
Appreciating Theatre
Appreciate, analyse and criticise western/ Chinese theatre
Apply relevant concepts and principles to western Chinese theatre appreciation
Understand the relationship between aesthetics, theatre and western/ Chinese culture
Appreciating Dance
Appreciate, analyse and critique various western/ Chinese dance
Apply relevant concepts and principles to western Chinese dance appreciation
Understand the relationship between aesthetics, dance and western/ Chinese culture
An active learning approach and peer learning approach will be adopted in the subject. Teaching and the
selection of teaching materials will be respectively conducted and exercised in both Chinese and English
languages. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process. And students will take
part in a wide range of interesting and challenging activities. Audio visual materials will be used for
learning purposes.
Indicative Reading
Aristotle (Translated by S. H. Butcher), Poetics, New York : Hill and Wang (1961).
Eldridge, Richard, An Introduction to the Philosophy of Art, London: Cambridge University Press (2003).
Hegel, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich (Translated by T. M. Knox), Aesthetics, Oxford: Clarendon Press (1975).
Kant, Immanuel (Translated by J. H. Bernard), Critique of Judgement, New York: Hafner (1951).
Williams, Robert, Art Theory-An Historical Introduction, London: Blackwell Publishing (2004).
朱光潛
美》北京民出版
李澤厚美集》台北三民局 996 年
周憲美是甚麼》台北揚智 2002 年
宗華宗华全集》安徽安徽育出版
楊辛甘霖美原》北京北京出版
葉朗
美綱》海海民出版
：《西方
：《
：《
白
、
學史
學論
學
：《
白
：《
：《中國
：人
：
書
：
文化，
：
學
理
學史大
文學
上
，1
教
2003 年
社，
。
。
。
2000 年
2003 年
2004 年
社，
。
：
大學
社，
。
：上
人
社，
。
85
CC2016
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Seminar
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to develop students’ sociological understanding of human society. It equips them with a
understanding of concepts and theories in sociology, and facilitates their analysis of social phenomena in
contemporary society. Most important of all, it enables them to realize and appreciate the importance of
cultural diversity in the changing human world.
Learning Outcomes
grasp the basic concepts and theories in sociology.
apply sociological concepts and theories to analyzing social phenomena in both local and global
contexts.
demonstrate a humanistic attitude to understanding social issues in human societies.
Indicative Contents
Developing a Sociological Consciousness
The sociological perspective; The history and development of sociology.
Culture, Socialization and Social Relations
Inter-cultural and intra-cultural variations; Agents of socialization; Gender socialization and
inequality; Crime, sub-culture and deviance.
Social Stratification and Capitalism
Class structure and mobility; Class inequality and poverty; Interaction among class, gender and race;
Education and social stratification; Professionalization.
Power and Politics
State and nationalism; Distribution of political power; State, economy and welfare.
Social Change and Economic Development
From agricultural to industrial and post-industrial societies; Theories of social change and
economic development; Globalization and the information society.
Mass Media and Communication
Media technologies and human communications; Mass media and social change; Mass media and
86
social consent; Images, advertising and popular culture.
Theories and concepts are explicated during lectures, which emphasize active interaction between students
and lecturers. Lectures are delivered with the aid of audio-visual materials to strengthen students’
sensitivity to current social issues.
In seminars, students are divided into small groups to conduct presentations of assigned topics. They are
expected to apply relevant sociological theories and concepts to examining social issues, during group
discussion.
Assessment Approach
In addition to tests and examination that assess students’ understanding of sociological concepts and
theories, presentations as well as written reports are used to examine students’ competence in conducting
sociological analysis of current social issues.
Indicative Reading
Henslin, James M., Essentials of Sociology: A Down-To-Earth Approach, Pearson/Allyn and Bacon (latest
ed.).
Tepperman, Lorne, and Blain, Jenny, Think Twice: Sociology Looks at Current Social Issues, Prentice Hall
(latest ed.).
References
Abbott, Pamela, and Wallace, Claire, Introduction to Sociology: Feminist Perspectives, Routledge (latest
ed.).
Macionis, John J., and Plummer, Ken, Sociology: A Global Introduction, Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
Newman, David M., and O’Brien, Jodi, Sociology: Exploring the Architecture of Everyday Life, Pine Forge
Press (latest ed.).
87
CC2019
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Non-science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject develops students’ understanding of the psychology of human behaviour. The subject
provides students with a unified theme of what constitute academic psychology, the different conceptual
psychological frameworks available and the relevance of these theories to one’s daily life. Through the
understanding of human behaviour, it is hoped that students will become more able in communicating and
handling social relationship, problem solving and critical thinking.
Learning Outcomes
distinguish the differences between popular psychology and academic psychology
understand the fundamentals of psychological theories
understand the use of scientific reasoning in the study of psychology
explain phenomena in daily lives with the use of psychological concepts and theories
see phenomena and issues as a result of complex interplay among individuals, groups and society
Indicative Contents
History and Development of Psychology as a Science
Scope of psychology; History of psychology; Value and contributions of psychology to human life;
Concept of scientific reasoning; Steps in conducting research in psychology.
Biological Foundations of Psychology
Neurons and action potential; Organization of Nervous System; Evolution, genes and behaviour.
Consciousness, Emotion and Motivation
States of consciousness: sleep and dreams; Consciousness, hypnosis and drugs, Components of
emotions; Psychological and physiological aspects of emotions; Universality of emotions; Theories of
motivation: homeostasis and drives.
Sensation and Perception
Sensory modalities and processes; Function of perception; Principles of perceptual organization;
Perceptual constancy and development.
Learning
88
Classical conditioning; Operant conditioning; Social and cognitive approaches to learning; Limitations
and applications of each theories.
Memory and Cognition
Attention and selectivity; Memory and its processes; Categorizations of memory; Constructive
memory and its implication; Application of theories to improve memory; Organization of long-term
memory: schema; Abstraction; Problem-solving and reasoning.
Intelligence and Psychological Measurement
Intelligence: classical and contemporary theories; Measurement of intelligence: history and
development; Basic concepts in psychological measurement.
Perspectives of Human Development
Physical Development; Cognitive development; Social and personality development; Emotional
development; Moral development.
Human Behaviours in Public
Social perception; Concept of self; Attitudes and behaviour: cognitive dissonance and persuasion;
Social influence; Obedience and compliance; Interpersonal attraction; Group influence.
Key Issues of Mental Health, Stress and Coping
Defining abnormality; Disorders and their types according to DSM classification; Source and effects of
stress on psychological functioning and physical health; Coping and managing stress.
Lectures will be used to explain key concepts and theories with the aid of learning and teaching activities
that have been prepared and provided on the Web in order to encourage students’ active participation
during contact hours. Such activities include self-assessment, class exercises, small group discussion
topics, role-play and case demonstration. Moreover, audio-visual materials will also be used to facilitate
learning during lecture.
Tutorials are conducted to help students make use of the psychological concepts learned in the lectures.
Tutorials and/or web-based materials and references can be considered as both a supplement to lectures and
a self-learning tool for integration and internalization of subject material.
Assessment Approach
Students will be assessed on all the materials presented in lectures, specified pages in the text book, plus
video shows and demonstrations in tutorials. A variety of assessment methods will be used such as
presentations, case studies, written reports, test and examination, which are designed to both develop and
assess students’ critical thinking and communication skills on top of the subject matter in the subject.
Indicative Readings
Weiten, Wayne. Psychology: Themes & Variation. Wadsworth. (latest ed.).
Supplementary
Baron, R.A. Psychology. London: Allyn and Bacon. (latest ed.).
89
Kalat, J.W. Introduction to Psychology. Pacific Grove: Brooks/Cole. (latest ed.).
Stenberg, R. Introduction to Psychology. New York: McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Weiten, W. Psychology: Themes and variations (with CD-ROM). Pacific Grove: Thomson Learning. (latest
ed.).
Yeung, K.C. Human Growth and Behaviour I: Vol. I. Hong Kong: Hong Kong Polytechnic University.
(latest ed.).
高尚仁：《心理學新論》香港：商務印書館 (最新版本)
葉重新：《心理學》台北：心理出版社 (最新版本)
。
90
。
CC2028
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Grammar in Context
2
3
Non-Science
English
42 hours of Seminar
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This practical course provides a platform for students to learn, consolidate, and improve their knowledge in
English grammar in different contexts that involve extensive use of the English language, such as news
reporting, business writing, oral communication, and literary writings. Through these contexts students will
understand the underlying grammatical principles in the workings of English, with a major focus on
formation and functions of various sentence patterns for different purposes of writing. With this knowledge,
students can take a step forward into the identification and correction of grammatical error, evaluation and
appreciation of deviations in sentence structures in different genres of text, and production of contextually
appropriate and grammatically correct sentences. Students who wish to improve their grammar for better
communication, understand and appreciate the intricate network of grammatical rules, or pursue further
studies in language or linguistics will find this course useful.
Learning Outcomes
make use of the various grammatical concepts learnt to facilitate the communication process for
various purposes.
analyse, explain and correct grammatical inconsistencies, ambiguities and other stylistic aberrations to
achieve communicative success in different contexts.
identify the use of different sentence patterns from diverse settings (e.g. news, commercial
advertisements, business correspondences, fictions, films, etc).
produce grammatical and context-specific texts with reference to the nature and purpose of writing.
Indicative Contents
Grammar in Newspaper
Major sentence, minor sentence, sentence part, word class, phrase, clause, variation in sentence
structure
Grammar in Business
Subjunctive, imperative, you-attitude, sentence reduction for brevity, sentence expansion for clarity
Grammar of the Spoken Language
Contraction, minor sentence, word stress, sentence stress, intonation
Grammar and Literary Language
Poetic license, stylistic aberrations, grammar of poetic language
91
Lectures are reserved for discussing and analyzing the inner workings of English grammar in different
contexts.
Tutorials are practice sessions to ensure students’ thorough comprehension of the rules of English grammar
by applying them to the analysis and production of grammatical and context-specific sentences. Students
are thus expected to be specially disciplined and committed to the course of study since the course entails a
rather systematic and largely logical approach to the study of English grammar.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used. These include take-home assignments that help students to
revise materials taught and discussed in the lectures and tutorials, a quiz and a final examination that
evaluate the depth of internalization of the newly-learnt concepts through students’ demonstration of
applying these concepts to their analysis and creation of texts for different contexts.
Indicative Reading
Carter, R., Hughes, R., McCarthy, M. Exploring grammar in context: grammar reference and practice
(Upper-intermediate and Advanced). Cambridge University Press (latest ed.).
References
Crystal, D. Making Sense of Grammar, Pearson Education (latest ed.).
Greenbaum, S. and Nelson, G. An Introduction to English Grammar, Longman (latest ed.).
Hughes, R. Exploring Grammar in Writing, Cambridge University Press (latest ed).
Koch, R. S. Focus on Grammar: An Advanced Course for Reference and Practice Workbook,
Addison-Wesley (latest ed.).
Murcia, M. C. and Freeman, D. L. The Grammar Book: An ESL/ EFL Teacher’s Course,
Heinle & Heinle-Thomson (latest ed.).
Nettle, M. and Hopkins, D. Developing grammar in context: grammar reference and practice
(intermediate). Cambridge University Press (latest ed.).
Steer, J. M. The Advanced Grammar Book, Heinle & Heinle-Thomson (latest ed.).
92
CC2030
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusions
Assessment
Mathematics
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
CC2003 Quantitative Methods & CC2026 Numerical Skills
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces students to the fundamentals of algebra and calculus. It provides students with
practices in applying mathematical concepts to solve scientific and engineering problems. Studying the
subject will also help students to develop their analytical and logical thinking for their further study in
other engineering subjects.
Learning Outcomes
understand fundamental mathematical concepts in algebra and calculus
extend their knowledge of mathematical techniques and adapt known solutions to different situations
apply the appropriate mathematical techniques to solve problems in science and engineering
think analytically and logically
Indicative Contents
Basic Algebra
Linear functions and quadratic functions; Binomial theorem; Simple inequalities; System of Linear
equations in two and three variables; Elimination method; Matrix and matrix operations; Use of
matrices to solve systems of linear equations.
Complex Number
Complex numbers; Geometrical representation; n-th root of complex number.
Calculus
Basic concepts of limits and derivatives; Gradient of tangent and rate of change; Second order
derivatives; Maximum and minimum; Curve sketching; Optimization problems; Definite and indefinite
integrals; Integration methods; Applications of integration (e.g. properties of area, volume and mass);
Double integrals.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of fundamental mathematical concepts in algebra and
calculus and demonstrate how they can apply to solve scientific and engineering problems.
93
lectures and to apply appropriate mathematical techniques to solve problems in science and engineering.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools may be used, including assignments, tests and an examination designed to
develop and assess students’ achievement of the subject expected learning outcomes.
Indicative Readings
Smith, Robert T. and Minton, Roland B. Calculus: Concepts and Connections. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Anton, Howard. Calculus. (7th edition) Wiley. (2002).
Anton, Howard. Contemporary Linear Algebra. John Wiley & Sons. (2003).
Barnett, Raymond and Ziegle, Michael. College Algebra. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Bostock, L. Core Maths for Advanced Level ( 3rd edition) Stanley Thornes. (2000).
Thomas, G.B., Finney, R.L., Hass, J.R. and Giordano, F.R. Thomas’ Calculus. Addison Wesley. (latest
ed.).
94
CC2031
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
Knowledge
Japanese II
2
3
Non-science
28 hours of Lecture
CC2011 (Japanese I), or a minimum of 42 hours training on
Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must
be supported by an official document
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This foundation course is basically a continuation of CC2011 Japanese I. It aims to further develop
students’ competence in correct pronunciation, writing, vocabulary and grammar through more reading,
writing, speaking and listening practices of Japanese language.
Learning Outcomes
recognize and pronounce more new sounds.
strengthen their Katakana usage.
develop a vocabulary repertoire of about 1,300 words (including Kanji, commonly used expressions
and phrases).
acquire a fundamental knowledge of Japanese grammar and sentence patterns.
speak simple Japanese phrases and sentences to initiate and respond in situational conversations at the
elementary level.
read and understand short passages.
cultivate a preliminary understanding of Japanese culture.
Indicative Contents
Phonetic and Writing Systems
More new sounds and their corresponding Katakana practices
Vocabulary / Reading /Writing
Essential daily vocabulary (e.g. location and position, different counters and counting methods);
read short dialogues and passages; write basic sentences in correct word order
Grammar
More verbs (e.g. transitive, give, receive), state verbs (e.g. understand, like); present/past tense form,
affirmative/negative form and verb conjugations; expressions of existence; adjectives and
conjugations; comparative and superlative structure; more particles
95
Substitution, transformation and expansion drills; situational conversations (e.g. pay a visit to someone,
invitation and decline, shopping, sightseeing, ordering); simple listening comprehension practice
Culture / Society
Through direct drills, practices and activities in classes, students will participate actively in the learning
process. A multimedia approach will be adopted whereby students will be exposed to audio and visual
materials to enhance their understanding of the Japanese language and culture.
Assessment Approach
language.
Indicative Readings
新局出版編輯部
家日語—初級 I》（『みんなの日本語』）台北
年 (Second half of the textbook will be used.)
向日葵出版編日語假字簿》香港向日葵出版
大
書
社
《大
的
本
：大
新局
書
，
2002
。
社
《
名習
：
2004
社，
年
。
References
局 2002 年
向日葵出版編日本語 90 日 1》(90 Days of Japanese Language 1) 香港向日葵出版 2002
年
大新出版社《新日本語の基礎》大新出版社，1998 年。
大
書
社
《大
的
本
大
書
社
《大
的
本
大
書
社
《大
的
本
書
，
：大
書
，
：大
。
書
，
。
：大
。
社
《
：
。
96
社，
哲學概論 Introduction to Philosophy
CC2033
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Non-Science
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Tutorial
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject helps provide a solid foundation of knowledge of the Eastern and Western philosophies and
further equips students with a basic understanding of the scope and the meaning of the discipline of
philosophy.
Learning Outcomes
understand the scope and meaning of philosophy;
grasp the basic characteristics of both western and Chinese philosophy, and also their main differences;
understand the basic methods and problems in philosophy, and appreciate the works of philosophers;
and
apply the philosophical theories in analyzing the students’ own worldview and find out an acceptable
philosophical outlook.
Indicative Contents
The Meaning of Philosophy
The different branches of philosophy; Metaphysics; Epistemology; Ethics; the significance of
philosophy; Kant’s understanding of philosophy.
The Existence of God
Rational proves of the existence of God; the meaning of religion.
Mind, Body and Self
The relation of mind and body; the structure of consciousness; the existence of the human soul;
personal identity and the problem of self.
The Meaning of Life I: Plato
The theory of Ideas; ideal life and ideal state; the existence of afterlife; the meaning of love.
The Meaning of Life II: Confucianism
The theory of human nature; Confucius, Mencius, and Xunzi; virtues and the moral meaning of life;
天
the relation between Tien( ) and human beings.
97
The Meaning of Life III: Taoism
The pursuit of spiritual freedom; Laozi and Zhuangzi; Wuwei(
The Meaning of Life IV: Buddhism
The painfulness of life and the causes of this painfulness; the analysis of the eternal flux and the empty
nature of the phenomena; the pursuit of quietude.
The Philosophical Differences between East and West
The philosophical differences between east and west, an elementary outline.
無為) and the artistic meaning of life.
As philosophy is a subject encouraging people to reflect more openly and deeply, students will be
encouraged not only to understand but to question their own original points of view, in order to
philosophize for themselves. The lectures not just teach the books or philosophers’ viewpoints, but to
endeavor to criticize them and help students set up their own thinking. Therefore, aside from the students’
ability of understanding the theories and of finding suitable reference materials, their critical thinking
power and creativity are also what the course aims at. Discussions and debates will be conducted in tutorial
lessons to sharpen the students’ philosophizing ability. Moreover, a number of films will be used as
example in discussing their philosophical ideas.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, group projects, book reading reports,
tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and
communication skills.
Indicative Reading
Jostein Gaarder, Sophie’s World: a Novel about the History of Philosophy, Berkley Publishing Group
(1996).
T. Schick, Jr. and L Vaughn, Doing Philosophy: An Introduction through Thought Experiments, 2nd
edition, McGraw Hill (2003).
牟宗三
錢穆
哲十》台灣
局 989 年
想》台灣
局 983 年
：《中國
學
：《中國思
史
九講
：學生書
：學生書
，1
，1
。
。
References
Hosphers, John, An Introduction to Philosophical Analysis, Prentice Hall, 1997.
勞光哲淺說新編》香港
出版 998 年
林正弘編想想哲問題》台灣三民局 2002 年
思
：《
主
學
：《
：中文大學
一
學
：
社，1
書
98
，
。
。
CC2034
Level
Credits
Nature
Medium of instruction
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
香港歷史與文化 The History and Culture of Hong Kong
2
3
Non-science
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Tutorial
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims at helping students understand and explore the characteristics of the culture and history
of Hong Kong from historical perspectives and enable them to use such knowledge to solve current
problems.
Learning Outcomes
open their mind of Hong Kong in the filed of economic system, judicial system, administrative style,
heritage, the tourist industry, legislative system, cultural characteristic and the development of social
life;
understand the 19th and 21st century from different perspectives and take a broader view of the period
in Hong Kong, the character of the cultural, economic and the political of Hong Kong;
have a profound knowledge of the continuity and change in Hong Kong between the recent past and
the present, thus looking at the future from different perspectives;
trace the political, socio-economic and cultural change of Hong Kong and the modern world;
apply relevant knowledge concepts and principles of the history of Hong Kong in daily life;
identify and deal with the current problems which we have encountered;
analyze the most recent current issues in Hong Kong through the use of the history and trace the
historical roots of these current problems; and
develop a lifelong interest in reading and studying about the cultural and history of Hong Kong that
will continue after the completion course.
Indicative Contents
Introduction
The geography condition, the climate, the economic value and cultural characteristic of Hong Kong.
Hong Kong’s salient past(old Hong Kong)
The traditional village; the fishing and farming in Hong Kong.
Beginning of the Colonial Hong Kong, 1842-1911
Opium War; the 2nd Opium War; the Taiping Uprising; the Boxer Uprising; the late Qing reform; the
1911 Revolution.
99
Emergence of a Hong Kong Problem, 1911 - 1942
The May Fourth Movement; early warnings; war and negotiations.
British or Chinese Hong Kong?1943 - 1945
The activity of rightists and leftists; the British government and the National Government of Nanjing;
the attitude of the Communist Government to the situation of Hong Kong.
Crown Colony for Ever, 1946 - 1979
Preparations for negotiations; a new government in China; the Cultural Revolution and Hong Kong.
Towards the Joint Declaration, 1979 - 1984
Negotiations, a British initiative, Beijing reactions; beginning of negotiations; the breakthrough;
agreement.
Hong Kong in Transition, 1985 - 1988
British policy to Hong Kong; democratic debates.
The Tiananmen Factor,1989 - 1991
Turmoil in Beijing; identity crisis; rise of confrontation.
End of Cooperation and the new era, 1992 - now
A new Governor; confrontation; failure of conciliation; the new government after 1997.
Teaching/ Learning Approach
During lectures and tutorials, interactive approach is adopted. Students are required to actively participate in
discussion and presentation. Audio and visual materials are also used to enhance students’ understanding of the
teaching content. Each tutorial, students will be divided into groups and required to present an assigned topic for
discussion.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentation, case studies, written reports, tests and
examination designed to assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills.
Indicative Readings
Tsang Steve, A Modern History of Hong Kong: 1841-1998, New York: St Martin’s Press (1999).
References
Chan Lau Kit Ching, China Britain, And Hong Kong: 1895-1945, Hong Kong: Chinese University Press
(1990).
Endacott G.B., Hong Kong Eclipse, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press (1978).
Gillingham Paul, At the Peak: Hong Kong Between the Wars, Hong Kong: MacMillan (1983).
Ng P.Y.L. & H.D.R. Baker, Hong Kong Country: A Chinese Gazetteer of the Hong Kong Region, Hong
Kong: Hong Kong University Press (1983).
100
Sayer, G.R., Hong Kong: 1862-1919 Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press (1975).
Smith Carl T. A Sense of History. Studies in the Social and Urban History of Hong Kong, Hong Kong:
Hong Kong Educational Publishing Co. (1995).
Welsh Frank, A History of Hong Kong, London: Harper Collins Publishers (1993).
余繩武劉存寬編十紀香港》香港麒麟出版
余繩武劉存寬編十紀香港》香港麒麟出版
蔡榮芳香港香港》香港牛津出版 2001 年
、
主
：《
、
主
：《二
：《
人之
史
年
1995 年
1994
九世
的
：
社，
。
世
的
：
社，
。
：
大學
101
社，
。
中國文學概論 Introduction to Chinese Literature
CC2036
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
修讀條件
評估方法
2
3
非科學
中文（粵語或普通話講授；中文書寫）
14 小時導修課
無
60%課堂習作
40%期終考試
課程目標
課程目標
透
本課程
授導修
特質
明
過課堂講
、
掌握中國文學的
學習成果
如
功
同學成
應
完成本科目，
特
流變
效
閱讀
對
培養
提升批判創造性維
掌握中國文學的
運用各種
加強
瞭文學與社會、生
特質
提高對品鑑賞
修養
文本的方法，
思考及
閱讀鑑賞
提升身
素養
中國文學的
自
及
的文化
能力。
透
過
。
點；
，了解中國文學的
中文的運用，
對
的關係，以及
能：
認識中國文學各種文體的
有
活
練習及分組習作的方式，訓練同學
，同學可
文學作
中國文化
思
；
的
能力；
；
的能力。
閱讀中國文學的方法
概
特質紹閱讀
詩言志
品創造
感問題
選料詩如杜甫〈登高〉李商〈無題‧ 歲偷照〉
中國文學的情
透析眾多品
特質——情
情如何品表問題
選料詩詞信說如元好問〈雁丘詞‧問情是何物〉林覺民〈妻訣
別〉張愛玲〈傾城戀〉
文以載道
品如何承載題
選料詩如杜甫〈新婚別〉梁啟超〈說群治〉
述中國文學的
，並介
中國文學文本的方法。
探討文本與作者的關係，文學作
主要
用材
過分
要
用材
書
的
及作者的
：
，
作
，領會中國文學的重要
：
、
，
、
、書
、小
之
等
隱
用材
：
、文，
。
八
鏡
，並探究
，
世間
探討文學與社會的關係。講解文學作
主要
發
社會課
，
102
等。
在作
現的
、
。
論小
與
的關係
。
與
等
中國文學與生活
活息息
旅遊
品
選料詩
文學與生
相關，本課
與文學作
主要
用材
。
：
題
品如何
活味如茶酒藥
說如陶淵明〈飲酒〉劉鶚老殘遊記》沈
湘散記》
會講解中國文學作
、文、小
體現文人的生
，
、
趣
《
，
、
、
從文《
、
、
行
等。
中國文學的雅與俗
剖析雅俗這對概念
審美標準變遷問題
選料詞說戲曲如貫三演》王甫廂記》庸射雕英
雄》
與中國文學的關係，及
主要
用材
傳
等。
：
、小
、
教學方法
如口頭
本課程理論與實踐並重。主講課
備
練習，
，
羅
的
中《
集
中講解與課
報告、小組討論及小習作等，以
國
等
義
、
。
實
《西
、金
題概念
導修為
鞏固
採料廣泛
相關的
和理論，
所學。本課程
用材
課
學生
，體
《
提供
裁眾多今
相關的課堂
，古
兼
。
評估方法
採連續
本課程
用
別
評估方法，分
口頭
從學生的
報告、書面報告、課堂參與，加上測驗和考試，
學生所學。
指定課本
涉
本課程
及的參考材
料廣泛無指
較
，
定課本。
參考書目
朱清朱清典
集》
青木正兒
概說》台北
徐復
精》海
葉維廉
詩》北京三
劉杰
》香港
鄭振鐸
俗》北京
魯迅
說》香港三
龔鵬
散》台北光
自
：《
自
古
文學論文
：上
，
：
文化
神
，上
：上
，
：
聯書
：《中國文學
觀：《中國文學
：《中國
大
學
：《中國文學發展史
：《中國
海海籍出版，最新版。
莊嚴，最新版。
海店出版，最新版。
店，最新版。
局，最新版。
家出版，最新版。
店，最新版。
股份公司，最新版。
，上
文學史
：《中國小
史略
程：《文學
步
，
，
，
書
古
社
：古文書
，
：中國作
：
：漢
社
聯書
文化事業
103
有限
社
衡量
CC2042
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
English for Academic Studies (Science and Technology)
2
3
Non-Science
English
42 hours of Seminar
10 hours of Workshop*
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
The subject prepares students for successful academic study in technical studies in an English medium
post-secondary learning environment. The main focus of this subject is to develop students’ confidence and
competence in using English within academic contexts relevant to their studies in science and technology
subjects.
Learning Outcomes
Apply learned reading strategies to improve comprehension of science and technology-related
materials.
Use the process approach to write a well-structured academic essay/ report.
Summarize and paraphrase ideas effectively.
Research for information, integrate ideas, and document sources properly.
Communicate effectively in spoken academic contexts.
Reflect critically on their own learning process.
Indicative Contents
Writing Skills
Process approach for writing an academic essay/ report: essay structure, topic generation, essay outline,
thesis statement and plan of development, topic sentence and support, introductions and conclusions,
essay unity, coherence and support, sentence skills and common ESL errors. Paraphrasing and
summarizing skills.
Research Skills
Library and other research. Interviewing skills. Documentation style (e.g. MLA, APA, etc.).
Reading and listening skills
Strategies used for different reading purposes (for general understanding, for details, etc.). Note-taking
from spoken and written sources. Reading graphics (e.g, tables, charts, graphs, etc.).
Speaking Skills
Seminar discussion (Presenting ideas and figures, expressing opinions, agreeing/ disagreeing, asking
for clarification, etc.). Question-handling.
104
Study Skills
Reflection on learning processes. Learning in class and working in groups.
Students will be required to participate actively in the learning process. During seminars, students will take
part in a wide range of interesting and challenging language learning activities such as role-plays,
discussions, individual and group activities, which reflect students’ needs in their studies in science and
technology subjects. In particular, students will be required to plan and collaborate with peers in a major
team project/assignment which will give them an opportunity to experience learning from peers as well.
In language laboratory sessions, audio-visual materials will be used to improve students’ listening and
speaking skills, and the online learning platform will be used as a tool to promote extended learning after
class. Students are also encouraged to engage in constant reflection on learning processes and to evaluate
their own as well as their peers’ performance and team work skills in the learning tasks. Through extensive
interactive practices, the course helps students gain mastery of the academic language skills needed for
effective academic communication.
*The 10-hour workshops are designed to provide additional language support to help students with lower
English proficiency achieve the learning outcomes of the subject. Only students who have obtained a pass
in the Use of English examination at AS level or equivalent proficiency, which must be supported by an
official document, are not required to attend the workshops. In the workshop sessions, English practices
corresponding to the topics covered in the seminars will be conducted.
Assessment Approach
The assessment of this subject is based on 100% continuous assessment. Students’ spoken and written
academic English skills will be assessed through a combination of individual and group assessment tasks
related to the learning outcomes of the subject. Tasks may include individual written tasks, group oral
tasks, group written project, quizzes and tests, etc. Students will be assessed on accuracy as well as the
appropriacy of the language used in fulfilling the assessment tasks.
In addition, to encourage a spirit of enquiry and sharing and to help students explore the creativity and
enjoyment of the process of learning and researching knowledge, part of students’ grade will be based on
their class participation throughout the course of the semester.
*Students who are required to attend the workshops are required to complete the assigned tasks of the
workshop such as in-class exercises and a self-learning portfolio satisfactorily, or else the coursework
grade will be downgraded by one letter grade (e.g. C+ downgraded to C).
Indicative Readings
Langan, John. English Skills for Academic Studies. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
An abridged edition of:
Langan, John. College Writing Skills with Readings. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
---. Reading and Study Skills. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
105
References
Langan, John. English Brushup. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Madden, Carolyn G. and Rohlck, Theresa N. Discussion and Interaction in the Academic Community.
University of Michigan Press. (latest ed.).
Oshima, Alice. and Hogue, Ann. Writing Academic English. Addison Wesley Longman. (latest ed.).
Spencer, Carolyn M. and Arbon, Beverly. Foundations of Writing: Developing Research and Academic
Writing Skills. NTC. (latest ed.).
Steer, Jocelyn. M. and Schmid, Dawn. The Advanced Grammar Book (Workbook), Heinle & Heinle. (latest
ed.).
Wallace, Michael J. Study Skills in English. Cambridge University Press. (latest ed.).
106
CC2048
English for Workplace Communication (Science and Technology)
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Non-Science
English
42 hours of Seminar
10 hours of Workshop*
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject is designed to equip students with the written and spoken English language and
communication skills required in their future professions in science and technology disciplines. The main
focus is to develop in students the competence to select the appropriate language and strategies for
effective communication in daily workplace contexts.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic principles of workplace communication.
Write different workplace documents such as letters, memos and e-mails with appropriate content,
organization pattern, format, tone, style and sentence skills.
Identify the features of technology-specific discourse and apply principles of technical text structure in
technical and report writing.
Write effective job application documents.
Deliver effective presentations and communicate accurately and professionally in other oral
communication tasks such as telephoning and job interviews.
Indicative Contents
Principles of Workplace Communication
Communication process; Analysis of purpose, audience, information and context; Strategies for verbal
and nonverbal communication; Selection of communication channels; Writing process; Patterns of
organization (e.g. direct and indirect patterns).
Workplace Writing
Principles of technical text structure. Common writing functions in technology specific discourse.
Technical writing and reports (format, tone, style, text structure, etc). Workplace correspondence
related to technical professions (e.g. memors, letters).
Job Application
Specific verbal and non-verbal interactive strategies for effective job interviews, including the skills of
asking and answering interview questions. Job application letters and résumés.
Oral Communication in the Workplace
Presentations (e.g. difference between written documents and oral presentations, organisation of ideas,
107
delivery skills and teamwork); Telephone calls.
Seminars focus on the study of different communication strategies and language skills with practical
examples relevant to students’ potential career fields in science and technology. Different learning
activities such as writing practices, role-plays, case studies and group discussions are used.
In language laboratory sessions, audio-visual and on-line materials are used to reinforce students’ learning.
*The 10-hour workshops are designed to provide additional language support to help students with lower
English proficiency achieve the learning outcomes of the subject. Only students who have obtained a pass
in the Use of English examination at AS level or equivalent proficiency, which must be supported by an
official document, are not required to attend the workshops. In the workshop sessions, English practices
corresponding to the topics covered in the seminars will be conducted.
Assessment Approach
(a) Coursework (50%)
Students’ performance will be evaluated through both individual and group assessment tasks related to the
learning outcomes of the subject. Tasks may include individual written tasks (e.g. writing a letter, memo or
email), presentations, quizzes and tests.
(b) Examination (50%)
Students are required to attend an examination at the end of the semester.
*Students who are required to attend the workshops are required to complete the assigned tasks of the
workshop such as in-class exercises and a self-learning portfolio satisfactorily, or else the coursework
grade will be downgraded by one letter grade (e.g. C+ downgraded to C).
Indicative Readings
Mehlich, S. & Smith-Worthington, D. (1997). Technical writing for success: A school-to-work approach.
Ohio: South-Western Educational Publishing.
Finkelstein, L. (2008). Pocket book of technical writing for engineers and scientists. (3rd Ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill.
108
CC2053
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusions
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
CC2003 Quantitative Methods & CC2030 Mathematics
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with fundamental understanding of a variety of mathematical
concepts and techniques, and the ability to take a numerate approach to solve problems in real-life
situations. Studying this subject will also help develop students’ ability to think analytically, critically and
creatively, which prepares them for further studies and life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
Synthesize concepts and theories in calculus and linear algebra.
Identify and apply appropriate techniques for the solution of common mathematical problems.
Understand a variety of mathematical methods and use them to solve problems in real world situations.
Attain the mathematical knowledge and reasoning skills needed in their future studies.
Indicative Contents
Differentiation
Limits, continuity and derivatives; Rules of differentiation; Applications of differentiation, such as
optimization and approximation; Real-life applications of differentiation; Partial Derivatives, Total
Differentials, Applications.
Integration
Definite and indefinite integrals; Fundamental Theorem of Calculus; Techniques of integration; First
order differential equations; Applications.
Linear Algebra
Matrices and vectors; Matrix operations, rank and inverse; Systems of linear equations; Elementary
row operations; Determinant; Real-life applications of linear algebra.
Lectures introduce and explain the key mathematical concepts and illustrate their uses. Tutorials are
conducted for students to check their solutions to exercises, and to resolve problems with their
understanding of the topics.
109
Assessment Approach
Effective assessment tools will be adopted, including end-of-chapter problems, quizzes, assignments, tests,
and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and problem solving
skills.
Indicative Readings
Chung K.C., A Short Course in Calculus and Matrices, McGraw Hill Education. (latest ed.).
References
Hung K.F. & Pong G.T.Y., Foundation Mathematics, McGraw Hill Education. (latest ed.).
Thomas G.B., Finney R.L., Hass J.R. & Giordano F.R., Thomas’ Calculus, Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Anton H. & Rorres C., Elementary Linear Algebra: applications version, John Wiley & Sons. (latest ed.).
110
CC2101
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the basic concepts of financial accounting. It enables students to apply fundamental
financial theories, analyse financial statements and reports, and prepare basic financial statements.
Learning Outcomes
understand the assumptions, principles and conventions underlying financial accounting process
appreciate the role and importance of accounting information in assisting decision-making in a
business context
undertake the work involved in the recording, processing, summarizing and reporting phases of the
accounting cycle
apply relevant accounting concepts and principles in the preparation of financial statements
apply fundamental analytical tools for the interpretation of financial statements
Indicative Contents
Role and Principles of Financial Accounting and Reporting
Nature, principles and scope of financial accounting, management accounting, financial management
and auditing; Users of financial accounts and statements; Accounting Standards; Application of
information technology in processing financial and related information.
Financial Accounting Framework
Double-entry bookkeeping and accounting systems; Methods of classifying expenditure between
capital and revenue; Accounting treatment of fixed assets, current assets, liabilities, provisions and
reserves, and capital; Control accounts, bank reconciliation, suspense accounts, and correction of
errors; Preparation of journal, ledger accounts, trial balance and basic financial statements.
Additional Issues on Earnings
Extraordinary items, accounting changes, earnings per share, cash and stock dividends.
Preparation of Financial Statements
Preparation of Financial Statements for sole-traders, clubs or societies, partnerships, and limited
companies.
111
Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements
Need for analysis and interpretation of financial statements; Interpretation techniques including ratio
analysis and cash flow statement; Calculation and interpretation of basic financial ratios.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and applications of the accounting
principles.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of problem sets and case studies.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including individual assignments, in-class exercises, tests and
an examination designed to develop and assess students’ analytical and quantitative skills in solving
accounting problems.
Indicative Readings
Libby, Libby and Short. Financial Accounting. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Horngren C.T., W.T. Harrison and L.S. Bamber. Accounting. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Meigs, Williams, Haka and Bettner. Financial Accounting. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Warren C.S., J.M. Reeve and P.E. Fess. Financial Accounting., South-Western. (latest ed.).
Weygandt, J.J., D.E. Kieso and P.D. Kimmel. Financial Accounting. Wiley. (latest ed.).
Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards. HKICPA.
112
CC2102
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the key concepts and theories concerning the functions of management in a fast
changing environment. It provides a foundation for the more in-depth treatment in the management and
business subjects. Studying this subject will also help develop students’ critical thinking for their life-long
learning.
Learning Outcomes
understand the nature of managerial work
explain the key concepts and theories in managing organisations
identify and evaluate the functions of management
appreciate the importance of different management functions in managing organisations
Indicative Contents
Management and Management Theory
Nature of management, level of managers and the role of managers in an organisation; Evolution of
management theories and their implications for management of organisations in Hong Kong.
Business Environment
Factors affecting the performance of an organisation in a fast changing environment; General and
specific environmental factors; Implications of globalisation to Hong Kong business; Social
responsibility and managerial ethics of business.
Planning
Principles of planning; Role and method of strategic planning in organisations; Decision making in
business and industrial organisations.
Organising in Enterprise
Key elements of organisational structure and design; Identification of various forms of organisational
structure and their advantages and disadvantages.
Leading Function of Managers
Basic theories in motivation; Application of motivation theories in organisations; Leadership styles and
113
its implication to management.
Control Function in Organisation
Importance of control in organisations; Types of control and their application to organisation;
Importance of performance assessments.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and theories of the syllabus topics.
Occasional discussions will be conducted.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts and theories
taught in lectures and to apply them to the analysis of real-life business issues. The activities in tutorials
normally include student presentations, discussions of problems sets and case studies.
Assessment Approach
examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication
skills.
Indicative Readings
Robbins, S. P., Coulter, M., Management, Prentice-Hall International Editions (latest ed.).
References
Bateman, T. S., Snell, S. A., Management - Competing in the new era, McGraw-Hill/Irwin (latest ed.).
Jones, G. R., George J. M., Contemporary Management, McGraw-Hill/Irwin (latest ed.).
Schermerhorn, J. R., Management, John Wiley & Sons (latest ed.).
114
CC2104
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of economic
issues from a micro perspective. It provides the conceptual framework to analyse microeconomic
behaviour of economic agents, business decisions, and market efficiency. Studying the subject will also
help develop students’ critical thinking for their life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
understand the issues involved in the allocation of scarce resources for individual economic agents and
the economy as a whole.
apply relevant economic knowledge to conduct economic analysis of the behaviour of firms and
markets.
identify market failure and discuss the effectiveness of government economic policy upon the tradeoff
between efficiency and equity.
use concepts of market force interaction to analyse and predict changes in markets.
Indicative Contents
Scope of Microeconomic Analysis
Concept of scarcity, choice and opportunity cost; Nature of economics as a science for understanding
human behaviour.
Demand, Supply and the Price Mechanism
The law of demand; Elasticity of demand; The law of supply; Production and cost; Price control; The
functions of price and the market system.
Production and costs
Production function; Law of diminishing returns; Various measures of cost; Costs in the short run and
long run; Economies and diseconomies of scale.
Market Structure
Perfect competition; Monopoly; Monopolistic competition; Oligopoly; Profit maximization under
different market structure.
115
Efficiency of Markets
Efficiency and social interest; Market failure and government; Taxation; Externalities and property
rights; Public goods and common resources.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key economic concepts, with specific reference to
current economic issues wherever appropriate. Occasional group discussions will be conducted.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life economic issues. The activities in tutorials
include student presentations and discussions of problems sets and case studies.
Assessment Approach
skills.
Indicative Readings
Mankiw, N. Gregory, Principles of Microeconomics, Thomson South-Western (latest ed.).
References
Frank, Robert H, Microeconomics and Behaviour, Boston, Mass: McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
Miller, Roger LeRoy, Economics today – the micro view, Addison Wesley (latest ed.).
Parkin, Michael, Microeconomics, Addison Wesley (latest ed.).
Pindyck, P.S. and Rubinfeld, D.L., Microeconomics, Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
116
CC2110
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces students to different concepts and operations of food service organisations in
different business settings. It explains the purpose and operation of each functional component in a food
service organisation and how to make a food service business viable. Studying the subject will also help
the students to acquire professional, business, human resources, management, social and intellectual skills
and knowledge needed for food and beverage operations.
Learning Outcomes
On successfully completing this subject, students should be able to:
identify the major types of food service organisations and the needs of different market segments
analyse and evaluate the operation of food service organisations based on the systems approach
understand and apply the food service operational techniques and principles
operate and manage the needs, procedures and organisation of resources such as staff, materials,
facilities, equipment and costs in the management of a food and beverage operation
Indicative Contents
An Overview of Food Service Operations
Types of food service organisations and their classifications; Food service systems; Catering cycle and
its function in food service organisations.
Food Service Markets
Food and beverage consumers and the meal experience; Service standards; Service quality and
customer satisfaction.
Products and Service
Menu knowledge; Alcoholic and non-alcoholic beverages; Different styles of restaurant service.
Management of Food Service Operations
Staffing issues in restaurants; Purchasing and receiving; Production and service; Marketing for food
and beverages; Hygiene and safety; Revenue and cost control; Restaurant technology.
117
Lectures primarily focus on the delivery of food service operation knowledge. Occasional group
discussions and in-class exercises will be produced.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to explore further concepts, theories, and principles, to
make enquiries about lecture content and to apply the theories to real-life issues. The activities in tutorials
normally include presentations, discussions of problem sets and case studies, and video shows.
Site visits to different types of food service establishments together with talks given by speakers from the
industry will provide students with opportunities to observe operational activities in real-life business
settings.
Assessment Approach
an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication
skills.
Indicative Readings
Ninemeier, Jack D. and Hayes, David K. Restaurant Operations Management: Principles and Practices.
Pearson Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Dahmer, Sondra J. Restaurant Service Basics. Wiley. (latest ed.).
Mill, R.C. Restaurant Management: Customers, Operations, and Employees. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Rande, Wallace L. Introduction to Professional Foodservice. John Wiley. (latest ed.).
Walker, John R. and Lundberg, Donald E. The Restaurant: From Concept to Operation. Wiley. (latest ed.).
118
CC2126
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Introduction to Marketing
2
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the basic principles and concepts of Marketing. It equips students with foundation
knowledge and skills of marketing to analyse market situations. It exposes students to various areas of
marketing. The subject will also help develop students’ oral and written communication skills and critical
thinking.
Learning Outcomes
understand the role of marketing in today’s competitive and dynamic environment
establish the relationship between marketing planning and corporate planning
recognise the importance of various areas in marketing such as consumer behaviour, market research,
global marketing and ethical issues
analyse the marketing environment, and identify marketing opportunities, threats and other factors or
issues affecting marketing decisions
apply relevant marketing concepts, knowledge and theories to practical marketing situations
Indicative Contents
Role of marketing in an organisation
Role of marketing in the modern organisation; Evolution of marketing; Products and services
marketing; Relationship between marketing planning and corporate planning.
Marketing Environment – Macro-environment and Micro-environment
Economic, social, legal, competition, cultural and demographic factors; Relationship with suppliers,
intermediaries, customers and others factors such as resources.
Segmentation and Positioning
Importance of segmentation and positioning; Different segmentation bases and types of positioning
strategies.
Consumer Behaviour and Organisational Buying
Basic knowledge of consumer behaviour such as different needs and motivations, perceptions and
learning theories; Organisational buying process.
119
Market Research
Introduction to basic marketing research methodologies and applications.
Marketing Mix
Foundation concepts of Marketing Mix: Product, Price, Place and Promotion.
International Marketing Issues and impact of IT
Concepts, examples and issues related to international marketing; Applications of IT such as online
marketing.
Ethical issues
Marketing impact on individuals and society; Social responsibility and marketing ethics.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key marketing concepts, with reference to current
marketing issues or examples wherever appropriate.
Tutorial sessions provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts
taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life marketing situations. The activities in
tutorials normally include group work, student presentations and discussions of problems sets and case
studies.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations and written reports, individual
assignments, in-class exercises, tests and examination designed to assess the expected outcomes.
Indicative Readings
Kerin, R. A, Hartley S.W., and Rudelius W. Marketing: The Core.McGraw Hill/Irwin. (latest ed.).
Kotler Armstrong. Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Etzel M.J., Walker B.J. and Stanton W.J. Marketing. McGraw Hill/Irwin. (latest ed.).
Lamb Hair McDaniel. Marketing. Thomson, South-Western. (latest ed.).
William D. Perreault & E. Jerome McCarthy. Essentials of Marketing. McGraw Hill Irwin (latest ed.).
120
中文商務傳意
中文商務傳意 Chinese for Business Communication
CC2131
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
修讀條件
不能同時修讀的科目
評估方法
2
3
非科學
中文 ﹝粵語講授；中文書寫﹞
無
CC2113 Chinese for Business Executives 商務行政中文
50%課堂習作
50%期終考試
課程目標
透
授
尤注培員口語表達專商政
技巧
本課程
過課堂講
力。課程
重
中文的各種
全
、課堂練習、分組習作等方式，訓練學生運用中文傳
訓學
及
業
務行
中文寫作的能力，
業、行
政訊息
專商
的能
業
務
。
學習成果
功
應
明商
政
類
商政
例格
商
功適
商
口語
商溝
商政
學生成
播商
面地訓練學生掌握
完成本科目，
白
務行
瞭解
務行
運用中文
能：
中文的定義和種
中文的體
及
。
式。
務實用文的知識，成
掌握及運用
務中文的
以中文進行
務
撰寫
合各行業的中文實用文的文
類
。
知識。
通及撰寫
務行
文書。
課程內容
中文商務實用文的定義
紹商
類應範圍紹港台三
商
例語
概括
商信函包括電子郵件真商廣
政管包括公司章
議記錄工總
商調決策
包括商品/企説明
市場調查
商務信函
紹商信函
類別
原則例如
信電子郵件真
内包括
查詢訂貨退貨議價邀請慶賀
商務行政管理文書
紹類商政管
處例如公司章聘請
聘授權委托商請示
工總
介
中文
及用
行
務實用文的發展歷史、定義、種
的異同，
理（
書、
程、會
、
作
用
務
結等），
，介
中
地中文
（
，傳
務
研
業實用文體
），
文書（
務
告，
業
報告等）。
介
介
及
本課程主要教學內容：
務
的各種
、
、
各
務行
報告、
作
、
及各自寫作
、
理文書
、
，
傳統書
、
和傳
的方式，
容
等。
理，
程、
結等。
121
書與解
書、
書、
務
與
商務會議及談判文書
紹議紀錄商談判案/紀
契約及法律檔
紹
陸檔
契勞工檔例
廣告與招商
紹港台三
廣稿
案商品/企説明招標
商務調研決策文書
紹市場調查
預
介
會
介
、
中國大
，
法律
法律
介
中
方
、
務
方
的撰寫要點及
的要
業
注
向協議商
務合作意
意的事
項
書、
書及
，中國與
台灣
務合同的撰寫方法。
中文法律
檔
撰寫的異同，
土屋
地
。
地撰寫
介
商
要、
告文
書、
報告、
口語廣
投標
的異同，撰寫
書與
廣
告的要點，
告文書的
特色
；介
紹公策劃
關
書等的寫作。
測報告、可行
性
企經營計劃價格案
研究報告、
業
、
方
等的體
例
及撰寫方
法。
口語：
口語：商務/
商務/行政演講與談判
紹演辤
紹商 / 政演技巧如何設計劃釋決闡立場
如何商談判辯
介
講
進行
的寫作，介
務
、
教學方法
是
本課程
務行
活
理論與實際並重，
透
用
務會面、
過大
分
（
。
評估方法，學生
等，
指定課本
蔡富春編
主
：《中國
定
，解
量案析佳病例深
信
用中文、強化自
評估方法
採持續
須
如商
談判另期
告，
，
定，
述
商應
務
有
個
撰寫
平
期末
作及
時習作，
中測驗及
）
化課堂所教知識，並
如廣演辭
綜檢
告、
考試，
合
講
等，
也須
完成
，
：
：《漢
法
常識
，
：《
的
陳
生
等
術
，
：《國際
：《現代
導修
平
手冊》香港經濟日出版 (香港)出版最新版
用文書
訓練
陳
鼓勵
測學生掌握本課程的水
，
：
報
社
，
參考書
董兆傑口語》香港語出版最新版
張斌語語修辭》香港香港育公司最新版
建民說話藝》香港語出版最新版
永［］編著
商函電
》香港華語出版最新版
李錦昌編著
商
：《
等；介
紹
論等。
討論及小組報告，進一步
本課程
講的
文
：
務
業傳意大
社，
。
：
教
文
社，
與合同
，
圖書
，
：
務
122
，
。
。
：
書
教學
有限
社，
，
。
。
學生參與
課堂小組報
。
。
黎
李軍著商語言》台灣台灣商印館股份公司最新版
開 2 紀商
信手冊》香港香港城市出版最新版
盧丹懷［］
港應
崔凱王琰編著商
》北京
言出版最新版
運漢，
白雲
：《 1 世
等
文
：《
，
業
用中文書
：《中
：《
，
：
務
寫作
用文傳意大
，
，
務文書寫作一本通
書
有限
：
：
，
123
務
大學
書
：中國
，
社，
有限
實
。
社，
。
，
。
。
CC2201
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusion
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial / Laboratory
Nil
CC2127 Principles of Business Programming
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with the practical skills of computer programming in the
context of problem solving. It provides students with an understanding of the structure of a highlevel programming language, and of the design and analysis process of programming. It also
provides students with some practical experiences of writing structured programs.
Learning Outcomes
write programs for solving practical problems in the business environment
recognise the importance of documentation in software development
further develop their analytical skills and problem solving skills in other areas
enhance critical and creative thinking competence
Indicative Contents
Fundamentals of Programming
Syntax; Semantics; Compilation; Linking; Execution.
Programming Approaches
Functional programming; Procedural programming; Structural programming; Object-oriented
programming.
Data Types
String; Numerical data; Boolean; Operators; Literals.
Input and Output
Standard input/output; Files.
Concepts and Technique of Control
Sequencing; Alternation; Repetition; Recursion.
124
Practical Programming
Programming in a selected high-level language e.g. C, C++ or Java.
Theories and basic concepts will be delivered during the lectures. In the tutorials and laboratory
sessions, students will be required to design and develop software solutions to practical problems
by applying the general principles learned in the lectures.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including programming projects, tests and an
examination designed to develop and assess skills of writing programs to solve practical problems
and of writing documentation.
Indicative Reading
Wu, T. C. An Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming with Java. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Adams, J. and Nyhoff, L. C++: An Introduction to Computing. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Kelley, A. and Pohl, I. C by Dissection: The Essentials of C Programming. Addison Wesley.
(latest ed.).
References
Barnes, D. and Kolling, M. Objects first with Java: a practical introduction using BlueJ. Prentice
Hall. (latest ed.).
Charatan, Q. and Kans, A. Java: the First Semester. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. Java: How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C++: How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Friedman, F. L. and Koffman, E. B. Problem Sovling, Abstraction, and Design using C++.
Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Savitch, W. Problem Solving with C++. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C: How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Hanly, J. R. and Koffman, E. B. Problem Solving and Program Design in C. Addison Wesley.
(latest ed.).
125
CC2202
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Exclusion
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC3302 Computer Systems Principles
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with the conceptual framework and essential knowledge in computer
system architectures and logic design for them to understand and analyze the functions and organizations
of modern digital computers. The subject also develops students with learning experience in designing and
developing solutions and applications for modern digital computer systems. In addition, studying this
subject will help develop students’ critical and creative thinking in the design and development of the
hardware-software interface.
Learning Outcomes
demonstrate understanding of the basic principles of organizations and operations of digital computers
conduct analysis of the functions and organizations of modern digital computers so as to propose
appropriate technical solutions and applications related to the problems of computer architectures
evaluate the technical issues of digital computer systems including arithmetic logic unit, control unit,
communication with peripheral devices and interrupt handling
design and develop solutions related to digital computer systems
recognize and identify the developmental nature of modern technology related to digital computers
show enhanced analytical and problem-solving skills
Indicative Contents
Computer System Components
Interconnection structures and bus interconnections; Memory system overview; Semiconductor and
cache memory; External devices; Input/Output (I/O) modules; Programmed and interrupt I/O; Direct
memory access (DMA) and I/O channels.
Central Processing Unit
Boolean algebra and gate networks; Arithmetic and logic unit (ALU).
Data Representation and Arithmetic
Integer representation and arithmetic; Floating-point and floating-point arithmetic.
Machine Instructions
Machine instruction characteristics and types; Assembly language; Memory addressing modes;
126
Register organization; Instruction format; Instruction cycle and instruction pipelining; Reduced
instruction set computer (RISC) architecture.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts in computer system architectures, with
specific reference to current development in computer system architectures wherever appropriate. Students
are expected to obtain sufficient professionally-specific concepts, skills and knowledge on computer
system architectures in lectures. Occasional group discussions might be arranged to enhance students’
inter-personal and communication skills.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of computer system architecture issues. The activities in
tutorials normally include discussions of problem sets and solutions.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and an examination designed to
develop and assess students’ understanding of principles of computer system architectures, evaluate
students’ critical and analytical ability as well as problem-solving skills in the design of computer system
components.
Indicative Reading
Stallings, W. Computer Organization and Architecture: Designing for Performance. Prentice Hall. (latest
ed.).
References
Carpinelli, J. D. Computer Systems Organization and Architecture. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Hamacher, Vranesic, and Zaky. Computer Organization. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Williams, R. Computer Systems Architecture: A Networking Approach. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
127
CC2203
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with concepts and knowledge in data structures and algorithms for
them to understand and analyze the space/time efficiency of an algorithm, to provide technical solutions for
algorithm design problems, to evaluate the appropriate data structures for programming problems, and to
appreciate the complexity and computability of algorithms. The subject also develops students’ learning
experience in designing and developing solutions and applications for algorithm design problems. In
addition, studying this subject will help develop students’ critical and creative thinking through the design,
development and application of data structures and design of algorithms.
Learning Outcomes
evaluate the technical issues of searching algorithms for the design and development of searching
techniques in a computer program
conduct analysis of sorting algorithms so as to implement sorting techniques in the design of
algorithms
investigate a variety of data structures in order to effectively apply them in the design of algorithms
carry out performance analysis of algorithms using the space and time complexity
think critically and creatively in the design of algorithms and effectively apply programming
techniques in computer program development
recognize the potential problems of the algorithms
Indicative Contents
Algorithm and Analysis
Correctness and efficiency of algorithms; Computational complexity - time and space bounds; Bestcase, average-case and worst-case analysis.
Data Structures
Linked list; Stack; Queue; Binary tree; Balanced tree; Tree traversal; Set priority queue.
Sorting Algorithms
Bubble Sort; Insertion Sort; Selection Sort; Quicksort; Mergesort; Heapsort.
Searching Algorithms
Sequential Search; Binary Search; Tree Search; Hashing.
128
Algorithm Design Methods
Divide-and-Conquer; Greedy Methods; Heuristics.
Intractability
P, NP, and NP-Complete Problems.
During lectures, fundamental theories and basic concepts of data structures and algorithms will be
introduced in order to strengthen students’ competence in evaluation, analysis, investigation, design,
development and application of data structures and algorithms. Related problems may also be given to
students so as to enhance their understanding and analytical skills.
In the tutorials, students are required to apply the general principles learned in lectures to tackle practical
problems and present the solutions.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and an examination. They are
designed to assess students’ understanding of concepts of data structures and algorithms, critical and
creative thinking, problem-solving and analytical skills.
Indicative Reading
Levitin, A. V. Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Sahni, S. Data Structures, Algorithms, and Applications in Java. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Baase, S. and Van Gelder, A. Computer Algorithms: Introduction to Design and Analysis. Addison
Wesley. (latest ed.).
Cormen, T. H. Introduction to Algorithms. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Drozdek, A. Data Structures and Algorithms in Java. Course Technology. (latest ed.).
Sedgewick, R. Bundle of Algorithms in Java, Parts 1-5: Fundamentals, Data Structures, Sorting,
Searching, and Graph Algorithms. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Shaffer, C. A. Practical Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms, Java Edition. Prentice Hall.
(latest ed.).
129
CC2204
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to equip students with fundamental ideas of discrete mathematics, such as formal
mathematical reasoning techniques, basic counting techniques and their applications; and to help students
to attain the mathematical knowledge and reasoning skills required in the field of computer science.
Learning Outcomes
grasp the basic concepts of discrete mathematics
acquire enough mathematical knowledge and reasoning skills to apply various discrete mathematical
techniques to solve problems in computer science applications
think critically and creatively to provide solutions to the discrete mathematics related problems
Indicative Contents
Logic and Proofs
Propositions; Conditional Propositions and Logical Equivalence; Quantifiers; Proofs; Resolutions
Proofs; Mathematical Induction.
Set, Relations and Functions
Sets; Sequences and Strings; Number Systems; Relations; Equivalence Relations; Functions.
Counting Methods
Basic Principles; Permutations and Combinations; Algorithms for Generating Permutations and
Combinations; Introduction to Discrete Probability; Discrete Probability Theory; Generalized
Permutations and Combinations; Binomial Coefficients and Combinatorial Identities.
Recurrence Relations
Solving Recurrence Relations; Applications to the Analysis of Algorithms.
Graph
Paths and Cycles; Hamiltonian Cycles and the Travelling Salesperson Problem; A Shortest-Path
Algorithm; Representation of Graphs; Isomorphisms of Graphs; Planar Graphs; Instant Insanity.
130
Trees
Terminology and Characterizations of Trees; Spanning Trees; Minimal Spanning Trees; Binary Trees;
Tree Traversals; Decision Trees and the Minimum Time for Sorting; Isomorphisms of Trees; Game
Trees.
Concepts will be taught mainly through lectures and tutorials in order to develop students’ discrete
mathematical techniques and reasoning skills. Exercises will be carried out in tutorials to illustrate and
reinforce the concepts, techniques and skills in discrete mathematics.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be designed, including tutorial exercises, programming assignments,
tests and an examination, to develop and assess critical and creative thinking as well as mathematical
reasoning and problem solving skills.
Indicative Reading
Johnsonbaugh, R. Discrete Mathematics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Ross, K. A. and Wright, C. R. B. Discrete Mathematics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Simpson A. Discrete Mathematics by Example. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
131
CC2205
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
General Physics
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the fundamental concepts on physics as the basic rules of nature. It provides
sufficient information for students to continue physics instruction at college level. Throughout the course,
students will have a general understanding of theories and real-life applications in physics. They will
become aware of the importance of physical phenomena as part of their daily lives.
Learning Outcomes
appreciate and discuss the topics related to physical science
use physical terms and principles in their field of study
generalize and understand the fundamental principles of physics
explain and apply physical properties in real-life examples
show enhanced analytical and critical thinking skills in scientific description
Indicative Contents
Introduction to Physics
Systems of measurement; Understanding from measurement; The nature of science; Physics versus
Mathematics; Uncertainty and Significant Figures.
Motion and Patterns of Motion
Describing and measuring motion; Forces; One-dimensional motion; Falling objects; Twodimensional motion; Newton’s laws, Momentum; Circular motion; Gravitation; Mass and Weight;
Free-Body Diagrams.
Energy
Work; Potential energy; Kinetic energy; Energy flow and conversion; Heat and Temperature; Kinetic
molecular theory; Phase changes; Thermodynamics; Temperature Scales; Thermal Expansion;
Quantity of Heat; Mechanisms of Heat Transfer.
Wave Motions, Sound and Light
Forces and elastic material; Waves, Sound, Energy and Sound; Sources of sounds; Quantum Physics:
Photons; Quantum Optics; Photons and Probability; Light Waves; Properties of Light (Reflection,
Refraction, Dispersion, Diffraction, Interference).
132
Equilibrium and Oscillations
Conditions for Equilibrium; Rigid-Body Equilibrium Problems; Stress; Strain and Elastic Moduli;
Newton's Law of Gravitation; Gravitational Potential Energy; Motion of Satellites; Oscillations;
Simple Harmonic Motion; Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion; The Simple and Physical Pendulums;
Damped Oscillations; Forced Oscillations and Resonance.
Static Electricity and Lightning; Electric charge; Electric current; Magnetism; Electromagnetism;
Electromagnetic induction; Types of Current; Electromagnetism and its applications; Lorentz Force
Law.
The course is composed of three parts: lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions. Lectures provide theorybased teaching on the topics being covered. Examples and references will be given to students whenever
appropriate. Tutorials provide students with opportunities to broaden, enlighten and reinforce the general
knowledge obtained in the lectures. Students will be involved in problem based activities, classroom
feedback, case studies, presentations, and discussions in the tutorial. Laboratory sessions allow students to
understand, verify, and apply knowledge developed from lectures.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including presentations, classroom feedback, laboratory reports, group
discussion, tests and an examination will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical and
Indicative Readings
D. Halliday, R. Resnick, J. Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, 6th edition, John Wiley, (latest Ed).
References
Bill Tillery & William C. Brown, Physical Science, 7th edition, McGraw-Hill, (latest Ed).
Douglas C. Giancoli Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics, Upper Saddle River, N.J.:
Prentice Hall (latest edition).
133
CC2302
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject provides students with the basic principles of mathematics used in various
engineering disciplines. Studying the subject will help students to develop their analytical and
problem solving skills and apply appropriate mathematical techniques to solve simple engineering
problems.
Learning Outcomes
describe the fundamentals and principles of engineering mathematics
search for useful information in solving problems
apply the appropriate mathematical methods to solve mathematical problems
apply mathematical reasoning to model, analyse and solve problems in engineering
develop problem solving abilities
Indicative Contents
Complex Numbers
Review on Complex numbers.
Series
Taylor’s theorem of a single variable; Infinite series; Power series; Fourier series.
Functions of Several Variables
Partial differentiation; Maxima and minima; Lagrange multiplier; Taylor's theorem.
Ordinary Differential Equations
First and second order linear ordinary differential equations; Laplace transforms; Convolution
theorem, Fourier transforms.
Linear Algebra
Review on matrices and determinants; Vector algebra and differential calculus; Vector spaces;
Eigenvalues and eigenvectors; Normalization and orthogonality.
134
The subject will be delivered by using mathematics as a tool to solve engineering problems. The
exercises given to students in tutorials will be directly related to problems that engineers will be
required to solve when they discharge their duties.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignment, case studies, tests and an
examination designed to develop and assess their theoretical and analytical skills.
Indicative Reading
Chan, C.K., Chan, C.W. and Hung, K.F. Basic Engineering Mathematics. McGraw Hill. (latest
ed.).
References
Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. J Wiley. (latest ed.).
Jeffrey, A. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. Harcourt/Academic Press. (latest ed.).
Veerarajan, T. Engineering Mathematics. T McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
135
CC2305
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the fundamental concepts and techniques of electrical and electronic circuit
analysis to students. It develops students’ skills in analyzing the basic direct-current and alternating-current
circuits and applying the circuits. In addition, it helps students to understand the principles and applications
of diode circuits and simple logic circuits.
Learning Outcomes
describe and explain the principles of electrical and electronic engineering
apply the techniques to solve simple problems of electrical and electronic circuits
analyse simple diode circuits and logic gate circuits with single function
develop systematic problem solving abilities by applying electrical and electronic principles
carry out independent investigation in an improvised environment
Indicative Contents
Direct Current Circuits
Introduction to electric circuits; Potential and potential difference; Charge and flow of charge;
Voltage and current as two basic variables; Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws; Loop and
nodal analysis; Thevenin and Norton theorems; Resistance; Independent and dependent
sources; Simple circuit styles: voltage divider, current divider, series and parallel circuits;
Power dissipation; Source loading and maximum power transfer.
Alternating-Current Circuits
Average and RMS values; Phasors (rotating vectors); Steady-state analysis of circuits driven
by single fixed frequency sinusoidal sources; Impedance and admittance; Phasor diagrams for
simple circuits; Systematic complex number analysis; Real and reactive power; Power factor;
Three-phase circuits; Measuring three-phase power by two-wattmeter method.
136
Capacitance, Inductance and First Order Transients
Constitutive relations of capacitor and inductor; Brief introduction to electric and magnetic
fields; Introduction to time-varying circuits; Simple RC and LC circuits; Important concept of
independent state variables; First-order differential equation and transient analysis; Time
domain solution and transient behaviour of first order circuits; Time constant.
Mutual Inductance and Transformer
Basic coupled inductance equation; Concept of ideal transformer; Dot convention; Physical
transformer as ideal transformer with leakage and magnetizing inductances; Applications in
galvanic isolation and voltage/current level conversion.
Basic Diode Circuits
I-V characteristics of general nonlinear components; Diode as specific case; DC solution
based on load line construction; Rectifier circuits, clipping and clamping circuits.
Digital System Basics
Binary number system and arithmetic; Conversion between binary and decimal numbers; Two
complement; Boolean algebra; Basic logic gates; Flip-flops; Karnaugh maps; Don’t care
condition; Combinational logic circuit designs and modules.
Instrumentation and Measurement
Choice of measurement method; Analogue and digital instrumentals; Bridges; Measurement
uncertainties.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of major electrical and electronic theorems and
mathematics techniques used in solving simple circuit problems. In addition, the design methods of the
electrical, amplifier and digital circuits are discussed in the lectures.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to practice their understanding of the concepts taught in
lectures through the use of the electrical and electronic circuit problems in which the circuits are composed
of resistors, capacitors, inductors, diodes, transistors, op-amps, logic gates and electrical motors. In
addition, some commonly used software in electrical and electronic engineering is introduced in the
tutorials. Laboratories reinforce students’ concepts and knowledge learnt in lectures through experiments.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, group projects, tests and an examination
designed to develop and assess the students’ understanding on the principles and problem solving
techniques in electrical and electronic engineering and the student’s capabilities on circuit design.
Indicative Reading
Rizzoni G. Principles and Applications of Electrical Engineering. Mcgraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Boylestad, R.L. and Nashelsky, L. Introduction to Electricity, Electronics, and Electromagnetics. Prentice
Hall. (latest ed.).
137
Floyd, T.L. Electronics Fundamentals: Circuits, Devices and Applications. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Hughes, E. Electrical and Electronic Technology. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Kerns, D. V. and Irwin, J. D. Essentials of Electrical and Computer Engineering. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Roadstrum, W.H. and Wolaver, D.H. Electrical Engineering for All Engineers. Wiley. (latest ed.).
Hayt, W. H., Kemmerly, J. E. and Durbin, S. M. Engineering Circuit Analysis. New York: McGraw Hill.
(latest ed.)
Tse, C. K. Linear Circuit Analysis. London: Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.)
Neamen, D. A. Microelectronics: Circuit Analysis and Design. Boston: McGraw Hill (latest ed.)
138
CC2307
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Engineering Science
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
10 hours of Tutorial / Case Study
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject enables students to establish extensive knowledge of the atomic structure of matters
and to appraise the various properties of pure substances, states, phase change and behaviour of
ideal gas. In addition, it helps students to understand the forms of energy and their conversion and
apply the law of conservations of mass and energy to various kinds of heat engine and heat pump
problems. Furthermore, studying this subject can help students to identify the relationship between
material properties and manufacturing processes in manufacturing systems with the considerations
of the green design and environmental issues.
Learning Outcomes
identify and reflect critically on the basic atomic structures of matters, such as bonding
structures, wave-particle duality and crystalline structures, in relation to the properties of
materials
recognise the basic properties of materials, such as mechanical, electrical and optical
properties, and know how to apply these properties in modern engineering practices
theoretically
analyse a basic manufacturing system and recognise the basic inputs and outputs of the system
and their importance when designing products for the consumer market
appraise the engineering materials and the basic engineering processes used in manufacturing
systems and select those that are with appropriate time, quality, cost considerations, green
design and environmental issues
acquire the fundamental knowledge and properties in thermodynamic such as the relations
among temperature, pressure and density, the enthalpy and heat transfer
cope with the simple thermodynamic problems, such as heat transfer, steady-flow system and
heat engine, by applying laws of conversion and laws of thermodynamic
apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate
possible outcomes
139
Indicative Contents
Materials Science and Engineering
Atomic Structure and Structure of Crystalline Solids: Atomic structure; Bonding forces and
energies, Primary interatomic bonds and secondary bonding; Crystal structures and energy
levels; Introduction to phase diagram.
Electrical and Optical Properties of Materials: Conductors and insulators; Semi-conductor
materials; N-type and P-type semiconductors; P/N junction; Light emitting diode (LED) and
optical detectors; Laser, Light propagation in optical fibers.
Mechanical Properties of Materials: Concept of stress and strain; Stress-strain behaviour;
Elastic properties of materials; Tensile properties; Elastic recovery after plastic deformation;
Hardness; Stress concentration; Design and safety factors; Fracture and fatigue.
Dislocations and Strengthening Mechanism: Characteristics of dislocations; Mechanism of
strengthening in metals; Grain size reduction; Solid solution strengthening; Strain hardening;
Precipitation hardening.
Manufacturing Technology of Materials: Role of materials in manufacturing; Relationship
between manufacturing processes and material properties; Process capability.
Applications and Selection of Engineering Materials: Metallic materials; Ferrous and nonferrous alloys; Ceramics; Polymers; Thermoplastics and thermosets; Composite materials.
Process Selection and Ecological Design: Cost consideration in materials selection; Selection
of materials and manufacturing processes; Green manufacturing and environmentally
conscious design.
Energy Utilization
Energy Trends, Conversion and Engineering: World consumption of primary energy sources;
Technologies and issues in the conversion of different sources of energy.
Basic Concepts and Laws of Energy Conversion: Thermodynamic states, variables and
systems; Thermodynamic properties of water; Work, heat, and internal energy; Conservation
of mass and energy; Reversibility of energy exchange; Energy balance for a flow.
Basic Cycles and Common Thermal Systems: Rankine cycle and the steam engine;
Refrigeration and heat pump; Ideal gas basics; Otto cycle and the internal combustion engine;
Brayton cycle and the gas turbine.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of major theorems, principles, laws and
mathematical techniques. In addition, the modern engineering practices are discussed in the
lectures.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to practice and discuss their understanding of the
concepts taught in lectures through the use of the engineering questions and case studies. In
addition, multimedia resources will be used to introduce the various engineering practices to
students. Laboratory classes reinforce students’ concepts and knowledge learnt in lectures through
experiments.
140
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, group projects, tests and an
examination designed to develop and assess the students’ knowledge and problem solving
techniques in various engineering fields, such as atomic structures, material properties,
manufacturing systems and thermodynamics.
Indicative Reading
Callister, W. D. Material Science and Engineering – An Introduction. Wiley. (latest ed.)
Çengel, Y. A. and Turner, R. H. Fundamentals of Thermal-fluid Sciences. McGraw Hill. (latest
ed.)
References
Bolton, W. Engineering Science. Newnes. Oxford. (latest ed.).
Eastop, T. D. and McConkey A. Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering. Longman Group UK.
(Latest ed.)
Sonntag, Borgnakke and Wylen, Fundamentals of Thermodynamics. Wiley and Sons. (latest ed.)
Rogers, G and Mayhew, Y. Engineering Thermodynamics, Work & Heat Transfer. John Wiley &
Sons. New York. (latest ed.)
Waterman, N. A. and Ashby, M. F. The materials selector on CD-ROM [interactive multimedia].
Chapman & Hall. (latest ed.)
Edwards, L. and Endean M. Manufacturing with Materials. Milton Keynes. (latest ed.)
141
CC2404
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with the fundamentals of physics and the knowledge of the working principles
of some major instruments used in healthcare. Based on a thorough understanding of concepts and
principles as well as their application in instrumentation in healthcare, students will be able to appraise the
usefulness and limitations of the instruments and develop an awareness of the safety issues and hazard
controls when using them.
Learning Outcomes
identify the fundamental concepts of heat, electricity, magnetism, electromagnetic radiation and sound
waves
apply the working principles of some major instruments used in healthcare
appraise the usefulness and limitations of the instruments used in healthcare
discuss the safety aspects and hazard controls in using some of the healthcare instruments
show enhanced professionalism in terms of care and sense of responsibility
Indicative Contents
Heat and Temperature
Temperature scales and humidity; Types of temperature sensors; Boiling and melting; Thermal
expansion. Heat conduction, convection and radiation.
Electrostatic and electricity; Magnetism and electromagnets; Motion of charged particles in electric
and magnetic fields; Electric currents and their usage; Electrical appliance safety precautions and
standards; Gas discharge and plasma; Magnetic therapy.
Electromagnetic Waves
The spectrum and characteristics of electromagnetic wave; Ultraviolet (UV) index and protection; How
sunburns and sun tans work. Visible light (VIS) and lasers; Principle and properties of laser; Laser
classifications and safety standard; Laser therapy and laser dermatology; Source of infrared radiation
(IR); IR therapy; Microwave and x-ray applications.
Acoustic and Ultrasound
142
Sound waves; Frequency and pitch; Sound intensity and loudness; Characteristics of ultrasound;
Generation and detection of ultrasound; Ultrasound in medical imaging.
Instruments / Equipment
Thermometer and hygrometer; Diathermy unit; Nebulizer for aerosol therapy; Aspirator; Pulse
oximeters; Vaporizer/steamer; Sphygmomanometers; Stethoscopes; Autoclaves and ultrasonic
cleaners; Electrocautery; Infrared noncontact thermometer; IR-VIS-UV laser systems; UV sterilizer;
Ultrasound imaging and therapy units.
This course will introduce the fundamentals of heat, electricity, magnetism, electromagnetic radiation and
sound waves. Lectures will emphasize the concepts and applications of the physical phenomena involved.
Key issues, such as the limitations and hazards of using various instruments will be addressed. Preventive
measures for minimizing the hazard will be discussed. Tutorials will focus on problem solving and case
studying. Practical issues related to instrumentation in health care will be emphasized. Through these
learning activities, students can identify the fundamental concepts related to physics and instrumentation
and apply the related working principles. In addition, they are developed to appraise the usefulness and
limitations of the instruments used in healthcare areas.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including regular assignments and quizzes, a mid-term test and
an examination. They are designed to develop and assess students’ performance in the identification of the
concepts and application of working principles involving the instruments used in health care areas.
Indicative Readings
Griffiths, W. T. The Physics of Everyday Phenomena. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Jones, E.R. and Childers, R. L. Contemporary College Physics. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Urone, P. College Physics. Thomson Learning. (latest ed.).
143
CC2406
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Calculus
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject is to provide students with the basic skills of calculus, which is the core of many mathematical
disciplines such as optimization, financial mathematics, statistics, simulation etc. The subject introduces
students to the fundamental concepts and skills of calculus. The emphasis will be on the basic
understanding of the concepts, techniques and applications.
Learning Outcomes
discuss the concepts of limit of a sequence, limit of a function and continuity
develop the understanding of derivatives of a function and its geometric meaning, and the ability to
compute derivatives using various rules of differentiation
apply differential calculus to calculate rates of change, locate maximum, minimum and points of
inflexion, approximate D y by differential and to sketch the graph of a given function
master the concepts of indefinite integrals as anti-derivatives and definite integrals as limit of sums and
the fundamental theorem of calculus and other integration theorems
evaluate indefinite integrals using techniques such as change of variables, integration by parts and
partial fraction decomposition
solve simple differential equations of first and second order
organize and articulate in a variety of ways that are clear and understandable
Indicative Contents
Limits and Continuity
Limit of a function, evaluation of limits, continuity.
Differentiation
Derivative of a function, rules of differentiation, higher derivatives, L'Hôpital's rule.
Applications of Differentiation
Maximum and minimum, rates of change, differentials, linear approximations, increasing and
decreasing functions, curve sketching.
Integration
Integrals, techniques of integration, applications of integration.
144
Ordinary Differential Equations
First order equations, second order linear equations with constant coefficients.
The lectures aim to provide the students with an integrated knowledge required for the understanding of the
basic mathematical concepts and techniques. To develop students' ability for logical thinking, effective
communication and ability to apply the theory they learn in lectures, tutorial and presentation sessions will
be held.
Assessment Approach
The continuous assessment is comprised of homework assignments, in-class quizzes and tests. The
assignments are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their progress. The end-of-semester
examination is used to assess the knowledge acquired by the students and their ability to apply and extend
such knowledge.
Indicative Reading
Edwards, C.H. and Penney, D.E. Elementary Differential Equations. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
Thomas, G. and Finney, R. Calculus and Analytic Geometry. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Reference
Adams, R. Single Variable Calculus. Pearson Education. (latest ed.).
145
CC2417
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Human Biology I
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial / Virtual Laboratory
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject enables the students to acquire a basic level of understanding of the body as an integrated
entity from cellular level to whole body and to appreciate the inter-relationships between body systems as a
whole. The study of Human Biology contributes to the students’ acquisition of a general basis for further
study in areas related to human biology.
Learning Outcomes
appreciate and discuss the topics related to human biological science
use appropriate terms to describe the human body, cell structure, and the basic metabolic processes of
the organ systems studied
identify and explain the intricate complexities of structure and function in the human body
analyze the interrelationships between organ systems and physiological processes
critically assess and evaluate mechanisms that maintain homeostasis in biological systems
show enhanced analytical and critical thinking skills
Indicative Contents
Organization of the Human Body
Structure and function of the cell: organelles, functions of the cells
Histology: The study of tissues, cellular organization
Gross anatomy of organ systems
Support and Movement
Integumentary system: structure and functions of hair, skin, nails
Skeletal system: structures and functions of bones
Muscular system: functions and support of muscle, articulation and movement
Integration and control systems
Nervous system: structures and types of neurons, action potential, signal transduction,
neurotransmitters, reflex, structure of different brain parts, cognitive functions of the cerebrum
Endocrine system: hormones and their major functions, control pathway, different secretion glands
146
Lectures focus on the introduction of the anatomy followed by elaboration of the key concepts and the
underlying principles on physiology. Clinical applications related to the basic human biology knowledge
will be discussed during lectures to enhance students’ acquisition of basic concepts and their relevant
applications.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to engage in more active learning. Multimedia aid such as
interactive videos, CD-ROMs, and online quizzes are adopted to reinforce and consolidate materials from
the lectures. The virtual laboratory sessions are designed to supplement the theoretical content taught in
lectures. These learning activities are to develop students’ abilities in identifying the relationship between
structure and physiology, and in analysing the mechanism in maintaining homeostasis.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools may be used, including objective questions, case studies, group presentations,
written reports, tests and examinations designed to evaluate students’ level of comprehension ; analysis
and abilities to put theories into application.
Indicative Readings
Marieb, E.N. Human Anatomy and Physiology. San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings. (latest ed.).
Martini, F.H. Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology. San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings. (latest ed.).
Tortora, G.J. and Grabowski, S.R. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. New York: John Wiley and
Sons. (latest ed.).
Waugh, A., et al. Anatomy and Physiology in Health and Illness. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. (latest
ed.).
147
CC2418
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Human Biology II
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial / Virtual Laboratory
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject continues with Human Biology I that enables the students to acquire a basic level of
understanding of the body as an integrated entity from the molecules to the whole body, and to appreciate
the inter-relationships between body systems as a whole. The study of Human Biology contributes to the
students’ acquisition of a general basis for further study in areas related to human biology.
Learning Outcomes
appreciate and discuss the topics related to human biological science
use appropriate terms to describe the human body, the chemistry of life, cell structure, and the basic
metabolic processes of the organ systems studied
identify and explain the intricate complexities of structure and function in the human body
analyze the interrelationships between organ systems and physiological processes
critically assess and evaluate systems that maintain homeostasis in biological systems
Indicative Contents
Regulation and Maintenance
Cardiovascular system: heart, blood vessels, blood cells, systematic circulation, blood pressure,
control of heart beat and blood pressure, electrocardiogram
Lymphatic system and immunity: immune cells and lymphatic system, pathway of immunity
responses
Respiratory system: cellular organization of the lung, respiration, pulmonary circulation
Digestive system: mastication, ingestion, digestion, absorption, assimilation and excretion
Homeostasis and biochemistry of life: Nutrition, metabolism, temperature regulation
Urinary system: anatomy of the urinary system, control of water, electrolytes and acid-base
balance
Reproduction and Development
Reproductive system: structures of male and female reproductive tract; female reproductive cycle:
ovulation, basal body temperature and follicular and luteal phases; contraceptive methods,
pregnancy and labour
Genetics, embryology and pre-natal development: introduction to DNA, concepts on genetics,
development of embryo and pre-natal development
148
Development, growth and ageing: childhood to adolescence development, issues of ageing
Lectures focus on the introduction of the anatomy followed by elaboration of the key concepts and the
underlying principles on physiology. Clinical applications related to the basic human biology knowledge
will be discussed during lectures to enhance students’ acquisition of basic concepts and their relevant
applications.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to engage in more active learning. Multimedia aid such as
interactive videos, CD-ROMs, and online quizzes are adopted to reinforce and consolidate materials from
the lectures. The virtual laboratory sessions are designed to supplement the theoretical content taught in
lectures. These learning activities are to develop students’ abilities in identifying the relationship between
structure and physiology, and in analysing the mechanism in maintaining homeostasis.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools may be used, including objective questions, case studies, group presentations,
written reports, tests and examinations designed to evaluate students’ level of understanding; analysis and
abilities to put theories into application.
Indicative Readings
Marieb, E.N. Human Anatomy and Physiology. San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings. (latest ed.).
Martini, F.H. Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology. San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings. (latest ed.).
Tortora, G.J. and Grabowski, S.R. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. New York: John Wiley and
Sons. (latest ed.).
Waugh, A., et al. Anatomy and Physiology in Health and Illness. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. (latest
ed.).
149
CC2422
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Linear Algebra
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject is to provide students with the basic skills of linear algebra, which is the core of many
mathematical disciplines such as operations research, statistics, econometrics etc. The subject introduces
students to the ideas and techniques of basic linear algebra and its applications.
Learning Outcomes
perform basic operations of matrix algebra and apply them to solve systems of linear equations
discuss the basic concepts of vector spaces, linear transformations and inner product spaces
interpret the concepts of vector spaces from a geometric perspective
apply the techniques of linear algebra to problems in statistics and applied mathematics such as the
calculation of eigenvalues and eigenvectors
apply the knowledge of linear algebra to the solution of problems in statistics and numerical analysis
develop problem-solving abilities
Indicative Contents
Matrix Algebra
Linear equations and matrices, matrix operations, row-reduction, echelon form, determinants.
Vector Spaces
Vector space axioms, subspace, spanning sets, linear dependence and independence, bases and
dimension.
Linear Transformations
Definition of linear transformation, kernel and range, the matrix of a linear transformation, change of
basis, eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
Inner Product Spaces
Inner product, norm, orthogonality, Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization process, diagonalization of
symmetric matrices.
150
The first three intended outcomes will be achieved via lectures, tutorials and assignments. The fourth will
be acquired through lectures and computer demonstrations. The fifth and sixth will be developed via small
case studies and lectures.
Assessment Approach
The fourth and fifth intended outcomes will be assessed by written or computing assignments. All others
will be assessed by tests and an examination.
Indicative Reading
Cullen, C. Linear Algebra with Applications. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
References
Apostol, T.M. Linear Algebra: A First Course with Applications to Differential Equations. Wiley. (latest
ed.).
Nakos, G. and Joyner, D. Linear algebra with Applications. Brooks/Cole. (latest ed.).
Strang, G. Linear Algebra and its Applications. Harcourt, Brace, Jovanovich. (latest ed.).
151
CC2425
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
The aim of this subject is to introduce to the students the compilation of statistical data, simple and basic
statistical calculation, elements of probability and probability distributions. Applications in business will
be emphasized by using appropriate practical examples to illustrate the principles and methods.
Learning Outcomes
master statistical techniques for data compilation and calculation of descriptive statistics
master techniques for solving problems on probabilities
perform probability calculations relating probability distribution for discrete random variables
perform probability calculations relating probability density function for continuous random variables
determine the appropriateness of applying probability distributions or density functions under various
business situations
assess critically results of business problems
be prepared for life-long learning
Indicative Contents
Descriptive Statistics
Frequency distributions: construction and uses of frequency tables; Measures of central tendency:
arithmetic mean, median, mode; Measures of variability: range, percentiles, quartile deviation, mean
deviation, variance, standard deviation, coefficient of variation; Applications in business.
Probability
Experiment, events and probability; Probability rules; Bayes' theorem, emphasis of its business
applications.
Discrete Random Variables
Introduction to discrete random variables and their probability distributions; Mathematical expectation;
Special discrete distributions: uniform, binomial, multinomial, hypergeometric, negative binomial,
geometric, Poisson; Binomial approximation to the hypergeometric, and Poisson approximation to the
binomial; Illustrations of their applications in business.
152
Continuous Random Variables
Concept of continuous random variables and their probability density functions; Mathematical
expectation; Special continuous distributions: uniform, exponential, normal; Normal approximation to
the binomial. Illustrations of their applications in business.
Lectures will be used to introduce the subject materials. Illustrative business cases will be used to
strengthen students' statistical concepts. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge of this subject
through assignments.
Assessment Approach
The continuous assessment is comprised of homework assignments and tests. The assignments and the test
are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their progress. The end-of-semester examination is
used to assess the knowledge acquired by the students.
Indicative Reading
Newbold, P., Carlson, W.L. and Thorne, B.M. Statistics for Business and Economic. Prentice-Hall. (latest
ed.).
References
Berenson, M.L., Levine, D.M. and Krehbiel, T.C. Basic Business Statistics. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
Montgomery, D.C. and Runger, G.C. Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers. John-Wiley. (latest
ed.).
153
CC2439
Level
Credits
Nature
Mode of Study
Prerequisites
Assessment
General Chemistry
2
3
Science
28 hours Lecture
8 hours Tutorial
6 hours Laboratory
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces fundamental concepts on physical, organic and inorganic chemistry. It
provides sufficient information for students to continue chemistry instruction at college level.
Throughout the course, students will have a general understanding of chemical properties and
physical properties of chemicals. It is also hoped that they can be aware of the importance of
chemicals as part of their daily lives.
Learning Outcomes
describe the physical and chemical properties of chemicals
generalize and understand the fundamental principles of chemistry
explain and apply chemical properties to real-life examples
communicate effectively using language of chemistry
perform independent and critical thinking
Indicative Contents
Properties of gases, liquids and solids
States of matters; Properties of solutions, gases and liquids
Chemical bonding
Atomic structure; Basic concepts of chemical bonding;, molecular geometry and
bonding theory
Thermodynamics and kinetics
Concepts of chemical thermodynamics; Entropies and Enthalpies; Rate of reaction,
Order of reactions, Catalysis
Transitional Metals
Formation of coordination complex, notation, structure of coordinated complexes,
chelate effect, isomers, d-orbitals, crystal field theory
Chemistry in everyday life
Material Science; Nanotechnology, Chemicals commonly use in everyday life: bleach,
artificial colours, preservatives
154
The course is composed of three parts: lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions. Lectures provide
a theory-based teaching on physical, organic and inorganic chemistry. Examples and references
will be given to students whenever appropriate. Tutorials provide students with opportunities to
broaden, enlighten and reinforce the general knowledge obtained in the lectures. Students will be
involved in problem based activities, classroom feedback, presentations, and discussions in the
tutorial. Laboratory sessions allow students to understand, verify, and apply knowledge developed
from lectures.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including presentations, laboratory reports, group discussion, tests
and examination will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical and
Indicative Readings
Malone, L. Basic concepts of chemistry. Danvers, MA: Wiley (7th ed).
References
Averill, B. Chemistry: principles, patterns, and applications. San Francisco, California:
Pearson/Benjamin Cummings.
Bauer, R. C. A conceptual introduction to chemistry. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Brady, J.E. Chemistry: matter and its changes. Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley (4th ed).
Chang, R. Chemistry. Boston: McGraw-Hill Higher Education (9th ed).
McMurry, J. Fundamentals of general, organic, and biological chemistry. Upper Saddle River,
N.J.: Pearson/Prentice Hall (5th ed).
Russo, S. Introductory chemistry. San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings (3rd ed).
Suchocki, J. Conceptual chemistry: understanding our world of atoms and molecules. San
Francisco, California: Benjamin Cummings (3rd ed).
Wade, L.G. Organic chemistry. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Pearson Education (5th ed).
155
CC2441
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
2
3
Science
English
14 hours of Lecture
21 hours of Practical
7 hours of Tutorial
CC2417 Human Biology I or
CC2418 Human Biology II or
CC2439 General Chemistry or
CC3434 General Microbiology or
CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology or
CC3728 Analytical Chemistry or
CC3734 General Biochemistry or
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the basic laboratory skills which serve as the fundamentals of science studies and
researches. The theoretical background of common laboratory equipments will be introduced followed by
practical work. Students will be addressed to the key safety issues within the laboratories, and the ways of
how risks are maintained within limits, and the way of prevention of the health hazards. The goal is to
enrich the practical experience for the students who have some previous exposure to laboratory classes
from one or more science-based subjects, so as to create a platform for students on which future academic
practical-orientated scientific / technical subjects are based.
Learning Outcomes
develop competence in laboratory skills and to perform with safety precautions
conduct measurement and analysis using laboratory methods
appreciate the level of accuracy and variation in scientific measurement with statistical tests
integrate the essential concepts with the methodologies of scientific measurement and analysis as
foundation for future scientific studies
Indicative Contents
Laboratory Safety
Identification of physical, chemical and biological hazards in laboratory; general safety rules in
laboratories; risk assessment and prevention of accidents; workflow planning, time management and
laboratory design.
Basic Laboratory Skills
156
Measurement of basic scientific parameters such as weight, volume, pH and temperature, etc. using
appropriate apparatus or equipment; calculation and derivation of parameters such as concentration,
density and rate; accuracy and variation.
Physical Separation
Basic separation techniques such as centrifugation, chromatography, spectroscopy and electrophoresis.
Biochemical Techniques
Isolation and purification of proteins; enzymatic assays; aseptic technique; DNA technology: cloning
of gene; DNA sequencing and fingerprinting; polymerase chain reaction.
Dissection and Physiological Techniques
Dissection; in-vitro tissue preparation; in-vivo experimentation; sampling of tissues from experimental
animals, non-invasive techniques in some physiological measurements; ethics of animal and human
experimentation.
Immunological and microbiological Techniques
Immunoassays; application of antibody in specific labeling, microscopic localization and straining of
species;microscopy; aseptic techniques; inoculation, culturing and storage of bacteria; fermentation.
Statistical Analysis
Sampling and size of study groups; design of scientific studies; paired and unpaired experimental
design; statistical tests of experimental results; P-value; parametric and non-parametric tests.
The background theory and basic concepts of the subject will be introduced in lectures. Emphasis will be
placed on techniques which are commonly employed in laboratories of various subject areas.
Students will perform laboratory measurement and analysis to complete the log book. They are encouraged
to gain experience by performing Laboratory techniques will be demonstrated in practical classes.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life economic issues. The activities in tutorials
include discussions of problems sets and case studies.
Assessment Approach
As this is a practical-orientated subject, the total assessment of the subject weighs more towards the
continuous assessment. Continuous assessment will be in forms of laboratory reports and quizzes, as well
as keeping a log book. These will serve as a guild and reinforcement of the laboratory techniques during
the course of the subject. The log book will document the performed laboratory work and results, and will
help the assessor to monitor the progress of the students in various areas of laboratory skills. Lecturer will
periodically mark and grade the log book during the practical for various subject areas. Grades consists of
good, pass or failure and will contribute towards at least 50% of the continuous assessment. Students will
use the log book to demonstrate the strength and weakness of various areas, and to keep pace with the
progression of the subject. The final examination will be a written test of the theoretical knowledge,
preferably with problem-solving and task-orientated type questions.
157
Indicative Readings
Barnum, S.R. Biotechnology: An introduction. Thomson Brook/Cole. (latest ed.).
Estridge, B.H., Reynolds, A.P., Walters, N.J. Basic Medical Laboratory Techniques. Delmar Publishers.
(latest ed.).
Kreuzer, H., Massey, A. Recombinant DNA technology and Biotechnology: A Guild for Students. ASM
Press. (latest ed.).
Sanger, S. Experiments in Applied Microbiology. Academic Press. (latest ed.).
References
Greene, J.J., Rao, V.B. (ed.). Recombinant DNA Principles and Methodologies. Marcel Dekker. (latest
ed.).
Maud, P.J., Foster, C. (ed.). Physiological Assessment of Human Fitness. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
(latest ed.).
School of Nursing. Basic Laboratory Techniques [Interactive Multimedia] Part I. The Hong Kong
Polytechnic University. (2003).
158
CC3003
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
3
3
Non-science
English
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Seminar
Nil
40 % Coursework
60 % Examination
Aims
This subject introduces to students with the concepts of social problems from a sociological perspective. It
provides to students with fundamental overview on sociological paradigms and cultivates students’ critical
thinking ability. Studying the subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the
understanding of social problems in contemporary society.
Learning Outcomes
identify social issues from a sociological perspective.
gain insight of both global and local social problems.
make a reasoned analysis of the prevailing social problems.
become sensitive toward the development of social policies in tackling social problems.
develop social awareness toward the society they are living in.
Indicative Contents
The Sociology of Social Problems
The sociological diagnosis of social problems, pitfalls in sociological theorizing, social disorganization
and social dysfunctions.
Crime and Juvenile Delinquency
The criminal justice system, trends and patterns of crime and delinquency, prevailing criminological
theories and social control.
Poverty and Inequality
A delineation of poverty, trends in poverty, poverty and economic inequality from a global perspective.
Race and Ethnicity
Prejudice and discrimination, assimilation and pluralism, explaining racial and ethnic stratification.
Families
Structures and characteristics of families throughout the world, sociological perspectives on families,
violence in families, families and intimate relationships.
159
Education
Sociological theories of education, schools and societies, educational quality and educational
challenges in the twenty-first century.
Urbanization and Urban Problems
The urban environment, the development of cities, models of urban growth, suburbanization and the
fiscal crisis of cities.
Population and the World’s Environment
Growth and control of population, the theory of demographic transition, population in industrialized
and developing countries, a conflicting perspective on population, human intrusion into the natural
environment.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of social problems based on sociological theories and
concepts.
Seminars provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts delivered in
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of contemporary issues and problems. The activities in
seminars include student presentations and discussions of case studies.
Assessment Approach
examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical skills in examining the
understanding of social problems.
Indicative Reading
Etizen and Baca Zinn, Social Problems (8th ed.), Englewood Cliffs, Prentice Hall (2000).
References
Ferguon, S. J., Mapping the Social Landscape (4th ed.), New York: McGraw-Hill Higher Education (2005).
Kornblum, W. & Julian, J., Social Problems (11th ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall (2004).
Lauer, R.H. and Lauer, J.C., Social Problems & the Quality of Life (9th ed.), New York: McGraw-Hill
Higher Education (2004).
Mcveigh, F., Modern Social Problems, New York, Holt Rinehart and Winston (1997).
Neubeck, K., Social Problems (4th ed.), New York, McGraw Hill (1997).
Tylor, S., ed. Sociology: Issues and Debates, Great Britain: Palgrave (2000).
160
CC3004
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject provides students with the knowledge of the fundamental structure of the Pearl River Delta
region and a comprehensive understanding of various aspects of her socio-economic development and their
implications to Hong Kong’s development by introducing the most updated information about the latest
and salient socio-economic development in the Pearl River Delta region and developing students’ ability to
identify, comprehend and analyse the business and economic press coverage of Pearl River Delta and Hong
Kong with a critical perspective.
Learning Outcomes
understand and analyse the pertinent socio-economic development of the Pearl River Delta region and
the implications to Hong Kong’s development
identify the challenges and opportunities afforded at around the Pearl River Delta region
appraise the future development of the Pearl River Delta region by investigating the underlying forces
and factors that facilitate or inhabit the development
Indicative Contents
Introduction
Definition of Pearl River Delta; Importance of Guangdong and Pearl River Delta; Economic reform
and the openness policy; Links with Hong Kong.
Foreign Investment and Foreign Trade
Guangdong’s external trade; Exports of Pearl River Delta; The opening of domestic market and foreign
investment; Possibility of a South China Trading bloc.
Industrial Structure and Industrial Policy
Patterns of industrial structure in Guangdong; Retardation of the tertiary sector; Processing operations
and foreign-invested enterprises; An effective and equitable policy.
Labour Market
Labour cost and labour supply in Pearl River Delta; Human resources and the development of HighTech and tertiary industries; Liberalisation of the labour market; Relaxing household registration.
Infrastructure of Pearl River Delta
161
Electricity, land transportation, port construction, telecommunications, co-ordination of infrastructure
in Hong Kong and Pearl River Delta.
Environmental Degradation
Problems of environmental pollution, air and water pollution; Problems of industrial wastes; Sources of
environmental pollution; Role of Township and Village Enterprises (TVEs) in environmental
pollution; Controlling environmental pollution.
Regional economic development
Greater Pearl River Delta concept; Pan Pearl River Delta regional cooperation; Impacts of Yangtze
River Delta region to Pearl River Delta.
Lectures focus on providing students with the most updating information about the socio-economic
development in Pearl Rover Delta and analyzing the implications to Hong Kong’s development.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the lecture discussions and
to identify and comprehend the opportunities and challenges of latest salient issues through individual and
group presentations.
Assessment Approach
skills. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process through reading articles,
doing project and conducting self-study.
Indicative Readings
This is a wide and dynamic topic mainly involving current issues and we are not recommending a specific
textbook.
References
Cheng Y. S. (ed). Guangdong in the Twenty first Century: Stagnation or second Take-off. City University
of Hong Kong Press (latest ed.).
Liu P. W., et al., The Fifth Dragon: The Emergence of Pearl River Delta. Addison Wesley, Singapore
(latest ed.).
Yeh, Lee, Lee and Sze (ed.) Building a Competitive Pearl River Delta Region—Cooperation,
Coordination, and Planning. Centre of Urban Planning and Environmental Management, HKU (latest ed.).
Yeung, Shen and Li, The Western Pearl River Delta—Growth and opportunities for Cooperative
Development with Hong Kong, Hong Kong Institute of Asia-Pacific Studies, the Chinese University of
Hong Kong (latest ed.).
Yeung Y. M. and Chu K. Y.(ed)., Guangdong, Survey of a Province Undergoing Rapid Changes. The
Chinese University Press. Second edition (latest ed.).
162
Greater PRD: bridgehead to the China market, Research Department, Hong Kong Trade Development
Council (latest ed.).
Pearl River Super Zone: tapping into the world's fastest growing economy, South China Morning Post
(latest ed.).
Central Policy Unit, HKSAR (http://www.info.gov.hk/cpu/english/new.htm)
Hong Kong Trade Development Council: Pan-Pearl River Delta (http://panprd.tdctrade.com)
Hong Kong Trade Development Council: Pearl River Delta (http://prd.tdctrade.com)
The Greater Pearl River Delta Business Council Annual Report (http://www.info.gov.hk/info/gprd/)
163
CC3006
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
3
3
Non-science
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
On the basis of theories and contextual analyses, this subject examines the changing relationship among
culture, society, history, religion, and popular arts in the East and West. It allows students to understand the
key problems of human creativity, social mentality and cultural consumption in the contexts of local
history and global transformation. All these forces will be pivotal in the development of our cultural
imagination, cultural education and cultural policies in the years ahead.
Learning Outcomes
identify the similarities and differences between Eastern and Western cultures.
become more sensitive to different cultural novelties and distinctiveness and successfully interact with
people of different cultural backgrounds.
differentiate the multiple perspectives with which people view the East and West today.
analyze the complex interplay between the modern self, society and history through an interdisciplinary approach.
develop a capacity for independent judgment on both Eastern and Western cultural practices and social
institutions they must deal with today.
apply cultural concepts and theories to the analysis of the fundamental issues and problems of different
civilizations.
Indicative Content
The Conceptions and Definitions of Eastern and Western Cultures
Concepts of cultures, difference between cultures and civilizations, representations of the East and
West, Globalization and Americanization, Samuel Huntington’s notion of “the Clash of Civilization”.
The Conceptions of Beauty
The difference between the East and West in the concepts of beauty, the western images of Eastern
beauty, the Japanese images of western beauty, ancient and modern representations of perfect human
figures; modern cultural meaning of “Miss Universe”.
Language and Communication
The origins and evolutions of Eastern and Western languages, pidgins and colonialism, language and
the society, accents and Class, tone and gender, the secret of good communications, Greetings and
manners, the difference between verbal and body languages in the East and West.
164
Childhood and Toy Culture
The difference between the East and West in the concepts of Childhood; the history of Eastern and
Western toys, the history of Barbie doll, Barbie culture and the representation of American
womanhood; the impact of American Barbie culture on China and Hong Kong; the opponent of Barbie:
the emergence of Blythe doll in the early 2000s, Gundam culture and the Japanese worldview.
Buddhism and Christianity
The difference between the East and West in the conception of afterlife, the concepts of heaven and
hells, the life and thoughts of Jesus and Buddha, the rise and decline of Buddhism in India, the impact
of Buddhism on East and South East Asian Society; Christianity and Jewish culture, the rise of
Christianity in Europe and America.
Fortune-telling and Social Culture
European witchcraft and black magic, Indian palm reading and its introduction to China, ancient
Chinese conception of fate and destiny, “Feng-shui” and Chinese architecture, “I-Ching” fortunetelling
and Chinese social culture.
Love relationship and Marriage
The origin and evolution of Valentine culture in the West, the difference between the East and West in
dating culture; the Eastern and Western conceptions of “Love”; the origins and the evolution of
marriage in human society; different marriage pattern in Eastern and Western culture, Eastern and
Western definitions of marriage.
Gender and Sexuality
The rise of feminism in modern western society; ancient Chinese representations of Chinese
womanhood; the difference between the West, India and China in attitudes toward sex, sex education
in East and West, homosexual cultures in the East and West.
Disney Culture and Globalization
The Making of Disney Culture in America; Disney Culture and the rise of American middle class in
the second half of the 20th century, Disney films and American family culture, the impacts of Disney
culture on Japan, China and Hong Kong.
Historical Memory and Museums
Colonialism and the British Museums; the flowering of European culture and the development of The
British Museum; the Beijing National Museum and the rise of Chinese nationalism; Museum of Hong
Kong History and collective identity in Hong Kong.
Popular Cultures (I): Comics and the Society
The origins and development of Eastern and Western comics, “Superman” and American heroic
culture; Japanese comics and social culture, the impact of Japanese comics on Hong Kong, Taiwanese
and Chinese teen culture.
Popular Cultures (II): Films and TV culture and the Society
The development of western film industry; the impact of Hollywood culture on the world; the
development of Chinese film industry; the interactive relationship between Film and TV culture ,
cultural identities and social mentality.
Orientalism and Occidentalism
Edward Said’s notion of Orientalism, the rise of Occidentalism in Asia, the similarities and differences
between Orientalism and Occidentalsim, the development of Chinese Occidentalism and June Fourth
Student Movement; Occidentalism and Japanese pop cultures.
165
The lecturer will use the Chinese language to present the topics related to Eastern cultures so as to make
the teaching content much more accessible and comprehensible to students. Students are required to
actively participate in discussion and presentation. Audio and visual materials are also used to enhance
students’ understanding. In each tutorial, students will be divided into groups and will be required to
present an assigned topic for discussion. They will be occasionally required to participate in fieldwork and
to explore historical sites in Hong Kong under the guidance of the lecturer.
Assessment Approach,
In addition to tests and final examination that assess students’ understanding of cultural concepts and
theories, presentation as well as essays are used to examine students’ competence in conducting cultural
analysis of cultural issues.
Indicative Reading
Hsu, Francis L.K., American and Chinese: Passages to Differences .Honolulu: The University Press of
Hawaii, 2003.
清僑
情感
香港流歌詞
》
References
Chan, Stephen Ching-kiu (陳
), ed. 《
的實踐：
行
研究
The Practice of Affect:
Studies in Hong Kong Popular Song Lyrics, Series in Hong Kong Cultural Studies. Hong Kong: Oxford
University Press, 1997.
Frow, John, Cultural Studies and Cultural Value. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1995.
Geertz, Clifford, The Interpretation of Cultures, New York: Basci Books, 2000.
Kersten, Holger, Jesus lived in India: His Unknown Life Before and After the Crucifixion, India: Penguin
Books, 2001.
King, Larry, How to Talk to Anyone, Anytime, Anywhere, The Secrets of Good Communication. New York:
Random House, 2005.
Law, Kwai-cheung (羅
Literary Press, 1990.
貴祥),
《大
眾
香港》Mass Culture and Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Youth
文化與
李良), Wong, Wang-chi (王宏志) and Chan, Stephen Ching-kiu ( 清僑), 想香港
未來》Hong Kong Un-Imagined: History, Culture, and the Future, Taipei: Rye Field, 1997.
Lok, Fung ( 洛楓 ),
紀末城巿香港流
》 The Decadent City, Hong Kong: Oxford
Li, Siu-leung(
小
陳
《否
：
歷史、文化、
《世
的
：
的
行文化
Ma, Kit-wai, Culture, Politics and Television in Hong Kong: Culture and Communication in Asia. London:
Routledge, 1998.
Punter, David, ed. Introduction to Contemporary Cultural Studies. London New York: Longman, 1996.
Said, Edward, Orientalism . London: Penguin Press, 2000.
166
田邁修
顏淑芬
香港六十年身份
設計》
Turner, Mathew (
) and Ngan, Suk-fun (
), eds.《
代：
文化認同與
Hong Kong in the Sixties: Cultural Identity and Design. Hong Kong: Hong Kong Arts Centre, 1994.
余慕
香港電影話》A Historical Narrative of Hong Kong Film, Vol.1. Hong Kong:
雲),《
Yu, Mo-wan (
Subculture Press, 1996.
史
167
CC3008
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the basic concepts in the science of food and nutrients. These lay the foundation of
healthy nutrition and diet. The goal is to create among students an awareness of the relation between diet
and health, and to encourage them to follow the principles of a balanced diet to maintain their health,
fitness and vitality. It also equips students with the practical ways to implement precautions to prevent
food-borne illnesses and the means to design a balanced diet for different stages of one’s life cycle, as well
as with reference to one’s health condition.
Learning Outcomes
identify the concepts of the role of nutrients and their metabolism in health and diseases
analyse the inter-relationship between diet and fitness
plan a balanced diet for different stages in the life cycle
plan a balanced diet to maintain health, fitness and vitality
apply the principles in the prevention of food-borne diseases
follow the guidelines of Critical Control Point analysis for food-borne diseases
show enhanced critical thinking and problem-solving skills
show enhanced professionalism in terms of care, integrity and sense of responsibility
Indicative Contents
Overview of Nutrients and Nutrition
Important nutrients to human health, carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, vitamins, minerals and water.
Dietary reference intakes and nutritional assessment.
Metabolism
Digestion, absorption, transportation, and storage/utilisation of nutrients in the human body.
Planning of Diet in Health and for Some Diseases
Principles and guidelines in planning a balanced diet to maintain health and to prevent certain diseases
such as heart disease, cancer and diabetes; Food fads and trends.
168
Diet Supplements and Functional Food
Wholesome food versus diet supplements in maintaining health and delay degeneration.
Weight Management
Energy balance between intake and expenditure; Definition of normal, over- and under- weight using
body mass index.
Nutrition and Fitness
Energy requirement for various physical activities.
Nutrition in Life Cycle
Dietary consideration during various stages in the life cycle: childhood, adolescence, adulthood,
pregnancy and elderly.
Food Safety and Prevention of Food-borne Illness
Risk factors for food-borne illnesses and their prevention; Use of Hazard Analysis and Critical Control
Point in prevention of food-borne illnesses.
Lectures emphasize the understanding and explanation of basic information and relevant concepts of
nutrition and food hygiene.
Tutorials provide a venue for discussion and illustration of the application in designing a healthy diet in
health and illness.
Assessment Approach
Assessment such as individual and group assignments, presentations, tests and an examination will be used
to assess the application of the theoretical knowledge. Written assignments and oral presentations are,
respectively, for the training of written and oral communication skills. In addition, students’ ability in
making analysis and planning for a balanced and health promoting diet is assessed.
Indicative Readings
Wardlaw, G.M. Contemporary Nutrition- Issues and Insight. New York: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Geissler, C.A. and Powers, H.J. (ed.). Human Nutrition and Dietetics. Edinburgh: Elsevier/Churchill
Livingstone. (latest ed.).
Mc Swane. D., Nancy, R. and Linton, R. Essentials of Food Safety and Sanitation. NJ: Prentice Hall.
(latest ed.).
169
CC3011
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
Gender Issues
3
3
Non-science
English
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Seminar
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject aims at systematically enhancing students’ awareness of gender stereotypes and inequality in
society from both the personal and sociological perspectives. It equips them with a critical and gender
sensitive mind to observe, interpret and articulate social interaction and phenomena. Social construction
and deconstruction of gender issues are discussed to enable students to appreciate the importance of gender
balance and equality in the changing human world.
Learning Outcomes
identify a framework of study in gender issues.
deconstruct the current issues of gender inequality from a sociological perspective.
develop gender sensitivity toward social issues.
demonstrate the ability to use relevant perspectives and arguments in analyzing gender issues.
Indicative Contents
Thinking about Gender
Sociological imagination and the sociological framework for thinking about women and men.
Gender Difference and Gender Inequality
Natural differences between the sexes, discrimination in everyday life, and the problem in sociological
perspectives.
The Social Construction of Gender
Femininity, masculinity and the concept of androgyny.
The Social Construction of Gender in Chinese Society
The social construction of language, knowledge, and Chinese culture.
Sex Segregation and Work
The male/female earnings gap; Sex segregation in the workplace; Consequences of occupational sex
segregation.
170
Family, Economy and the Institutionalization of Gender Inequality
Historical perspectives on modern families; Feminist perspective on families, and the diversity of
contemporary households.
Gender, Social Stratification and Social Policy
Current social policy related to gender issues; Concept of a gender-balanced society.
To facilitate students’ learning in this subject, lectures, seminars and group presentations are offered.
Students are encouraged to actively participate in the learning process. During lectures, theories and
concepts on sociology and gender issues are delivered. In seminars, students take part in various kinds of
interesting and challenging group presentations and discussion which help to consolidate and enrich their
understanding and critical analysis of the subject matter.
Assessment Approach
In addition to an examination that assesses students’ understanding and application of gender concepts and
theories, presentations, case studies and group projects as well as written reflection papers are used to
enhance students’ analytical ability and sensitivity in conducting personal and sociological analysis of
gender issues.
Indicative Reading
Anderson, M.L., Thinking about Women: Sociological Perspectives on Sex and Gender, US: Allyn and
Bacon (latest ed.).
Lindsey, Linda L., Gender Roles: a Sociological Perspective, Pearson Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
References
Francis. B. and Skelton C., Investigating Gender Contemporary Perspectives in Education, USA: Open
University Press (latest ed.).
Hilary M. Lips, Sex & Gender: An Introduction, Boston: McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
Lee, Eliza W.Y., Gender and Change in Hong Kong: Globalization, Postcolonialism and Chinese
Patriarchy, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press (latest ed.).
Renzetti, C.M. and Curran, D.J., Women and Society, US: Allyn and Bacon (latest ed.).
Thorne, B., Gender Play: Girls and Boys in School, Open University Press (latest ed.).
俞智敏譯［Pamela Abbott ＆ Claire Wallace］著女性
公司 (最版 )
燕翎林芳玫
女性
流派土最女性
公司 (最版 )
等合
近
顧
、
事業有限
：《
》台北巨流
主義觀點的社會學
：
圖書
本。
等：《
近
主義理論與
：本
本。
171
撰寫
完整
門讀》台北女
主義入
本
：
書文化
CC3015
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Logic
3
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Tutorial
CC2002 Critical and Creative Thinking
or CC2427 The Art of Reasoning
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to strengthen the rational dimension of holistic (or liberal arts) education through
enhancing students’ ability in logical reasoning and abstract thinking (and hence in critical thinking). It lets
students see the power of logic through a wide range of applications in daily life. It also cultivates students’
appreciation to the beauty of the exactitude of formal logic - the essence of human rationality.
Learning Outcomes
apply logical techniques in assessing reasoning both in everyday life and in academic pursuit.
become more critically aware of fallacies in everyday reasoning.
use reason in solving conflicts and disputes and in making decisions.
Indicative Contents
Introduction
Logic: the first of the seven traditional liberal arts. The history of logic.
The branches of logic. Logic and reasoning.
Statement Logic
Logical connectives. Symbolizing English arguments.
Using truth tables to evaluate arguments.
Tautology, contradiction, and logical equivalence. Natural deduction.
Applications of statement logic.
Predicate Logic
Predicates and quantifiers. Symbolizing English arguments. Logic of relations.
Identity. Natural deduction. Applications of predicate logic.
Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process. Concepts and rules of logic,
together with a lot of examples, are delivered in lectures. The students are required to do exercises after the
172
lectures but before coming to the tutorials. In the tutorials, discussion will focus on places where students
encounter difficulties.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, group projects, presentations, case
studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess students’ grip of logical
concepts and techniques and their ability of applying these concepts and techniques to everyday arguments.
Indicative Reading
Hurley, Patrick J., A Concise Introduction to Logic, Wadsworth (latest ed.).
References
Copi, Irving M. and Cohen, Carl, Introduction to Logic, Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
Layman, C. Stephen, The Power of Logic, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
Tidman, Paul and Kahane, Howard, Logic and Philosophy, Wadsworth (latest ed.).
173
CC3016
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Non-Science
English, supplemented by Chinese
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Seminar
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject provides an introductory survey of the mass media and their effects on culture, in particular in
the Hong Kong society. It enables students to understand and apply key concepts in cultural and media
theory, and critically analyze the relationship between media and cultural production, especially within the
context of Hong Kong. Taking a critical approach, we will analyze and compare various media, including
television, print, and the Internet.
Learning Outcomes
apply key concepts in cultural and media theories.
evaluate the nature of various types of mass media and their potential effects on the individual and
society.
critically analyze the relationship between media and cultural production, especially within the context
of Hong Kong;
Indicative Contents
Changing Media
Old and new media, media convergence, information society, media functions.
Media Theory
Media economics, political economy, cultural theories, gatekeeping, framing, agenda setting.
Newspaper, Television, Internet, Advertising, Public Relations
Muckraking, professional journalism, public broadcasting, genres of advertising and public relations.
Media Impacts
Propaganda, multi-step flow model, selective reception, social learning theory, cultivation theory,
stereotyping, spiral of silence.
Media Ethics
Press freedom, social responsibility, truthfulness, privacy, confidentiality, personal conflict of interests.
174
Students will have the opportunity to learn concepts through a variety of media, including books, lectures,
videos, and the Internet. The purpose is to expose students to the mass media as they are used and
consumed in modern societies, helping them draw connections between theoretical concepts and real world
applications. Students will further develop their habits of analytical thinking by critically evaluating and
discussing issues from multiple perspectives.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations, case studies, written reports, tests
and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication
skills.
Indicative Reading
Baran, Stanley J., Introduction to Mass Communication, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
References
Andersen, R., Strate, L., Critical Studies in Media Commercialism, Oxford University Press (latest ed.).
Wilson, J.R. and Wilson, S.L., Mass Media / Mass Culture, McGraw Hill (latest ed.).
Ryan J. and Wentworth, W.M., Media and Society: The Production of Culture in the Mass Media, Allyn &
Bacon (latest ed.).
電視
馬傑偉著香港突破出版
與文化認同，
，
：
1996
社，
175
年
。
CC3017
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Social Psychology
3
3
Non-science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Seminar
CC2019 Introduction to Psychology o OR
CC2413 Fundamental Psychology for Health Studies
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject familiarizes students with different psychological theories in explaining human behaviour in
social setting. It provides a balanced explanation of human behaviour, which often is the interplay of
internal and contextual influences, instead of either one of the forces alone. The subject also provides
opportunities for students to apply concepts and theories in understanding social phenomena in real life.
Learning Outcomes
articulate major concepts and major theories to explain social phenomena
recognize the importance of context and social influence on human attitudes and behaviours
conduct basic empirical study with the use of appropriate research methods to examine social
phenomenon with meaningful purpose
Indicative Contents
Introduction to Social Psychology
Defining social psychology; Research methodologies; Utility of the discipline; The latest
development and application of the field.
Social Cognition
Concept of self and identity; Attribution; Social scheme; Stereotypes; Prejudice and discrimination.
Attitude and Behaviour
Component of attitudes; Attitudes change persuasion, cognitive dissonance and attitude inoculation;
Predicting behaviours with attitude.
Interpersonal interaction
Interpersonal attraction; Intimacy; Love.
Altruistic and Aggressive Behaviour
Altruistic behaviour; Social loafing; Diffusion of social responsibility; De-individualization.
Social Influence
Theory of conformity; Compliance; Obedience; Power of role; Cult behaviour.
176
Group Dynamics
Group thinking; Social dilemmas; Polarization; Gender and cultural differences.
Theories and concepts will be explained in lectures with the aid of real life examples, newspaper clips,
cases and other sources. Students are also expected to participate in activities prepared
Guided discussions, experiment demonstrations will be used in seminar to help students to actively apply
concepts and theories learnt in the lectures. On-site data collection, field visits and studies will also be
employed for group projects.
Assessment Approach
In addition to tests and examination that will be used to assess students’ understanding and application of
concepts and theories; presentations, case studies as well as group written reports will also be used to
evaluate students’ analytical ability and competence in conducting systematic research on social
phenomena on top of the subject matter.
Indicative Reading
Myers, D. Social Psychology. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Vaughan and Hogg. Introduction to Social Psychology. French Forest NSW: Pearson
Education. (latest ed.).
References
Brannigan, G.G., and Merrens, M.R. (Eds,.). The social psychologists: Research adventures. NY:
McGraw-Hill, Inc. (latest ed.).
Hogg, M.A. The SAGE handbook of Social Psychology. London: Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications.
(latest ed.).
Smith, P.B., and Bond, M.H. Social psychology across cultures: Analysis and perspectives. Boston: Allyn
& Bacon. (latest ed.).
177
CC3018
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
The History of Modern China and the World
(From 1842 - Now)
3
3
Non-science
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Seminar
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject will explore the dawn and evolution of modern China and its interaction with the World from
historical perspectives and thus enable students to use the knowledge of the past to analyse current affairs.
Learning Outcomes
On successful completion of the subject, students will be able to:
trace the political, socio-economic and cultural changes of modern China and the world.
develop a good knowledge of the continuity and change between the past and the present, thus looking
into the future from different perspectives.
analyse with the current issues which we have encountered.
apply relevant concepts and principles of history to modern Chinese society.
An active learning approach and peer learning approach will be adopted in the subject. Students will be
required to actively participate in the learning process. And students will take part in a wide range of
interesting and challenging activities, audio visual materials will be used for learning purposes.
Indicative Contents
An Introduction of the conception of Chinese modernity
The research method of Japanese and Western scholars, the limitation of the Chinese scholars.
The first clash with the West: Opium Wars
The culture and the economic clash between China and West, the reason of the outbreak of the Opium
War.
Revolution, Republic and Warlordism
The May Fourth Movement, Intellectuals and Western Cultures.
The Sino-Japanese War and The Communist Revolution
The Interaction between Popular Culture and Modern Chinese Nationalism, Modern Chinese Museum:
the collective memory of China’s Past.
178
The Cultural revolution and the Cult of Mao
The rise of Mao, The June Fourth Movement and the 1997 Handover.
Assessment Approach
In addition to tests and an examination that assess student’s understanding and application of concepts and
theories, presentations, case studies as well as group written reports are used to examine students’
analytical ability and competence in conducting systematic investigation of the history of modern China.
Indicative Reading
Spence, Jonathan D., The Search for Modern China, New York: Norton Company (2002).
郭廷
綱》香港香港
以：《近代中國史
：
出版
中文大學
1997
社，
年
。
References
Fairbank, John K., Late Ching China, 1800-1911, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press (1978).
Fairbank, John K. and Merle Goldman, ed. China: A New History, Cambridge: Harvard University Press
(1998).
Hsu, Immanuel C.Y., The Rise of Modern China, New York: Oxford University Press (1995).
Spence, Jonathan, The Gate of Heavenly Peace: The Chinese and Their Revolution, 1895-1980 (New York:
Viking (1981).
Wakeman, Frederic, The Fall of Imperial China, New York: Fress (1975).
李
徐約
》台北正局 1963 年
》下冊香港香港
出版
定一：《近代中國史
中
：《近代中國史
：
上
中書
：
，
。
中文大學
179
2001
社，
年
。
CC3020
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Oral Communication in English
3
3
Non-Science
English
42 hours of Seminar
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
The main purpose of this subject is to help students develop their oral English skills. Building on a base of
knowledge and strategies introduced in class, students will have many opportunities to practice and
improve fluency as well as accuracy of their oral English output. Students will also increase their
confidence in English usage through an enhanced awareness of their own language learning strategies.
Learning Outcomes
use knowledge of the International Phonetic Alphabet and pronunciation rules to improve the accuracy
of their spoken English.
apply skills and strategies to communicate fluently in interpersonal, group, and public situations.
analyse critically the effectiveness of communication in interpersonal, group, and public situations.
increase awareness and confidence in their ability to communicate orally in English.
Indicative Contents
English Pronunciation
International Phonetic Alphabet (the IPA system); Features of English consonant and vowel sounds;
Pronunciation patterns; Syllables; Stress; Intonation.
Interpersonal Communication
Communication and relationship development; Assertive
communication in school life, social life, and business life.
conflict resolution; Interpersonal
Group Communication
Problem-solving and decision making; Leadership techniques; Group conflict management.
Public Communication
Organizing presentation content; Improving delivery techniques; Types of delivery; Overcoming
presentation fear.
Students will spend a portion of seminar time acquiring knowledge and strategies to improve
communication skills. Through pair and group activities, students will have numerous opportunities to
practice what they learn, building fluency and confidence in their oral English production. They will also
180
be exposed to audio-visual recordings of interpersonal, group, and public communication, developing the
ability to critique examples as another means of internalising the knowledge and techniques of this subject.
A portion of seminar time will also be spent in the language laboratory, where students will make use of
listening activities, the Internet, and other technologies to improve the accuracy of their spoken English.
Assessment Approach
Assessment will mostly centre around speaking tasks, both extemporaneous and impromptu in nature.
Individual presentations allow students to demonstrate their public communication skills while a group
role-play/video assignment measure student’s ability to demonstrate effective interpersonal and group
communication. Quizzes are used to assess students’ knowledge of the IPA system as well as other aspects
of English pronunciation. Students’ participation in peer review and constructive feedback will be an
assessment component that measures their ability to analyze the effectiveness of various forms of
communication while a reflection paper will seek to assess students internalisation and reflection on
subject knowledge and activities.
Indicative Reading
References
Adler, Ronald B. and Elmhorst, Jeanne M., Communicating at Work: Principles and Practices for Business
and the Professions, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
Grant, Linda, Well Said: Pronunciation for Clear Communication, Heinle & Heinle (latest ed.).
Hancock, Mark, English Pronunciation in Use, Cambridge University Press (latest ed.).
Hybels, Saundra and Weaver, Richard L., Communicating Effectively, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
181
CC3021
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Tutorial
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to systemically enhance students’ understanding of the roles and functions of
government and the interplay among government and politics, with specific reference to the local Hong
Kong context. Related concepts are introduced to equip students’ analytical skills that are necessary to
analyze of the current political issues. It also helps to promote the students’ social awareness and
responsible citizenship and to develop their critical thinking for their life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
identify and discuss the roles, functions, inter-relationship, and dynamics of politics and government;
relate and apply the basic concepts and relevant knowledge to analyze and evaluate of current local
issues in government and politics;
develop a critical awareness of the trend of the interplay between government and politics;
develop the commitment to concern political issues in the changing society.
Indicative Contents
An Overview of the Nature of Politics and Government
The importance of understanding politics and government; The meaning of politics; The concepts of
political development.
Governments
The roles and functions of government; The state as an agent of modernization.
The Structure of Government
Legislature, executive and judiciary system; Different forms of government.
The Patterns of Government in the Contemporary World
Three dimensions of norms of political systems; Five main types of political systems in contemporary
world including liberal-democratic, egalitarian-authoritarian, traditional-inegalitarian, populist and
authoritarian-inegalitarian regimes.
Political Culture
Systems, patterns and processes
182
Political Parties
Roles of political parties; ideology and structure of the major political parties.
Change and Political Development
Characteristics and the process of political development, democratization, political institutionalization
and political decay.
Current Issues
Politics and government
Public sector reform
Checks and balances, and accountability
Need for and limits to government action
Alternatives of government action
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts, with specific reference to current
political issues. Lectures emphasize on active interaction between students and lecturer. With the aid of
audio-visual materials, group discussions will be arranged to strengthen students’ awareness of current
political issues.
Seminars are conducted in the form of small class. In seminars sessions, students would be divided into
small groups to conduct presentations of assigned topics. They are expected to make use of the seminar
sessions to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the
analysis of real-life political issues.
Assessment Approach
Besides an examination that assess students’ understanding and application of political concepts and
theories; a variety of assessment tools will also be used, including presentations, case studies, written
reports, designed to assess students’ critical thinking abilities and competence in conducting theoretical
analysis of current political issues.
Indicative Readings
Lam, T. M., Politics and Government: An Introduction, Writers’ & Publishers’ Cooperative (latest
Coulter, E., Principles of Politics and Government, Boston: Allyn and Baton, Inc., (latest ed.).
References
Grigsby, E., Analyzing Politics: an Introduction to Political Science, West/Wadsworth (latest ed.).
Miners, H. J., Government and Politics of Hong Kong, CUHK Press (latest ed.).
Lee, C.Y. and Cheung, B.L. Public Sector Reform in HK. Hong Kong: CUHK Press (latest ed.).
Osborne, D. & Gaebler, T., Reinventing Government: How the Entrepreneurial Spirit is Transforming
the Public Sector, Plume Book (latest ed.).
Tsang, S., Government and Politics, Hong Kong University (latest ed.).
羅
永祥志輝編著香港特別政區施政架構》香港﹕三店 (最新版
，陳
《
行
聯書
183
。
)
本
ed.).
CC3022
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
東亞歷史、
東亞歷史、文化、
文化、經濟及社會發展
3
3
Non-science
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This is an interdisciplinary subject designed to introduce students to the historical, cultural, economic and social
aspects of East Asia. It helps widen students’ knowledge of East Asia, in particular, China, Korea and Japan.
Learning Outcomes
identify the similarity and difference between China, Japan and Korea in culture, history, economy and
society;
be sensitive to the cultural novelties and distinctiveness of different East Asia countries and successfully
interact with people of different East Asian cultural backgrounds;
appreciate the multiple perspectives with which people view East Asian social and economical development;
analyse the complex interplay between economic development, culture, society and history through an interdisciplinary approach;
demonstrate a capacity for independent judgment on East Asian cultural practices and social institutions they
must deal with today;
apply different concepts and theories to the analysis of the fundamental issues and problems of East Asia;
and
develop a lifelong interest in reading and studying about East Asia that will continue after the completion of
the course.
Indicative Content
Introduction
The Concept of East Asia; the Physical and Ethnic Geography of East Asia, the Need for Historical and
Cultural Understanding; Land, People and Languages
Cultural and Social Tradition in East Asia
Basic Social Structures and Family System; Religious Traditions in Asia, Confucianism in East Asia Society;
Literature and Arts; Popular Culture
East Asian Response to the West in the 19th Century
The Impact of the West on East Asia; Foreign Aggression on China’s Periphery; Early Westernization in
Self-Defence in China; The Reaction to Christian Missions in China; the Resort to Military Force in Japan;
the Creation of New Government in Japan, Korea’s Response to the Outside world
184
Imperial Japan: Economy, Politics and Society
The Maturing of the Economy; Social and Cultural Change; Taishõ Democracy ; the Rise of Militarism;
Japan at War; Colonizing Korea
China: From Monarchy to Warloardism
The Late Qing Reform; the Revolution of 1911; the Republic’s Decline into Warlordism
World War II in East Asia
Japan’s Aggression in China, Japan’s Greater East Asia Co-Prosperity Sphere; the War Ending in East Asia
The New China and the New Japan
The Rise of Maoist Leadership; Founding the People’s Republic; The American Occupation and the Yoshida
Ministries, 1945-1954; Social and Cultural Change in the Era of High Growth in Japan
The Cold War in East Asia
War in Korea,; Korea: from Colony to Divided Nation; Taiwan: from Colony to Republic; China, Taiwan
and the United Nation; the Rim Nations of East Asia
The Resurgence of East Asian Economic Power
Japan as “Number 1”; Little Dragons; China Joining the World Market Economy; The Japan that can Say
No; the Japanese Model of Economic Growth;
The Eve of and the Beginning of the 21st Century
Disaster at Tiananmen; Democracy Coming to Taiwan; the Korean Peninsula: Democracy and Nuclear
Weapons, Red Star over Hong Kong; Economic downturn in East Asia, SARS Crisis in East Asia; Taiwanese
Independent Movement; the Sino-Japan Relation
discussion.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies; written reports, tests and
Indicative Readings
Bowman, John S., Columbia Chronologies of Asian History and Culture, New York: Columbia University
Press, 2000.
Fairbank, J.K., Reischauer, E.O. and Craig, A.M., East Asia: Tradition and Transformation, Boston:
Houghton Mifflin Co., 1999.
References
Allinson, Gary D., The Columbia Guide to Modern Japanese History, New York: Columbia University
Press, 1999.
185
Brodsgaard, Kjeld E. and Young, Susan, eds., State capacity in East Asia : Japan, Taiwan, China, and
Vietnam, Oxford : Oxford University Press, 2000.
Clyde, Paul H. and Beers, Burton F., The Far East: A History of Western Impacts and Eastern Responses,
1830-1975, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1975.
Copland, Ian, The Burden of Empire: Perspectives on Imperialism and Colonialism, Melbourne: Oxford
Cumings, Bruce, Korea’s Place in the Sun: A Modern History, New York: Norton, 1997.
Deyo, Frederic, The Political Economy of the New Asian Industrialism, Ithaca, New York: Cornell
Dockrill, Saki, From Pearl Harbor to Hiroshima: The Second World War in Asia and the Pacific, 19411945, New York: St. Martin's Press, 1994.
Hsu, Immanuel C. Y., The Rise of Modern China, New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.
Jansen, Marius B., The Making of Modern Japan, Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of Harvard University
Press, 2000.
Meyer , Milton W., Asia: A Concise History, Lanham, Md.: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, 1997.
梁英明
東亞》北京北京出版 1995 年
余邦喻森編
東亞》廣州
《近現代
定
、
常
文化
：
：《近現代中國與
大學
社，
關係史
186
。
出版
：中山大學
1999
社，
年
。
CC3023
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
Social Development of Southeast Asia
3
3
Non-science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This is an interdisciplinary subject designed to introduce students to the historical, cultural, economic and
social aspects of Southeast Asia. Informed by theories and contextual analyses, this subject enable students
to understand the certain critical differences among different Southeast Asia countries while appreciating
how they constitute a regional world system based on certain shared cultural values and practices.
Learning Outcomes
On Successfully completing this subject, students will be able to:
identify the similarity and difference among Southeast Asia countries in culture, history economy and
society.
be sensitive to the cultural novelties and distinctiveness of different Southeast Asia countries and
successfully interact with people of different Southeast Asian cultural backgrounds.
appreciate the multiple perspectives with which people view Southeast Asian social and economical
development.
analyze the complex interplay between economic development, culture, society and history through an
inter-disciplinary approach.
demonstrate a capacity for independent judgment on Southeast Asian cultural practices and social
institutions they must deal with today.
apply different concepts and theories to the analysis of the fundamental issues and problems of
Southeast Asia.
develop a lifelong interest in reading and studying about Southeast Asia that will continue after the
completion of the course.
Indicative Contents
Introduction
The Concept of Southeast Asia; the Physical and Ethnic Geography of Southeast Asia, the Need for
Historical and Cultural Understanding; Land, People and Languages
Waterways: From Early Settlements to the First Maritime Kingdom
Evidence from Prehistory; Farming and Metalworking; Early States and Indian Influences; Funan; Champa;
Srivijiaya; Waterways; Settlements and Trade
187
Basic Social Structures and Family System
Southeast Asian Kingship; Kingship and Display; Angkor and Cambodia; Early Javanese Kingdoms;
Borobudur; Prambanan; Eastern Java; Majapahit; Pagan and Burma; A Tai Century; Ayudhya; The Indian
Legacy
Multiplicity of Beliefs: The Religions of Southeast Asia
Hinduism; Buddhism; Theravada Buddhism; Confucianism; Taoism; Islam; Christianity; Messianic and
Millenarian Beliefs
Cultural Tradition in Southeast Asia
Literature and Arts; Popular Culture; the Relations between Buddhism and Southeast Philosophy; the
Interaction between Elitist and Popular Culture; Folk Culture
European Economic Advances in Southeast Asia
European Contacts and Early Colonization; Colonization by Trade; Dutch Territorial Conquests in Java; the
Expansion of European Control; Britain; French Indochina; USA; Consolidation of Independence in Siam
New National Cultures in Southeast Asia
Early Resistance; The Beginning of Nationalism; Social Change: Education, language and Literacy;
International Influence on the Emergence of Nationalism/ Religion and Nationalism; Secular Nationalism;
Bendict Anderson’s notion of Southeast Asian Cultural Nationalism
Violence and Transition: Occupation, Independence and Cold War
Japanese Occupation; Mobilization; Japanese –Trained Armies; Resistance; Economic and Social Disruption;
the End of Japanese Occupation; The Indochina War; the Agony of Cambodia and Laos; Independence in
Other Countries: Malaysia and Singapore
Economic Development and Democracy: Southeast Asia in Recent decades
Accelerated Economic Growth; the Fifth Little Dragon: Thailand; Authoritarian Rule and Economic
Development; ASEAN; Economic Crisis in the late 2000s, Corruption and Economic Crimes in Philippine;
Singapore’s Competition with Hong Kong as a Financial Center;
Critical Social Issues in Contemporary Southeast Asia
Muslim and Terrorism in Indonesia; Prostitution and AIDs in Thailand; Anti-Chinese sentiment in Malaysia
and Philippine
discussion. They will be occasionally required to participate in fieldwork and explore historical sites in Hong
Kong and mainland China under the guidance of the lecturer.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies; written reports, tests and
Indicative Readings
188
Wolters, O.W., History, Culture, and Religion in Southeast Asia, Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1995.
Christie, Clive J., A Modern History of Southeast Asia: Decolonization, Nationalism and Separatism,
London: Tauris Academic Studies, 1996
References
Antlov, Hans and Tønnession, Stein, eds., Imperial Policy and Southeast Asian Nationalism, Richmond,
Surrey: Curzon Press, 1995.
Hall, D.G.E., A History of South-East Asia, 4th edition, London: Macmillan Press, 1993.
Pluvier, J.M., Southeast Asia from Colonialism to Independence, Kuala Lumpur, Oxford University Press,
1995.
Purcell, V., The Chinese in Southeast Asia, London, Oxford University Press, 1965.
Tate, D. J. M., The Making of Southeast Asia, two vols., Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press, 1997.
Reid, Anthony, Southeast Asia in the Age of Commerce, 1450-1680, two vols., New Haven: Yale
Steinberg, David Joel, In Search of Southeast Asia, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 2000.
Vatikiotis, Richard R.J., Political changes in Southeast Asia, London: Routledge, 1996.
梁英明
東南亞
：《近現代
余邦喻森編
年
定
、
常
（
》北京北京出版
1511-1992）
：
東南亞
：《近代中國與
大學
》廣州
關係史
。
189
1994
社，
出版
：中山大學
年
。
社，
1999
CC3024
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
Knowledge
Japanese III
3
3
Non-science
28 hours of Lecture
CC2031 (Japanese II), or a minimum of 84 hours training on
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This course is a continuation of CC2031 Japanese II. It aims to further develop students’ competence in
acquiring more vocabulary and complicated grammar through more grammatical, reading, writing,
speaking and listening practices of Japanese language.
Learning Outcomes
develop a cumulated vocabulary repertoire of about 1,600 words (including Kanji, commonly used
expressions and phrases).
read and understand longer passages.
write clear and appropriate Japanese sentences with accurate grammar (especially on the three verb
categories and their different verb conjugations) and sentence skills.
speak and use simple and daily used expressions to initiate and respond to different social contexts,
such as requesting, giving permission, declining, and expressing one’s ability and experience, as well
as to engage in different situational conversations.
understand Japanese culture in more depth and relate it to application of the language.
Indicative Contents
Vocabulary
More vocabulary of general terms, adverbs and conjunctions
Grammar
Three categories of verbs and their different conjugations (e.g. dictionary, affirmative, negative and ‘te’ forms); continuous verb form; different verb forms for request, duty, obligation, permission, and
prohibition; expressions to indicate ability and experience; how to connect two or more actions/events,
alternative or indefinite number of actions/events; more particles
Reading /Writing
Read longer passages and understand more elaborated comprehension; use simple and complex
sentences to write short compositions
190
Substitution, transformation and expansion drills; oral response drills; situational conversations; listen
to short passages; conversational practices to initiate and give appropriate responses to different
questions and communicate in different social contexts
Culture / Society
Assessment Approach
language.
Indicative Readings
大
新局出版編輯部『家日語—初級 II』（『みんなの日本語』）台北新局
書
社
大
的
本
：大
書
2002。
，
(First half of the textbook will be used.)
References
スリーエーネットワーク編やさしい作文》台北新局 2003 年
局 2002 年
向日葵出版編日本語 90 日 1 & 2》(90 Days of Japanese Language 1 &2 ) 香港向日葵出版
2002 年
大新出版社《新日本語の基礎》台北：大新出版社，1998 年
日本語ジャーナル編集部日本生活事情》東京株式会社アルク 1993 年
大
書
社
《大
的
本
：大
《
：大
大
書
社
《大
的
本
大
書
社
《大
的
本
書
，
，
，
。
。
：大
書
，
。
：大
。
社
社，
書
書
《
：
。
《
：
191
，
。
CC3025
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
Knowledge
Japanese IV
3
3
Non-science
28 hours of Lecture
CC3024 (Japanese III), or a minimum of 126 hours training on
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This course is a continuation of CC3024 Japanese III. It aims to further develop and strengthen students’
competence in acquiring more vocabulary and a higher level of grammar through more grammatical,
reading, writing, speaking and listening practices of Japanese language.
Learning Outcomes
demonstrate similar language proficiency skills as required by the Japanese-Language Proficiency Test
Level 4 administered by The Japan Foundation and Japan Educational Exchanges and Services;
develop a cumulated vocabulary repertoire of about 2,000 words (including Kanji, commonly used
expressions and phrases);
read and understand longer, more complicated passages;
write clear and appropriate Japanese sentences using more complicated grammatical elements, accurate
grammar, and varied sentence skills;
speak and utilize commonly used expressions to initiate and respond to different social contexts,
especially exhibiting the ability to converse in appropriate stylistic registers; and
understand Japanese culture in more depth and relate it to application of the language.
Indicative Contents
Vocabulary
More vocabulary of general terms, adverbs and conjunctions.
Grammar
Two levels of speech (polite style verb form vs. plain style verb form) and their different linguistic
expressions / verb conjugations; verbs of quoting and telling what one thinks; expressions of guessing;
verbs of giving and receiving objects and acts; conditional expressions and verb forms; using a simple
sentence as a noun modifier to form complex sentences; more particles.
Reading / Writing
192
Read longer passages and understand more complicated comprehension; use a variety of short and
complex sentence structures to write longer compositions.
Substitution, transformation and expansion drills; oral response drills; situational conversations; listen
to longer passages; conversational practices to initiate and give appropriate responses to different
questions and communicate in different social contexts by using appropriate stylistic registers.
Culture / Society
Selected topics on Japanese culture and society.
Assessment Approach
language.
Indicative Reading
新局出版編輯部家日語—初級 II》『みんなの日語』台北
年
大
書
社
《大
的
本
（
本
）
：大
(Second half of the textbook will be used.)
新局 2002
書
，
。
新局出版編輯部家日語—初級 ( 讀篇)》台北新局 2004 年
スリーエーネットワーク編やさしい》台北新局 2003 年
新局出版編輯部家日語—初級 I, II (句型冊 )》台北新局 2003 年
新局出版編輯部家日語—初級 I, II ( C 会話イラストシート )》台北新
局 2002 年
向日葵出版編日語 90 日 & 2》(90 Days of Japanese Language & 2 ) 香港向日葵出版
2002 年
新出版新日語の》台北新局 998 年
日語ジャーナル編集部日活情》東京株会アルク 993 年
References
大
書
社
《大
的
本
《
作文
大
書
社
《大
的
本
大
書
社
《大
的
本
書
，
。
社
《
本
本
：大
：大
書
書
，
。
。
練習
練習
，
：大
書
、
1
社《
本
本
1
基礎
：大
《
事
本生
書
，1
：
：
193
。
式
社
。
：大
。
大
，
，1
。
社，
中國電影與小說 Chinese Film and Fiction
CC3026
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
學習模式
3
3
非科學
中文（普通話或粵語）
14 小時導修課
(但因本課程涉及較多的電影放映，可將二者結合，成爲每周 3
小時的授課與導修同時進行的課程）
無
50%課堂習作
50%期終考試
評估方法
科目目標
紹
陸香港台灣電影說
改編
採案
對電影說藝特色
使深
狀態情
空
變遷
藉改說為電影劇
電影說
字影像
對
立
我終甚裨益
本科目主要介
中國（大
式，通過
與小
異中的
。同學可
學理解文
、
術
）
的評介，
寫小
，理解
與小
之間的
同學
入了解社會
關係。課程
本的過程，結合所獲
的能力，
學習成果
學生之獨
思考及自
、人
與小
生學習
有
用個
差
討論的方
世故在時
與文化
互動的知識，可以訓練同
。
應
學生在完成此科目後，
、
各自
能：
電影說特色優
電影說叙
藝特色
電影改編說失
析空差
差對電影改編說影響
如何流說改編為構嚴謹電影劇
增對字語言影像語言欣賞反
了解
與小
掌握
與小
探討
分
掌握
的得
異、文化
將
點；
事方式的
小
時
強
各自的
術
；
異
小
行小
結
及
的
文
；
的
；
的
和
本；
思能力。
電影與小說導論
電影說藝特色
電影改編說
現代小說的電影改編
五反如魯迅〈祝福〉桑弧導演電影魯迅〈阿 Q 正〉岑範導演電影
性如茅盾〈林家鋪子〉華導演電影沈〈蕭蕭〉謝飛導演湘女蕭
蕭》
華麗蒼凉如張愛玲〈紅玫瑰玫瑰〉錦鵬導演電影張愛玲〈色戒〉李安導
演電影
與小
中國
的
術
小
四的
思：
的歷史簡介
與
同名
；
傳
與
同名
等；
現實與人
與
：
：
與水
與白
同名
與關
同名
194
；
從文
同名
與
；
《
與
當代小說的電影改編
如施祥〈
太陽〉張藝謀
都少》鮑十〈紀念〉張藝謀
鄉村
導演我父親母親》
殘酷青春如王朔〈物凶猛〉姜導演陽光燦爛日子》
影像纏綿如李碧華青蛇》徐克導演電影李碧華霸王別姬》凱歌導演
電影
如曹禺〈雷雨〉話劇張藝謀導演滿城盡帶黃甲》
台灣鄉土如黃春明〈兒子玩偶〉侯孝賢導演電影
活漫畫如頭字 D》
下鐵》
影評及電影劇本創作
影評及電影劇本創作
如何影
電影劇創
原
如何說改編為電影劇
劇遇困難決
生
的律動：
《
天上有個
的
：
動
中
：
《
與
的
：
動的
：
撰寫
（
《
同名
）與
的大
《
文
不能
；
與
的
；
《
與陳
《
與
、《地
同名
金
同名
等
評
本
作的基本
理
將小
撰寫
《一個
文
與
歷史與現實：
與
的
本
本所
及其解
方法
教學方法
授
如電影說審美特性電影
改編
閱讀說
放映電影節選便
導修須做
亦須影電影劇創
影改編劇
講
基礎知識，
本，課堂
學
了解
與小
的
，方
進行二者比較；同學參與課堂討論，
評和
評估方法
本的
，
與文學之間的
作方法，學會寫作
綜採
本課程的評核將
合
評、
期
用個人習作、小組報告、
關係等；同學課外
課上
小
文
課堂小組報告；同
本。
改編短篇說為劇
中測驗、
小
本與
期末
考試的形
式。
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
須立影篇
須
任何篇短篇說改為電影劇
口頭
須析任何套改編說電影案
個人習作：同學
獨
小組習作：同學
以小組合作的形式，將
期
期末
小組報告：
撰寫
評一
報告的形式，
分
一
一
小
自小
寫
的
本
個
。
中測驗
考試
指定課本
涉
本科目
及的參考材
料廣泛無指
較
，
定課本。
David Bordwell & Kristin Thompson, Film Art: An Introduction. N.Y.: McGraw-Hill Inc., (latest ed.).
曹禺電影劇》北京花藝出版，最新版。
季華編
電影》下北京
電影出版，最新版。
：《
程
主
本
：《中國
，
：
山文
發展史
（上、
社
），
195
：中國
社
焦雄屏
戴錦華
王海洲
于艾平
夏衍
李道新
電影對話》台北流出版，最新版。
霧景電影 1978－1998》北京北京出版，最新版。
編像
港台電影》北京
電影出版，最新版。
電影詩劇創技巧案例》北京北京廣播院出版，最新版。
電影劇創幾問題》海復旦出版，最新版。
電影》北京北京出版，最新版。
：《風雲際會
——與當代中國
：《
：中國
主
中風
：《鏡
：《
：《
：
本
：《中國
文化
與文化：
本
作
作
個
文化史
，
，上
，
，
研究
與
：
：遠
，
，
：
：
社
社
社
社
學
大學
196
大學
：中國
：
大學
社
社
CC3027
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
3
3
Non-science
English and Chinese
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Seminar
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
This course equips students with discourse analytical skills in rhetoric that are necessary for the
understanding of popular cultures. Students will study how social symbols are used in music and movie to
create, maintain or oppose social meanings and to reflect and sustain social identities and ideologies of
youths.
Learning Outcomes
define popular culture.
analyse cultural texts of music and movie.
recognize and appreciate the social influences of popular cultures on youth identities and ideologies.
compare popular cultures of US and HK.
Indicative Contents
Discourse analysis: An introduction
Textual Analysis ; Critical studies.
Popular cultures
Definition of culture (hierarchy, representation, gender roles, social identities, social classes, social
ideologies); Definition of popular cultures; Definition of youth cultures; Media Determinism.
Popular music
Emotions and passions; Sociology of consumption; Discourse patterns of lyrics and cultures;
Performer's iconography; Influence of popular music on youth identities and ideologies; Historical and
cultural contexts of popular music of US and HK: A comparison.
Movies
Movie narratives, genres and cultures; Visual communication in movies and cultures; Influence of
movie on youth identities and ideologies; Historical and cultural contexts of movie of US and HK: A
comparison.
197
The relationship of cultures and other popular media
e.g. Comics, television, print media, etc.
Lectures focus on the understanding of popular cultures with simple textual analyses. Relevant examples
will be used for explanation. Class activities such as discussions will be arranged occasionally.
In tutorials, students will apply simple discourse analysis skills to analyze different cultural texts under
guidance.
Assessment Approach
100% coursework approach is adopted. To foster students’ learning in this subject, students are required to
conduct a number of analyses of different cultural texts of music and movie throughout the course.
A variety of coursework assessment tools will be used, including test, individual case analysis and report,
and group projects & presentations designed to develop and assess students' achievement of the subject
expected learning outcomes.
Indicative Readings
Brummett, Barry. Rhetoric in Popular Culture (2nd Edition). US: Sage Publication (latest ed.).
References
Brummett, Barry. 2004. Rhetorical dimensions of popular culture. Tuscaloosa : University of Alabama
Press (latest ed.).
Meister, Mark & M Japp, Phyllis (Editors). Enviropop: Studies in environmental rhetoric and popular
culture. Westport, Conn.: Praeger (latest ed.).
Root, Robert L. The Rhetorics of Popular Culture: Advertising, Advocacy, and Entertainment. New York:
Greenwood Press (latest ed.).
Storey, John. Cultural Theory and Popular Culture: An Introduction. US: University of Georgia Press
(latest ed.).
Berger, Arthur Asa. Narrative In Popular Culture, Media, and Everyday Life. US: Sage Publications
(latest ed.).
Sklar, Robert. Movie Made America: A Cultural History of American Movies. US: Random House (latest
ed.).
鴻：《電影文化,理論和批判》香港：次
史文
，
公司，最新版。
文化有限
Other references: Current music and movie clips from US and HK
198
CC3028
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
3
3
Non-science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Seminar
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This course will discuss a cluster of major issues within the field of applied ethics. This includes ethical
problems in relation to abortion, euthanasia, animal ethics, starvation and the duty of the affluent countries
to relieve the suffering of those who are in poor countries under a global context, etc. In addition, we will
provide an introduction to the key moral theories used in applied ethics, and consider how such theories
help in making ethical judgments about the problems encountered in the above aspects.
Learning Outcomes:
develop a working knowledge of basic moral principles and theories, and the ability to diagnose moral
disagreements in relation to common issues in applied ethics.
critically reflect on the various strengths and weaknesses of different approaches to an ethical
problem.
appreciate the depth of moral dilemmas and understand the possibility that the dilemmas can be
resolved differently.
evaluate the extent to which different moral theories can help us understand the emerging
problems that we face as moral agents in an increasingly complex society.
Indicative Contents
Abortion
Explain the difference between a person and a human organism. Should we regard all fetuses as
persons? Might abortion be still morally permissible if we supposed that fetuses were persons?
Euthanasia
Explain the distinction between killing and letting die. Elaborate how such a distinction will become
morally significant in the case of euthanasia (active and passive euthanasia).
Animals
Explore the ethical obligations that human beings have towards animals. How this understanding will
affect the way, for instance, that factory farming and the use of animals in medical research might be
carried out. This will also have implication on the issue of food ethics.
199
Starvation & Global Responsibility
A discussion of the moral relation between agents in rich countries and the starving people who situate
far away from them. Investigate into the moral significance, if any, of national boundaries in the age of
globalization.
Primary focuses will be placed on discussion in lectures and tutorial. While most of the learning materials
will be in written form, as we elaborate the subjective nature of the moral issues, we will from time to time
use documentaries, films, and other media to stimulate students’ awareness of the matter.
While introducing the different moral positions, we will deliberately leave rooms for students to make their
own judgment on how the respective moral dilemmas should be resolved. So, students are expected to take
an active role in class discussion and in understanding the various concerns of the moral problems.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentation, case studies, written reports and
examinations. They will be designed to assess students’ ability to carry out logical analysis of the various
practical moral matters.
Indicative Reading
Helga Kuhse and Peter Singer (eds) Bioethics: an anthology. Oxford, Blackwell, (latest ed.).
Peter Singer, Practical Ethics. Cambridge, (latest ed.).
Peter Singer, Applied Ethics. Oxford University Press, (latest ed.).
Singer’s Websites: http://www.utilitarian.net/singer/
Ethics Update: http://ethics.sandiego.edu/Applied/
200
CC3029
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
3
3
Non-science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Seminar
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
The course studies the development of Western philosophy from Descartes to Hume. It focuses on the two
major philosophical movements of the period, namely Rationalism and Empiricism.
In the course, the basic ideas, main themes and central arguments of the major philosophers of modern
Western philosophy are examined and their development are traced so that students are able to acquire a
historical understanding of how central problems of contemporary philosophy have emerged out of the new
orientation of thought that took place in the 17th Century.
Learning Outcomes:
develop a basic knowledge of historical background of modernity.
critically reflect on the various strengths and weaknesses of philosophical theories of Rationalism
and Empiricism.
evaluate the extent to which different theories of modern philosophers can help us understand the
complex situation of our modern society.
Indicative Contents
Introduction
Philosophy and the Modern World
What is Rationalism and Empiricism?
Rationalism
Descartes’ Project
Descartes’ I think therefore I am
Cartesian Dualism
Spinoza’s God as Nature
Spinoza’s Ethics
Leibniz’s Theory of Proposition
Leibniz’s Monadology
Empiricism
Locke on Human Knowledge and Experience
Locke’s Political Philosophy
201
Berkeley’s Idealism
Hume’s Skepticism
Hume on Ethics and Feelings
Basic concepts and theories will be introduced in lectures, while original texts by various modern
philosophers will be discussed in tutorials. Students will be encouraged to apply what their knowledge of
the main issues and various theories in modern philosophy to understand our contemporary world.
Indicative Readings
Cahn, Steven M. ed., Classics of Western Philosophy, 5th edn., Indianapolis: Hackett Publishing
Company (latest ed.).
Copleston, F. C., A History of Philosophy Vol. IV-VII, New York: Image Books (latest ed.).
Russell, B., A History of Western Philosophy (latest ed.).
Laurence BonJour, Ann Baker (ed.), Philosophical Problems: An Annotated Anthology, 2/E, Longman
(latest ed.).
Other suggested readings
Flew, Antony, An Introduction to Western Philosophy, Thames and Hudson (latest ed.).
Kenny, Anthony, The Oxford History of Western Philosophy, Oxford (latest ed.).
Magee, Bryan, The Great Philosophers-An Introduction To Western Philosophy, Oxford (latest ed.).
Solomon, R. C. and Kathleen M. Higgins, A Short History of Philosophy, Oxford (latest ed.).
202
香港小說選讀 Selected Readings of Hong Kong Fiction
CC3030
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
修讀條件
評估方法
3
3
非科學
14 小時導修課
無
60%課堂習作
40%期終考試
課程目標
透
授導修
心活
身邊
為
說特色創說創說困難
本科目
過課堂講
關
個體生
小
的
、
，
作小
對香港說
創說更
練習及分組習作的方式，引發同學
及社會的關係，並以
，領會
的人、事
作小
的
基礎，
小
作小
使們更
香港
及文化的興趣，
。同學
他
可以運用課堂學習
及其有趣的地方。
學習成果
應
香港說貌
香港說土
價香港說表家品
效
閱讀
提高對
對
創說
提升批判創造性維
能：
認識
小
的面
；
了解
小
與本
文化的關係；
認識及評
有
小
運用各種
加強
的代
作
和作
文本的方法，
中文的運用，
思考及
作小
思
品鑑賞
；
文學作
的
能力；
；
的能力。
過客本土：
過客本土：南來文人及實驗小說
選
如劉鬯酒徒》選段
亂》曹聚仁酒店》選段
講武論俠：
講武論俠：香港的武俠小說
選
如庸倚屠龍記》選段笑傲江湖》選段鹿鼎記》選
段梁羽龍虎鬥京華》選段
髮魔女》選段
談情說愛：
談情說愛：香港的言情小說
香港的言情小說
選
如李碧華霸王別姬》選段胭脂扣》選段亦舒她煙花寂寞》
選段張嫺麵包樹女》選段三 A Cup 女》選段
殖民與後殖民：
殖民與後殖民：香港身份的思考與追尋
選
如我城》選段春》肥土鎮灰欄記》也斯殖民食物
愛情》島陸》選段
可
可
用文本：
用文本：
）、
以
金
《
《
天
生《
可
用文本：
（
），
可
用文本：
、《
（
（
（
《
小
《
（
（
、
人
《
）、《
）、《白
（
上的
西西《
和大
）、《動
（
傳
（
）、《
（
）、《
）、《
）等。
203
望
（
、《
（
個
）等。
）、《
（
）等。
）、
的
《
人
，
（
比
）等。
《後
與
權在誰手：
權在誰手：歷史的追跡
選
如董啟章永街》安卓珍》選段黃碧失城》選
段
烈女》選段桃花紅》
小說創作原理
說創
原說素
說物情節
說真
虛構
可
用文本：
）、《
學習小
《
圖
（
興衰史
、《
）、《
作的基本
實與
盛
理：小
尼
（
）、
雲《
（
等。
的
材；小
的人
、
和環境；小
的
。
閱讀評論選讀文本
劉鬯對倒》
庸雪飛狐》
哀悼乳房》
李碧華青蛇》
以
金
《
《
山
西西《
《
教學方法
授閱讀前授題
泛閱讀亦就別細讀
創說
主要有知識講
，
要
評估方法
及
個
合
撰寫一
撰寫一
閱讀
證
相關的知識，以及
作小
，從實踐中所
既廣
文本的各種方法。同學
所學。
期
閱讀
創說期末
則說
篇短篇說
須析任何香港說
用小組報告、
個人習作二：同學
期
期末
與課
探究，並
個人習作一：同學
小組報告：
者傳
文本作
綜採
須
須
口頭
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
實踐。
小
中測驗、
評論、
作小
與
考試的形式。
評論
小
報告的形式，
分
一本
小
中測驗
考試
指定課本
涉
本科目
及的參考材
料廣泛無指
較
，
定課本。
盤說創》北東股份公司，最新版。
梁秉鈞香港流》香港三店，最新版。
黃繼持盧瑋鑾鄭樹森編追跡香港》香港牛津出版，最新版。
球
香港李碧華》北麥田出版，最新版。
碧月
說創
技巧》北秀威資訊技股份公司，最新版。
羅
：《小
作論
：《
的
、
、
陳國
：《文學
陳
：《小
，臺
：
大圖書
行文化
，
：
聯書
：《
與
作的方法與
有限
文學
，臺
，
：
，臺
：
大學
社
：
204
科
有限
社
要
果安
說創
碩經典製造
盧瑋鑾編著香港
許子東香港短篇
王敬
說創
陳
陳
：《小
：《
：《
：《
之：《小
藝
庸
散
說初
稿》
智慧》長沙南出版，最新版。
政治》桂林市廣出版，最新版。
》香港商印館，最新版。
》香港
公司，最新版。
哈爾濱黑龍江民出版，最新版。
作的
術與
，
：金
研究的文化
：中
大學
，
文學
步
，
：
小
探
，
：天地圖書有限
作論
，
：
務
：
社
西大學
書
人
205
社
社
傳統東方智慧 Wisdom in Eastern Tradition
CC3031
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
教學模式
修讀條件
評估方法
3
3
非科學
14 小時導修課
無
60%課堂習作
40%期終考試
課程目標
課程目標
紹東
來影響深廣泛幾
想包括儒家道家佛
家旁家兵家首闡明這東
哲
宗
想流派衝突
融促
想演變
而說明這智慧如何塑造東
對
產
儒道佛三家
表物概
念
注權利家兵家影響
包括閱讀原
典梳概念
詮釋批掘智慧超越空睿注培養析織
表達
本課程介
，並
與討論
及法
思
方自中國先秦以
和
，
先
之間的
、互動與
文化的發展，和
現代人所能
和主要理論，兼及
、
及
理
遠
些
合所
的
個主要思
方傳統中主要的
成的思
術實
，以及理論
與
的法
和
評，發
一些有
傳統
、
、
觀地瞭解
強
的主要代
歷史時
的
見，並
掌握
、
掌握法
、
和
探討和
能：
方傳統
傳統義理及
的
文
和
的理解和
；
思能力；
義理的基本內容及其歷史發展；
一些重要理論的意義；
些傳統
在現代人生和社會中可能有的意義和
儒家
儒家孔子孟子荀子
朝儒家宋明儒家想
儒家想東亞明造影響
道家
道家老子莊子
魏晉玄想
道家想東亞明造影響
先秦
：
漢
、
和
思
先秦
的思
在
文
：
、
學的思
思
在
、
中
的基本理論
發展
成的
的基本理論
發展
文
中
成的
206
了
人
方
、基本
力的理論。學術訓練的重點
學習成果
應
宏
東智慧特質長處
增對
原典獻
反
儒道佛三家
家兵家
欣賞這智慧
、
些傳統
的能力。
、
教理論的基本內容，以及各
過程，從
生的意義。課程重點研究
重
傳統，
學理論和
貢獻
。
意
分
、組
佛家
印度原始佛
佛
特色
佛亞洲播
東
法家和兵家
韓非子家想綱
孫子兵想綱
教的基本理論
中國
學在
明造影響
學的發展及其
的傳
的法
，及其在
思
法思
中
成的
要
要
教學方法
集
反省
鞏固
本課程理論與實踐並重。課堂
口頭
方以至世界文
題
中講解與課
相關的
概念
議題
和討論，並引入社會時事
組討論和
所學。
評估方法
報告的方式，以
綜採
須讀
析提某智慧
1.
2.
3.
4.
合
個人習作：同學
期
期末
小組報告：分
撰寫
課堂
課
學生
以作理論
用的
相關的文
試。
會
，
過小
期末
中測驗與
考試的形式。
書報告
及過的
傳統及其現代意義
中測驗
考試
牟宗三
哲
張麗珠
哲
讀藉包括
經》韓非子》
研
期
用個人習作、小組報告、
導修為提供
獻
應嘗亦透
和理論，
務求學生在理解的基礎上進行
十》台灣
局，最新版。
三十》台灣仁局，最新版。
語》孟子》老子》莊子》
孫子兵》
：《中國
學
：《中國
學史
古
、《
：《論
九講
、《
，
講
、《
：學生書
，
：里
、《
書
、《
法
207
若波多心經》六祖壇
、《般
羅密
、《
CC3121
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Business Environment in China
3
3
Non-Science
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims at providing students with a comprehensive view of the general business environment
viz. political, infrastructural, legal, institutional, economic, cultural and social conditions in the Chinese
mainland. As a result, students are able to analyse and understand such important variables which are
essential and crucial for investors in making decisions and managing their investment and business
activities in China.
Learning Outcomes
Appreciate the range of factors that would determine the business environment in China.
Understand how each of the following factors affects China’s business environment: political factors,
legal and other institutional factors, economic factors, cultural and social factors.
Appraise the issues relating to the analysis of business environment in China.
Apply the relevant knowledge to further their understanding and in making decision in the business
activities in China.
Indicative Contents
Business Environment
Concept of business environment; Make up of business environment.
Organisation and internal environment
Firms in China; Types of business organisation; Organisation objectives; Internal environment.
Elements of the external business environment
Political, economic, and legal environment in China; Social, cultural and demographic issues in China.
China and the Global Business Environment
International business environment; Competitiveness environment; China’s Entry into the WTO and
Implications.
208
Theories, concepts, basic facts and updates on latest developments will be delivered in lectures. In the
tutorials, students will be encouraged to apply what they have learnt in the lectures and from readings to
analyse the current issues and cases that are related to China’s business environment through activities such
as group discussions, debates and presentations. The medium of instruction will be English, supplemented
by Chinese for terms used in China.
Assessment Approach
examination, to develop and assess the critical thinking as well as the analytical and communication skills.
Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process through reading articles, doing
project and conducting self-study.
Indicative Readings
Zhou Li Nong: China Business. Prentice Hall (latest edition).
References
Fumio Itoh (ed.). China in the Twenty-first Century: Politics, economy, and society. Tokyo; New York:
United Nations University Press, 1997.
Henry C. Steele and Oliver H.M. Yau. China business: Challenges in the 21st century. Hong Kong:
Chinese University Press, 2000.
Palmer A., and Hartley B., The Business Environment, McGraw Hill (latest ed.).
209
CC3122
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
China’s Economy
3
3
Non-Science
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims at providing students with concepts for understanding the economy of China since 1949,
with emphasis on its post 1978 reform period. Students are expected to explain why China was successful
in maintaining a high economic growth in the past two decades. Moreover, they will be able to analyse the
role of China in the world today and identify challenges China will be facing in the future. Therefore,
studying this subject will help develop students’ analytical skills and critical thinking in their life-long
learning.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the historical background of China’s economic development
Recognise China’s achievements and setbacks in its economic performance since economic reforms
Identify the range of factors that would determine economic performance in China and analyse how
various factors affect China’s overall economic performance
Review and generalise economic developments in important sectors in China
Compare economic developments in major economic regions in China
Identify and evaluate the opportunities and challenges resulting from China’s entry into the WTO
Indicative Contents
History of the Development of China’s Economy
Lessons from history; Experiments in economic policies and political upheavals; Economic Reforms
since Deng’s open door policy; Future reforms: problems and prospects.
China’s Macroeconomy: Overview
Growth; Economic fluctuations; Economic policies; Institutional factors affecting the macroeconomy;
Political movements, power struggles and the macroeconomy.
Topics in China’s Economic Developments
China and the world economy; Investment: domestic and foreign; Consumption; Demographics and
human capital; Institutional developments.
Regional Differences in Economic Development
Individual Sectors
210
Automobile Industry; Retail & Consumer Product Industry; Telecommunication Industry; Banking and
financial system.
WTO: Changes and issues
Well designed questions covering the learning outcomes will be asked to raise students’ interest and road
map will be used to get students prepared for the lecture. The same set of questions will be asked at the end
of the lecture to ensure the learning outcomes have been achieved. Occasional problem-based learning
activities related to current economic issues happened in China might be arranged to encourage student
participation and critical thinking.
Students are required to keep on reading news and they need to explain and comment on their news cutting
during the tutorials. It can reinforce their understanding by applying the knowledge they have learnt and
strengthen their communication skills. Activities such as group discussions, debates and presentations will
also be arranged for them to analyse the current issues in China’s economy.
Assessment Approach
Effective assessment tools will be used, including debates, job interviews, case studies, presentations,
written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical
and communication skills. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process through
reading articles, doing project and conducting self-study.
Indicative Readings
There is no prescribed textbook. This is a dynamic topic mainly involving current issues. Lecture summary
and supplementary notes will be distributed from time to time.
References
Chow, Gregory C. China’s Economic Transformation. Malden, Mass.: Blackwell Publishers (latest ed.).
Robert F.Ash and Y.Y. Kueh, The Chinese Economy Under Deng Xiaoping. Oxford University Press
(latest ed.).
資訊
Useful Websites
http://www.chinainfobank.com (中國
)
行
http://www.mofcom.gov.cn (Ministry of Commerce of the People’s PRC)
http://www.tdctrade.com (Trade Development Council)
http://www.wto.org (World Trade Organization)
http://www.cei.gov.cn (China Economic Information)
http://www.stats.gov.cn (National Bureau of Statistics)
211
http://www.chinadaily.com (China Daily)
http://english.peopledaily.com.cn (People’s Daily)
http://wwwiwep.rog.cn (Institute of World Economics and Politics)
Journals, Periodicals
China Business Review
China Economic Review
The China Quarterly
212
商貿普通話 Business Putonghua
CC3129
程度
學分
學科性質
教學語言
學習模式
評估方法
3
3
非科學
普通話
14 小時導修課
CC2012 初級普通話或相關普通話課程（須出示證書正本）
60% 課堂習作
40% 期終考試
課程目的
根據
CC20 2 初級普話
建立普話
語拼音技巧,
語拼音
廣泛應商情景語彙話期
達到高準普話表
達
使們來工
更好應
普話說話技巧
也助們達終身
標
學生在
1
運用漢
通
的能力，並
能力，
他
學習的目
。
在將
學習目的
課程中所
地
語拼音
普話
廣泛應商
闆客戶商
商演
也增
強化漢
通
地
用
、
務
需，
能
，
用所學的
通
通
務
訓練、
及會
業
通
，
學生
、代理等各方進行有
講、
和
強學生的自
的
一個
，同時
水
有
的
他
通
成
與
的
比，
學生能
的
通
並
，
將
的
通
作的
環境並能以
的
通
與
通。
學生能學習
有關的
以
將
作所需及學習所
。
強化練習及辨
訓練
訓練
通
、
通
法的
與
比及
務
及會
方式、
，
其
、合同、
關
介
、代理的會
務文
推
及介
作環境介
及
作
驗分
面試
務
學生將在課程中強化
望學生能
訓練：
課程內容
語拼音
音
普話正音
普話辭彙語
規範表達
普話廣州話對
翻譯
商情景語彙
話尤是於產品紹
付款
保險
索賠
話
商
章朗讀
產品銷
紹
工
紹工經享
技巧
商演
投資析市場營銷析
商談判
漢
知識和漢
的能力。
、
學習
地
通
及會
下
普話正音
普話廣州話對使
說純正普話擁
情景語彙話使熟悉來工語言
標準普話老
夥伴
效溝
談判投訴技巧使
到
技巧應付來工
信
練習及
有自學
的
務
作的環境中
在完成本課程後，學生將獲得以
用
講（
分
、
分
等）
務
213
及推
銷
、定
價訂貨傭裝條件包裝
、
、
金、
運
、
、
商投訴
教學模式
集授商情景語彙話
巧亦
普話辭彙語規範表達
爲
導修集
廣州話普話對譯說話
紹工
享工經
模
辯爲
務
主講課
，
中教
會討論
組討論
及會
通
、
模
，以及講解面試、
法的
。教學
商演
務
商談判商投訴技
授錄音聆聽角色扮演
講、
式以課本教
務
和
、
務
的
、
、小
主。
課
中訓練
一般
論和
務
與
通
作環境及分
論
作
、
練習、漢
驗。教學
語拼音
商
普話正音
亦
章朗讀角色扮演
強化練習及
式將以課堂練習、
務文
通
訓練，
、
會介
、小組討
主。
評估形式
連續
評估形式有兩種：
評估和
期終。
考試
連續包括
(i) 一次個人口語評估：將以個人演講的方式，進行一次不少於 5 分鐘的商務演講。內容可
自行選擇產品介紹，市場投資分析或市場營銷分析等。
(ii) 一次小組口語評估: 學員將分為四人一組，自選題目，進行不少於 0 分鐘的商務
談判情景會話。
(iii) 一次課堂測驗：內容包括漢語拼音辨音；漢語拼音與詞語及句子的互相譯寫；語方言詞
語、短句與普通話的對譯等形式。
(iv) 期末考試分口試和筆試兩次進行。
評估
：
1
課本
香港工
語
心編
(2005 年 9 月初版 2007 年 9 月再版)
理
大學中國
文教學中
商貿普話》冊附多媒光碟香港華局
寫：《
通
（上
）（
體
）
：中
書
、
參考書
院語言詞典編輯室編
語詞典》第五版
字修訂 (2005 年 6 月) 北京商印館或
繁字版 (200 年 7 月) 香港商印館
曾子凡編著廣州話普話口語詞對譯手冊》香港三店(香港) 公司 2002 年 7 月
電腦光碟版
李明石佩
語普話語音正》北京北京語言
出版 998 年
施仲謀編著廣州話普話語音對照手冊》香港華局公司 986 年
曾子凡編著香港說普話》香港三店(香港) 公司 99 年
中國社會科學
簡體
體
研究所
：《現代漢
本
本
：
1
：
：《
務
務
（
）
書
書
通
：
聯書
有限
（
，
）。
、
文：《漢
通
：《
：《
辨
：
通
人學
文化大學
：
通
：
聯書
214
風書
有限
有限
社，1
。
，1
，1
1
。
。
CC3135
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Assessment
3
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
The aim of this subject is to provide students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding
of inventory and warehousing management knowledge and principles. This subject emphasises the
importance of the roles and functions of inventory and warehousing operations in logistics and supply
chain management. This subject will also provide students with the knowledge and skills that are necessary
for the design and management of warehousing operations.
Learning Outcomes
recognise the importance of optimum inventory and efficient warehousing management in business
appreciate cargo storage and materials handling systems which provide a good academic and
vocational foundation for a career in related fields
present inventory and warehousing issues in an integrated logistics flow which reflects sound business
practices
develop approaches to define, analyse and solve inventory and warehousing problems
Indicative Contents
Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management
Importance of inventory management; Types of inventories; Types and functions of
warehouse.
Materials Handling
Materials handling systems and objectives; Types of handling equipment; Advantages and limitations
of different handling equipment; Selection of the most appropriate equipment in specific situations.
Inventory Strategy and Management
Objectives of inventory management; Inventory costs; Economic order quantity (EOQ);
Fixed order quantity and fixed order cycle inventory control; Inventory models;
management concept and practice: JIT, MRP, DRP.
Inventory
Warehousing Operations and Management
Objectives of warehousing management; Warehouse layout and design; Physical control and security;
Automation and IT systems in warehousing.
215
Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of key inventory, materials handling and warehousing
management concepts and principles. Occasional corporation visits and videos might be arranged to
facilitate students’ learning.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of concepts taught in lectures
and apply the knowledge and principles in practical situations.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, case studies, individual and group
projects and presentations, term tests and an examination to develop and assess students’ analytical skills
and oral/written communication skills.
Indicative Readings
Arnold, J.R. Tony and Chapman, Stephen N. Introduction to Materials Management. Prentice-Hall. (latest
ed.).
References
Ackerman, K. B. Practical Handbook of Warehousing. Chapman & Hall, NY. (latest ed.).
Ballou, R. H. Business Logistics/Supply Chain Management. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Bloomberg, D. J., Lemay, S. and Hanna, J. B. Logistics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Bowersox, Closs, Cooper. Supply Chain Logistics Management. McGraw-Hill Irwin. (latest ed.).
Mulcahy, D. E. Warehouse Distribution and Operations Handbook. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Muller, M. Essentials of Inventory Management. New York: American Management Association. (latest
ed.).
Murphy, P.R. and Wood, D.F. Contemporary Logistics. Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ. (latest ed.).
Recommended Journals
Business Logistics
Logistics Management
E Logistics World (www.elogisticsworld.com )
International Journal of Logistics Management (www.ijlm.org)
Logistics World (www.logisticsworld.com )
216
CC3143
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management
3
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with fundamental understanding of principles, concepts and
application of integrated logistics and supply chain management in the business context. It is also designed
to equip students with the necessary skills and techniques for coping with logistics and supply chain
challenges and problems in an ever-changing business environment. Critical thinking and analytical skills
development are accomplished through lectures, case studies and experiential learning. This subject helps
students to develop the ability and knowledge in logistics and supply chain which will prepare them for
further studies, employment and life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
recognise the role and structure of logistics and supply chains in the business context
integrate knowledge and skills in logistics and supply chain operations across a wide range of business
domains and levels
appreciate the importance of effective and efficient utilization of information technology for logistics
and supply chain management
identify appropriate procurement strategies and courses of action at the functional and business levels
evaluate the functions and performances of various domestic and international transportation systems
utilise both quantitative (e.g. Economic Order Quantities) and qualitative techniques (e.g. Just In Time
strategy) to design an appropriate inventory management strategy
This subject enhances students’ professional competence and develops their all-roundedness on logistics
and supply chain operations, critical thinking and problem-solving skills.
Indicative Contents
Role of Logistics and Supply Chain in the Economy and Organisation
What logistics and supply chain are; Macro and micro logistics; Global logistics; Value-added role of
logistics / supply chain, supply chain relationships; Problem and challenges facing supply chain
managers.
Demand Management
Customer demand and services; Order fulfilment.
Procurement Management
217
Role and function of procurement, e-procurement; Procurement strategies.
Reasons for holding inventory; Inventory costs; Inventory decision making; Role and functions of
warehousing; Material handling; Packaging.
Logistics Information System
E-logistics; Radio frequency and barcode technologies; Vendor Managed System (VMI).
Transportation and Distribution Management
Intermodalism (air/sea/road/rail and pipeline transportation); Vehicle routing and scheduling; Cargo
distribution management.
Business Logistics / Supply Chain Strategy
Outsourcing; Third-party logistics providers; Strategic alliances.
Interactive lectures are specifically designed to introduce key concepts, roles and functions of logistics and
supply chain operations coupled with specific reference to current and global issues. Case studies and
problem-based learning activities may also be arranged to encourage student participation and higher order
thinking.
Student-centred tutorials are developed to strengthen students’ understanding of the knowledge covered in
lectures. A variety of effective teaching tools such as case studies on current issues with discussion forums,
group presentations of task-based exercises and company visits will be used throughout students’ learning
pathway.
Assessment Approach
Effective assessment tools, including presentations, reflective journals, objective tests, business case
studies, projects, End-of-Chapter type problems, portfolio and examinations will be adopted to develop and
polish student’s critical thinking, analytical skills, teamwork and communication skills.
Indicative Readings
Donalds, W. Logistics: An Introduction to Supply Chain Management. Palgrave Macmillan. (latest ed.).
References
Ballou, R. H. Business Logistics/Supply Chain Management and Logware CD Package. Prentice Hall.
(latest ed.).
Bloomberg, D., Lemay, S. and Hanna, J. B. Logistics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Bowersox, Closs, Cooper. Supply Chain Logistics Management. McGraw-Hill Irwin. (latest ed.).
Bowersox, D. J. and Closs, D. J. Logistics Management – The integrated supply chain process. McGrawHill International Edition. (latest ed.).
Coyle, Bardi, Langley. The Management of Business Logistics – A supply chain perspective. Thomson,
218
South-Western. (latest ed.).
Handfield, R. B. and Nicholas, Ernest L. JR. Introduction to Supply Chain Management. Prentice Hall.
(latest ed.).
Kaminsky and Simchi-levi. Designing and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, strategies and case
studies. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Martin, C. Logistics and Supply Chain Management. Financial Times, Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Recommended Journals
Business Logistics
Logistics Management
Logistics and Transport Focus
E Logistics World (www.elogisticsworld.com )
International Journal of Logistics Management (www.ijlm.org)
Logistics News Journal (www.logisticsnews.com)
Logistics World (www.logisticsworld.com )
Supply Management (www.supplymanagement.com)
219
CC3144
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Exclusion
Attendance
Assessment
Practicum in Workplace
3
3
Non-science
English
(Language used in the workplace will depend on the requirement
of individual industry partners)
300 working hours (or above) subject to the arrangement between
the College and the industry partner
or
equivalent combinations* (such as 150 working hours, and 21
hours of workshops provided by the industry partner or the staff
designated by the College (designated staff)).
* The weight combination of working hours and workshop hours
may vary (in proportional basis) depending on the nature of the
work and the field. However, the combination must consist of at
least 150 hours of work experience.
Nil
CC3144 Practicum in Workplace and CC3145 Extensive
Practicum in Workplace are mutually exclusive.
For the teaching pattern with workshop component, students are
required to attend at least 75% of the workshops.
100% Continuous Assessment (Pass/Fail grades):
(I) Assessment by the industry partner:
50% on assessment by the industry partner
(II) Assessment by the designated staff
25% on learning progress reports
25% on reflective journals/log books
Students are required to pass in both components (I & II) in order
to get an overall pass in the subject.
Aims
This subject provides students opportunities to develop practical skills and attributes such as good attitudes
and commitment through practicum in a real world setting. This subject also helps students to apply and
reflect on the theories and concepts learnt from other subjects.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the organisational settings and develop professional knowledge and essential practical
skills required in workplaces of their study areas.
Apply the theories and concepts learnt into real world setting.
Prepare for the realities of workplaces.
Develop attributes for all-roundedness such as independent thinking, good attitudes, commitment and
interpersonal communication skills in workplaces.
Identify their strengths and weaknesses in a workplace environment.
220
Structure of the Practicum
Students may consider one of the following periods for their practicum:
Semester 1: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester 1.
Semester 2: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester 2.
Summer Term: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of the academic
year.
Depending on the nature of the particular internship position, the working schedule may deviate from the
above and in such a case, the expected period of the internship will be communicated to the student
concerned.
Work Nature
The nature of work must be within the same or similar scopes of study areas. Students must obtain
approval from the designated staff on the work nature before commencement.
Workshops and consultation sessions will be provided to participants. Students will be guided to write
learning objectives, progress reports and reflective essays throughout the period of practicum. Review
meetings with concerned parties will be conducted by the designated staff.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assessment report by the industry partner, learning
progress reports, reflective journals or log books assessed by the designated staff.
Indicative Readings
Designated staff may assign or recommended readings or reference books to students if necessary.
221
CC3145
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Exclusion
Attendance
Assessment
Extensive Practicum in Workplace
3
6
Non-science
English
(Language used in the workplace will depend on the requirement
of individual industry partners)
600 working hours (or above) subject to the arrangement
between the College and the industry partner
or
equivalent combinations* (such as 300 working hours, and 42
hours of workshops provided by the industry partner or the staff
designated by the College (designated staff)).
* The weight combination of working hours and workshop hours
may vary (in proportional basis) depending on the nature of the
work and the field. However, the combination must consist of at
least 300 hours of work experience.
Nil
CC3144 Practicum in Workplace and CC3145 Extensive
Practicum in Workplace are mutually exclusive.
For the teaching pattern with workshop component, students are
required to attend at least 75% of the workshops.
100% Continuous Assessment (Pass/Fail grades):
(I) Assessment by the industry partner:
50% on assessment by the industry partner
(II) Assessment by the designated staff
25% on learning progress reports
25% on reflective journals/log books
Students are required to pass in both components (I & II) in order
to get an overall pass in the subject.
Aims
This subject provides students opportunities to develop practical skills and attributes such as good attitudes
and commitment through practicum in a real world setting. This subject also helps students to apply and
reflect on the theories and concepts learnt from other subjects.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the organizational settings and develop professional knowledge and essential practical
skills required in workplaces of their study areas.
Apply the theories and concepts learnt into real world setting.
Prepare for the realities of workplaces.
Develop attributes for all-roundness such as independent thinking, good attitudes, commitment and
interpersonal communication skills in workplaces.
Identify their strengths and weaknesses in a workplace environment.
222
Structure of the Practicum
Students may consider one of the following periods for their practicum:
Semester 1: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of the following
semester.
Semester 2: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of the following
Summer Term.
Summer Term: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of the following
semester.
Depending on the nature of the particular internship position, the working schedule may deviate from the
above and in such a case, the expected period of the internship will be communicated to the student
concerned.
Work Nature
The nature of work must be within the same or similar scopes of study areas. Students must obtain
approval from the designated staff on the work nature before commencement.
Workshops and consultation sessions will be provided to participants. Students will be guided to write
learning objectives, progress reports and reflective essays throughout the period of practicum. Review
meetings with concerned parties will be conducted by the designated staff.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assessment report by the industry partner, learning
progress reports, reflective journals or log books assessed by the designated staff.
Indicative Readings
Designated staff may assign or recommended readings or reference books to students if necessary.
223
CC3150
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusion
Assessment
Organisational Behaviour
3
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
CC2108 Organisational Behaviour
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the key concepts and theories of human behaviour, and highlights their significant
impact on the management of organisations. It prepares students to further develop their knowledge in the
field of management either through continuous professional development or academic studies. This
subject will also help develop students’ critical thinking for their life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
Comprehend the key concepts and theories relevant to the management of workplace behaviour at
individual, group and organisational levels.
Apply the relevant concepts and theories to analyse practical organisational issues, and suggest proper
solutions to address the issues.
Appraise the importance of diversity in organisations.
Indicative Contents
Individual Behaviours
Values and ethical behaviour; Attitudes and job satisfaction; Personality and emotions; Perception and
individual decision making; Motivation.
Group Behaviours
Group behaviour; Teams and team diversity; Communication; Leadership; Power and politics; Conflict
and negotiation.
Organisational Behaviours
Organisational culture; Organisational change and development; Resistance to organisational change;
Approaches to managing organisational change; Cross-cultural organisational behaviour.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and theories in the topics of the
syllabus. Real-life examples and business-related case studies will be presented to help students
understand the implications of the concepts and theories.
224
Case studies, discussions of problems, video shows and games are employed in tutorials to help students
apply the concepts and theories learned into real-life business situations.
Assessment Approach
examination which are designed to develop and assess students’ critical thinking as well as analytical and
Indicative Readings
Robbins, Stephen P., Organizational Behavior, Prentice Hall, (latest ed.).
References
Ivancevich, John M., Konopaske, Robert, Matteson, Michael T., Organizational Behavior and
Management, McGraw Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.).
Kinicki, Angelo, Kreitner, Robert, Organizational Behavior: Key Concepts, Skills and Best Practices,
McGraw Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.).
Luthans, Fred, Organizational Behavior, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.).
McShane, Steven L., Von Glinow, Mary A., Organizational Behavior, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.).
Moorhead, Gregory, Griffin, Ricky W., Organizational Behavior: Managing people and organizations,
Houghton Mifflin, (latest ed.).
225
CC3153
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Principles of Knowledge Management
3
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with a basic understanding on the concepts and models of knowledge
management and illustrate how these concepts can help organisations to sustain their competitive
advantages. This subject also helps students to acquire the principles of a dynamic knowledge-based
workplace that calls for new management laws and techniques to undertake business in the information
age. This subject is designed to equip students with the necessary foundation to help organisations to create
new intellectual or informational assets in today’s digital and knowledge-based economy.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the importance of knowledge management and apply those basic concepts and theories in
assisting organisations in the creation and management of its important assets, i.e. knowledge
Have an awareness of the nature and dynamics of the new knowledge-based workplace
Identify the forces and drivers of the new knowledge-based workplace
Appreciate the role of electronic knowledge management and other management principles to sustain
competitive advantage in the knowledge-based workplace
Demonstrate basic ability to apply and integrate concepts to develop, transfer, share, adapt, apply and
create knowledge within an organisation
Indicative Contents
Introduction to Knowledge Management
Defining knowledge management; Objectives of knowledge management; Knowledge management
and the e-business space; Knowledge management challenges; Critical success factors; Knowledge and
competitive advantages.
Knowledge and Learning Organisations
Knowledge management and learning in organisations; Types of organisational knowledge; E-learning
characteristics; Strategic importance and effectiveness of e-learning.
Capturing and Sharing Knowledge
Relationship of information technology, information management and knowledge management; Types
of knowledge shared; Why people share or don’t share; Recommendations; Organisational challenges.
Organisational Culture, Change Management and Communities of Practice
226
Knowledge flows and networks; Characteristics of organisation culture; Knowledge workers and roles;
Driving forces of the knowledge-based workplace; Introducing communities of practice.
Role of Information Technology in Knowledge Management
Requirements of knowledge workers; Technology aspect of knowledge management; Introducing the
intranet; Differentiating intranet, internet and extranet; Intranet business issues; Components,
applications and benefits of an intranet. Challenges and opportunities of a corporate intranet;
Introducing portals; Benefits of portals; Enterprise knowledge portals; Groupware workflow and
document management; Overview of data warehousing.
Knowledge Management Frameworks and Processes
Introducing the knowledge management framework; Knowledge creation, transfer, storage, retrieval,
application and their IT applications; Managing intellectual capital; Protecting knowledge; Knowledge
harvesting.
Business Case and Strategy for Knowledge Management
Importance and essentials of knowledge management strategy; Best practices; Guidelines for
knowledge strategy formulation; Applying concepts to existing knowledge management business
models and cases; The business development process; Phases of knowledge management project;
Knowledge management implementation.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of basic Knowledge Management concepts, with
specific reference to related business models.
Tutorials provide students with an opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life situations. The activities in tutorials include
group discussions, and presentations of case studies, videos questions and problem sets.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group projects and presentations, case studies, written
reports, tests and examination which are being designed to develop and assess students’ critical thinking as
well as analytical skills relating to knowledge management.
Indicative Readings
Ashok Jashapara, “Knowledge Management An integrated approach”, Pearson (latest ed.).
References
Becerra-Fernandez, Gonzalez, Sabherwal, “Knowledge Management Challenges, Solutions and
Technologies”, Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
Davenport, T.H. and Prusak, L., “Working Knowledge: How Organisation Manage What They Know”,
Harvard Business School Press (latest ed.).
Despres, C. and Chauvel, D., “Knowledge Horizons: The Present and the Promise of Knowledge
Management”, Butterworth-Heinemann, Boston (latest ed.).
227
Klein, G., “Sources of Power: How People Make Decisions”, MIT Press, Cambridge (latest ed.).
Liebowitz, J., “Knowledge Management Handbook”, CRC Press, Boca Raton (latest ed.).
Stewart. T.A., “Intellectual Capital: The New Wealth of Organisations”, Currency Doubleday, New York
(latest ed.).
Sveiby, K.E., “The New Organisational Wealth: Managing & Measuring Knowledge-based Assets”,
Berrett-Koehler, San Francisco (latest ed.).
Tiwana, A., “The Knowledge Management Toolkit: Orchestrating IT, Strategy, and Knowledge
Platforms”, Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
Yau, Liao, “Knowledge Management: The Key to Success in the 21st Century”, Hong Kong: Chinese
Management Research Center, City University of Hong Kong (latest ed.).
Brint KM Virtual Library, http://www.brint.com/km/
Davenport, T. Some principles of knowledge management, http://www.itmweb.com/essay538.htm/
Google directory for KM Tools
http://directory.google.com/Top/Reference/Knowledge_Management/Software/
228
CC3201
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to equip students with fundamental database concepts. It provides students with the
general knowledge of database architecture and technology. It helps them to understand the database
technology potentials. It also provides students with the fundamental knowledge to evaluate various
database management systems of different data models against organization needs and make the
appropriate selection for an organization.
Learning Outcomes
demonstrate understanding of the basic concepts of database systems
acquire fundamental knowledge to evaluate various database management systems of different data
models
justify the appropriate selection of database management system for an organization
assess the value of database technology potentials
effectively communicate information and analysis of database systems
Indicative Contents
Basic Concepts Of Database System
Database and its objectives; Database management system (DBMS) and its components; American
National Standards Institute/Scalable Processor ARChitecture (ANSI/SPARC) three-level system
architecture; Data independence.
Relational Data Model
Relational structure; Relational languages: relational algebra, relational calculus, structured query
language (SQL); Relational constraints: entity constraints, referential integrity constraints and foreign
keys; Relational view definition and management.
Future Directions Of Data Base
Object-oriented and post-relational systems; Distributed database/database management system
(DB/DBMS); Mobile databases; Web databases; Logic-based systems: data warehousing and data
mining.
229
Lectures will focus on the concepts, the principles and key issues in data base systems using an interactive
approach in order to develop students’ knowledge base for evaluation and justification of database systems.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen and consolidate their understanding of the
concepts taught in lectures. Laboratory activities will be conducted to familiarize the students with
database application programming techniques.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including laboratory database programming exercises,
presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess
database application programming skills as well as analytical and communication skills.
Indicative Reading
Rob, P. and Coronel, C. Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management. Thomson Course
Technology. (latest ed.).
References
Garcia-Molina, H., Ullman, J. D. and Widom, J. Database System Implementation. Prentice Hall. (latest
ed.).
Pratt, P. J. and Adamski, J. J. Concepts of Database Management. Thomson Course Technology. (latest
ed.).
Ramakrishnan, R. and Gehrke, J. Database Management Systems. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Silberschartz, A., Korth, H. F. and Sudarshan, S. Database System Concepts. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
230
CC3202
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to present students with concepts in the software engineering field. A variety of ways in
which software engineering is approached will also be discussed, with the major focus on the issues of
software processes – requirements analysis and definition, system and software design, implementation and
unit testing, integration and system testing as well as operation and maintenance. In addition to the
knowledge gained, students are given the opportunity to analyze the system and user requirements so as to
apply software engineering techniques and design appropriate procedures or flows for software
development.
Learning Outcomes
acquire the solid understanding of the key concepts of software engineering and their practical
relevance
apply software engineering techniques in software development
conduct analysis of system and user requirements so as to provide appropriate design for software
development
demonstrate critical and creative thinking through the design in various phases of software engineering
process
communicate and cooperate effectively and productively in team work on the design for software
development
identify the trend, potential problems and opportunities of software engineering issues
Indicative Contents
Software Processes
Software process models; Process iteration; Computer-aided software engineering (CASE).
Requirements
Software requirements; Requirements analysis & validation; System models; Software prototyping;
Formal specification.
Software Design
Architectural design; Distributed systems design; Object-oriented Design; Real-time software design;
Design with reuse.
231
Programming Languages and Techniques
Programming style; Fault avoidance and tolerance; Exception handling; Defensive programming;
Features of programming languages.
Software Verification and Validation
Testing techniques; Static analysis; Design and code reviews; Inspection; Walkthrough; Formal proof;
Software reliability and safety.
Software Metrics
Software quality assurance and standards; Metrics for source code, Testing and maintenance.
Software Maintenance
Systems reviews and audits; Re-engineering; Software reuse; Software process improvement.
Key software engineering concepts, techniques and methodologies will be presented in lectures, with
specific reference to related software engineering cases in order to develop students’ solid understanding of
software engineering concepts, techniques and methodologies.
Software engineering problems and exercises will be given to students in tutorials in order for them to
explore appropriate design and solutions. Students’ knowledge in software engineering concepts,
techniques and methodologies will be consolidated and enhanced in tutorials through discussion.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including assignments, group projects, tests and examination are designed to
assess students’ understanding of software engineering concepts and applicability of software engineering
techniques. Also, students’ critical and creative thinking, problem-solving and analytical skills are
assessed through the design and development in software engineering projects and assignments.
Indicative Reading
Sommerville, I. Software Engineering. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
References
Ghezzi, C., Jazayeri, M. and Mandrioli, D. Fundamentals of Software Engineering. Prentice Hall. (latest
ed.).
Pfleeger, S. L. and Atlee, J. M. Software Engineering: Theory and Practice. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Pressman, R. S. Software Engineering - A Practitioner's Approach. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
232
CC3203
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with the basic skills in developing information systems to support different
types of business organizations. It provides a good training for students to learn how to be a system analyst
or developer and to build information systems from the first request made by users to the stage of
implementation. Studying the subject will help develop students’ analytical mind, as well as a professional
attitude, and design and project management skills for their future learning and career development in the
information technology field.
Learning Outcomes
identify the user and system requirements for information system analysis and design
apply and reflect on various analyses and design techniques in system development
appraise problems faced by system developers
distinguish the capabilities and limitations of system design and development technologies such as
visual development tools and computer-aided software engineering
explore the basic professional attitude in developing information systems
Indicative Contents
Systems Analysis Fundamentals
Role of system analysts; Types of information systems; System development life cycle (SDLC) and
alternative approaches; Skills for system analysts; Automated tools for system development.
Requirements Determination
Sampling and investigating hard data; Interviewing and listening; Using questionnaires; Observing
decision-maker behaviour and the office environment; Prototyping and rapid application development.
Requirements Structuring
Data flow diagrams, structured English, decision tables, decision trees and state-transition diagram;
Entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams.
Design
Input/Output design; Interfaces and dialogues design; Database design; Program and process design.
Object-oriented Analysis and Design Methods
233
Object-oriented development life cycle; Objects; Classes; Attributes; Relationships; Messaging;
Dynamic/static binding; Polymorphism; Encapsulation; Overviews of analysis approaches and design
methods.
Implementation
System conversion; User training; User guide and operations manual; Changeover methods.
Systems Development Project Management & Professional Ethics
Planning and schedule; Software cost estimation; Ethnics; Code of conduct; Public interest; Employers
and clients; Profession; Professional competence and integrity.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of the theories, concepts, techniques and methodologies
in the analysis and design of information systems. Occasional group discussions will be conducted to
enhance students’ understanding of the theories, concepts, techniques and methodologies in information
system analysis and design.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen and consolidate their understanding of the
concepts taught in lectures. They also help students to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues
in developing information systems and enhance their knowledge and skills in developing information
systems. The activities in tutorials normally include exercises or mini-cases, student presentations,
discussions of problems and case studies.
Assessment Approach
an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication
skills.
Indicative Reading
Kendall, K.E. and Kendall, J.E. Systems Analysis and Design. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Hoffer, J. A., George, J. F., and Valacich, J. S. Modern Systems Analysis and Design. Addison Wesley.
(latest ed.).
Cadle, J. and Yeates, D. Project Management for Information Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Robson, W. Strategic Management and Information Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Valacich, J. S., George, J. F., and Hoffer, J. A. Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design Pearson
Education. (latest ed.).
234
CC3204
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40 % Coursework
60 % Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with the concepts and knowledge in data transmission across digital
communications networks. It provides the conceptual framework to analyze the practical aspects of packet
data communications and the interconnection of computers using a Local Area Network, a Wide Area
Network and the Internet. Studying the subject will also help develop students’ professional knowledge to
identify problems and provide solutions in different real-life situations of data communications and the
networking field.
Learning Outcomes
grasp the key principles of data communications, the operation and protocols of computer networks
analyze communication systems from the perspectives of communication architectures, transmission
techniques, network organization, security and implementation techniques
explore technical and practical issues of communicating data between computers over networks
design a communication system such as Local Area Network, Wide Area Network and the Internet by
applying the knowledge acquired and by selecting the appropriate network devices and systems
Indicative Contents
Data Communications Fundamentals
Protocol layering concept; Standards organizations; OSI reference model; Transmission media;
Modulation techniques; Data rate; Bandwidth; Channel capacity; Communication devices.
Data Link and Protocol Basics
Framing; Error detection methods; Error control; Automatic repeat request protocols; Window
mechanism; Data link control protocols.
Local Area Networks
Topologies; Medium access control protocols: ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA/CD Ethernet, token ring,
token bus; IEEE 802 Standards; FDDI and Wireless LANs.
Wide Area Networks and Internetworking
Store and forward; Circuit switching; Packet switching; Virtual circuits and datagrams; Routing;
Congestion and flow control; Internet architecture; TCP/IP protocol suite; Network security.
235
Lectures focus on the explanation of key concepts and theories in data communication and networking,
with specific reference to current technological issues wherever appropriate. Occasional group discussions
might be arranged to enhance students’ active learning and understanding of the key concepts, theories and
current technological issues in data communications and networking.
lectures and to apply the theories in real-life situation with the analysis of practical issues. Exercises will be
carried out in tutorials to illustrate and reinforce the concepts.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including case studies, written reports, tests and an examination
designed to develop and assess analytical skills and problem-solving skills in designing and evaluating data
communication systems and networks.
Indicative Reading
Forouzan B. A. Data Communications and Networking. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Comer, D. E. Computer Networks and Internets with Internet Applications. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
Halsall, F. Computer networking and the Internet. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Shay, W. A. Understanding Data Communications and Networks. International Thomson Publishing.
(latest ed.).
Tanenbaum, A. S. Computer Networks. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
236
CC3205
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusion
Assessment
Operating Systems
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2202 Computer System Architectures &
CC3302 Computer Systems Principles
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject provides students with the knowledge on the principles of operating systems. Upon the
completion of the course, students will have acquired the knowledge on resource management provided by
operating systems, concepts and theories of operating systems and implementation issues of operating
systems.
Learning Outcomes
identify the services provided by operating systems
grasp the concept of the internal structure of an operating system
review and compare different operating systems
understand as well as solve problems involving process control, mutual exclusion, deadlock and
synchronization
Indicative Contents
Introduction to Operating Systems
Operating system objectives, types, functionalities and achievements; System components and
services; Resource management; Memory management; Input/Output (I/O) management; File
management.
Process Management
Process concepts and characteristics; Processor management and manipulation; Asynchronous
concurrent processes; Mutual exclusion; Synchronization; Deadlock; Scheduling algorithms.
Memory and Secondary Storage Management
Virtual memory; Paging and segmentation system; Secondary storage allocation; Directory and file
system structure.
Protection and Security
Protection and access control; Capabilities; Security and cryptography.
237
Case Studies on Operating Systems
Structure of UNIX, Windows XP, etc.
Theories and basic concepts will be delivered during the lectures. Students’ technical competence will be
developed through (supervised) hands-on practice in the tutorials and related class exercises in real-life
applications.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including hands-on practice assignments, tests, project and an
examination designed to help students to understand and evaluate the concepts and theories of operating
systems as well as to recognize the implementation issues of operating systems. The assessment tools are
also designed to assess students’ problems solving abilities in process control, mutual exclusion, deadlock
and synchronization.
Indicative Reading
Stallings, W. Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Tanenbaum, A. S. Modern Operating Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Deitel, H. M. Operating Systems. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Silberschatz A. and Galvin, P. Operating System Concepts. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Stallings, W. Operating Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
238
CC3206
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusion
Assessment
Programming Project
3
3
Science
English
6 hours of Lecture (to be arranged in the first 3 weeks)
16 hours of Laboratory (supervised)
28 hours of Laboratory (unsupervised)
Satisfactory completion of 6 or more IT-major subjects offered
under the Associate in Information Technology programme
including
CC2201 Principles of Programming &
CC3202 Software Engineering.
CC3314 Engineering Project &
CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project
100% Coursework
Aims
This subject provides students studying for the Associate Degree of Information Technology award an
opportunity to integrate and apply their IT knowledge and skills acquired in earlier semesters through a
practical programming group project. It aims to develop and measure the capabilities of students to
analyze and solve a complex problem during the course.
Learning Outcomes
conduct a search of the relevant literature, materials or sources relating to their selected problem area
leading to an awareness, precise definition and specification of the problem
think critically in the formulation of models and solutions, in the analysis of approaches, and in the
evaluation of the outcomes
implement a feasible software solution to the problem using one or more high-level programming
languages
communicate and present clearly and concisely their software product both orally and in writing
manage their group project efficiently, effectively and collaboratively
Indicative Contents
Under the guidance of the subject lecturer, students are expected to work in groups on a feasible software
solution of a particular problem. The total effort required from each student is 42 hours of staff contact, 28
hours of unsupervised laboratory work and approximately 98 hours of independent study, which includes
the total time spent on literature search, background reading, fact finding, project development, and report
writing.
Projects are normally proposed by the subject lecturer. However, students may propose projects in their
areas of interest. Projects should be problem-oriented and there is no restriction to the nature of the
problem except that it should require a reasonably sophisticated software solution from the students.
239
Lecture hours are for the delivery of information related to project requirements and development
environment.
Tutorial hours are used to review students’ architectural design of the software solution and to approve
work allocation proposed by students. These hours are also used for progress monitoring and students’
presentations of their design and the completed software solutions.
Supervised laboratory hours are used for environment familiarization, progress demonstrations and
guidance for problem solving in laboratory environment.
Each project group has to present formally the architectural design and demonstrate the operational
features of the software product.
Assessment
The deliverables required from each project group are: an initial project proposal, an architectural design of
the software, and a final report (including the software product). The deadlines for these are week 3, week
5 and week 14 of the semester.
Students will be assessed by the subject lecturer based on the following set of criteria and weighting:
i.
Problem Identification and Specification (Literature Search)
20%
ii.
Problem Solving (Critical Thinking)
40%
iii. Communication and Presentation (Demonstration and Reports)
30%
iv.
10%
Project Management and Self-Discipline
240
CC3207
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with the knowledge and hands-on experience in developing objectoriented programs using an object-oriented programming language. The subject also develops students’
learning experience in designing and developing solutions and applications using the object-oriented
approach. In addition, studying this subject will help develop students’ critical and creative thinking in the
application of object-oriented techniques.
Learning Outcomes
describe the essential concepts of object-oriented technology and carry out the object-oriented
approach for programming
design object-oriented programs using object-oriented modeling
use different object-oriented programming techniques for computer program development
appraise advanced object-oriented programming techniques
implement graphics and event handling in an object-oriented fashion
recognize the effectiveness and opportunities of object-oriented technology
work responsibly, effectively and appropriately as an individual and as part of a group
Indicative Contents
Basic Principles
Object-oriented (OO) programming; Object-oriented programming languages; Divide and conquer;
Encapsulation; Interface; Information hiding; Generality; Extensibility; Object-oriented modeling and
unified modeling language (UML).
Programming Basics
Program types; Source files and class Files; Packages; Basic OO program components.
Language Fundamentals
Identifiers; Variables; Values; Data types and operators; Arrays; Strings; Control structures; Classes
and objects; Data abstraction.
Classes
Class and member scope; Constructors; Methods; Fields; Library classes; Programmer-defined
classes.
241
Inheritance, Interfaces, and Abstract Classes
Inheritance basics; Polymorphism; Interfaces; Abstract classes; Multithread programs.
Graphics and Event Handling
AWT; Swing; Event-driven Programming; Components and Containers.
Network Programming
Basic concepts; Sockets; Remote method invocation (RMI).
Object-oriented programming concepts and techniques will be taught and discussed in lectures, with
specific reference to related object-oriented models using unified modeling language.
Students will be given opportunities to deepen their understanding of the object-oriented programming
concepts and apply object-oriented techniques in the design of computer programs in tutorials. The
activities in tutorials include group discussions, presentations of object-oriented programming cases and
development of solutions to the object-oriented problem sets.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including object-oriented design and programming assignments, group
projects, tests and an examination are designed to assess students’ understanding of object-oriented
concepts, applicability of the object-oriented approach individually and in a team, critical and creative
thinking, problem-solving and analytical skills as well as communication skills.
Indicative Readings
Booch, Grady, Rumbaugh, James and Jacobson, Ivar. The Unified Modeling Language User Guide.
Deitel & Deitel. Java How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Barnes, D. Object-Oriented Programming with Java: An Introduction. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
Kalin, M. Object-Oriented Programming in Java. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
Morelli, R. and Walde, R. Java, Java, Java, Object-Oriented Problem Solving. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
242
CC3208
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2201Principles of Programming
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to enrich students’ knowledge in terms of the evolving technologies pertaining to the
Internet and Web applications development. This subject also aims to equip students with skills required
for the development of both the client side and the server side in web-based applications.
Learning Outcomes
analyze, design and develop real–life client side and server side applications with internet technologies
design and develop real–life server side internet application with technologies like Perl, PHP, and
JavaScript
recognize web server operation and internet protocols so as to administer web-based systems
apply the programming tools and techniques for development of web-based applications
show analytical and problem-solving skills
Indicative Contents
Interactive Web
Client/Server computing model; Web server; Client-side and server-side approaches;
Client-side Programming
HTML. JavaScript/Jscript; Cascading Style Sheets; Dynamic HTML Object Model; Event Model;
ActiveX controls.
Server-side Programming
ASP; CGI; Server-side Java servlets; Java server pagesv Applets as front ends to server-side programs;
JDBC.
XML
Motivation and concepts; Syntax and structure; HTML vs XML; Life cycle of XML documents;
Related technologies: XHTML, CSS, XSL, Xlinks and Xpointers; Applications.
Wireless Internet
Motivation and concepts; WAP architecture, specifications and programming models; Microbrowser
specifications.
243
Theories, concepts, principles and related technologies will be delivered in the lectures. Programming
exercises will be given to students in tutorials to enhance and reinforce their understanding of the subject
materials.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments to develop real–life client side and
server-side programs. Tests and an examination are designed to develop and assess analytical skills of the
student on Web-based applications.
Indicative Reading
Deitel, H.M., Deitel, P.J. and Nieto, T.R. Internet and World Wide Web - How to program. Prentice Hall.
(latest ed.).
Deitel, H. M. and Deitel, P. J. Java - How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Hall, M. and Brown, L. Core Web Programming. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
244
CC3209
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC3204 Data Communications and Networking
40 % Coursework
60 % Examination
Aims
This subject aims to equip students with the essential knowledge and skills in internet communications. It
provides the conceptual framework for students to understand and apply current internetworking protocols
and systems and to appreciate network management and security.
Learning Outcomes
grasp the principle of internetworking through the study of the classic TCP/IP protocol suite
identify and apply internet protocols in computer networks
recognize the intricate complexity of the techniques related to network management and security
explore the most up-to-date development in internet technology
Indicative Contents
Internetworking Fundamentals and Internet Protocol
Internetworking concept and architectures; OSI reference model and TCP/IP reference model; IP
address structure; Address Resolution Protocol (ARP); Encapsulation and demultiplexing of IP
datagrams; Internet Protocol (IP); IP subnet and routing; Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP); IP
multicasting; Mobile IP.
Transport Layer and Application Protocols
User Datagram Protocol (UDP); UDP multiplexing and ports; Transmission Control Protocol (TCP);
Error control, flow control and congestion control; Connection management; Domain Name System
(DNS); Selected application protocols, e.g. Remote Terminal Protocol (TELNET), File Transfer
Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP).
Network Management and Security
Rationale and architectures for performance management, fault management, accounting management,
configuration and name management, and security management; Management Information Bases (MIB);
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP); Remote Network Monitoring (RMON); Cryptography;
Public keys, digital signatures and authentication protocols; Internet security and firewall.
245
Introduction and explanation of key internetworking concepts and knowledge will be delivered during
lectures. Examples and exercises on internet protocols will be discussed in tutorials to reinforce students’
understanding of the concepts and to apply the knowledge and skills in solving problems related to
computer networks.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including a computer program to implement and study a
selected protocol, exercises on applying the knowledge understanding, a test and an examination. The
assessment tools are designed to assess students’ understandability on internetworking concepts as well as
the ability in identifying and applying internet protocols. In order to test students’ ability in exploring the
most up-to-date development in internetworking technology, students are required to write a short report on
current internetworking technology and issues.
Indicative Reading
Kurose, J. F. and Ross, K. W. Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet.
References
Comer, D. E. Computer Networks and Internets with Internet Applications. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
Comer, D. E. Internetworking with TCP/IP Vol. 1. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.).
Forouzan, B. A. TCP/IP Protocol Suite. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
246
CC3210
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Tutorial
CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject is designed to provide students with in-depth knowledge as well as solid, comprehensive and
advanced concepts and programming skills required of commercial database systems so that student can
acquire the experience of designing, implementing and administrating a database system of reasonable
complexity using a selected database management system (DBMS).
Learning Outcomes
formulate a database system strategy and plan within an organization for database design and
implementation.
design an appropriate centralized or distributed database system that meets the system requirements
specification and complete the implementation of the database system using a selected DBMS or
Distributed DBMS tool.
appraise other alternative database models and alternative DBMSs.
assess and evaluate applicability of the other alternative database models and alternative DBMSs
within an organization.
Indicative Contents
Evolution of Database Models
Traditional data models: hierarchical, network, relational; Conceptual modelling and entityrelationship model; Object-oriented & semantic models.
Database Design
Entity-relationship model; Functional dependencies; Normalization.
File Structures and Physical Database Design
File organization; Indexing and hashing.
Database Implementation & Operational Issues
Data dependencies and normalization; Query processing and optimization; Security & integrity
constraints; Physical database designs, recovery, concurrency & other operational issues.
247
Lectures focus on the theories, concepts, techniques and methodologies in database systems. Tutorials
provide students with the opportunity to deepen and consolidate their understanding of the concepts. Lab
activities are used to acquire practical experience in designing and implementing a database system of
reasonable complexity. It also helps students to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues in
developing database systems and enhance their knowledge and skills in developing database systems using
database management system tools.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including project development skills, project presentation and
demonstration, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking,
database design techniques, design validation and evaluation as well as analytical and communication
skills.
Indicative Reading
Connolly, T. M. and Begg, C. E., Database Systems: A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and
Management, Addison Wesley (latest ed.).
References
Date, C. J., An Introduction to Database Systems, Addison Wesley (latest ed.).
Elmsari, R. and Navathe, S. B., Fundamentals of Database Systems, Addison Wesley (latest ed.).
Rob, P and Coronel, C, Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management, Thomson Course
Technology (latest ed.).
Ullman, J. D., Principles of Database and Knowledge-base Systems, Computer Science Press (latest
ed.).
248
CC3301
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40 % Coursework
60 % Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with the basic knowledge and analytical abilities essential to understand and
implement a communication system. It puts emphasis on the application of the basic principles to practical
communication systems which are now a common part of everyday life. Studying the subject will also help
students to develop their mathematical foundation in the models of analytical problems in different real-life
situations.
Learning Outcomes
identify the elements in a communication system and the operations of analog signal modulation
techniques and their areas of application
select a suitable modulation method with specific desired characteristics
analyse the performance of a communication system for measuring its efficiency
apply digital communications and multiplexing techniques in a confined situation
develop problem solving abilities
Indicative Contents
Signals and Systems
Information source; Encoder; Decoder; Communication channel; Signal representations; Fourier series;
Fourier transform; Power spectral density; Noise.
Analog Signal Transmission
Amplitude modulation; Frequency modulation; Phase modulation; Frequency division multiplexing;
Generation and demodulation of AM and FM signals; Effect of noise; Radio and television
broadcasting.
Information and Digital Transmission
Measure of information; Channel capacity; Sampling theorem; Pulse-amplitude modulation; Pulsecode modulation; Quantization and coding; Time division multiplexing.
249
Lectures focus on the explanation of key concepts and theories in communication systems. Occasional
group discussions might be arranged.
lectures and to apply the theories in real-life situation with the analysis of practical issues using exercises
and case studies in communication systems. Exercises will be carried out in tutorials to illustrate and
reinforce students’ concepts.
Assessment Approach
develop and assess the knowledge of elements, operations, modulation techniques, performance evaluation
and applications in communication systems.
Indicative Reading
Tamb, H. and Schulling, D. Principle of Communication Systems. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Halsall, F. Computer networking and the Internet. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Haykin, S. Communication Systems. Wiley. (latest ed.).
Leon, W.C. Digital and Analog Communication Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Proakis, J.G. and Salehi, M. Communication Systems Engineering. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Stremler, F.G. Introduction to Communication Systems. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
250
CC3302
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Exclusion
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2202 Computer System Architectures &
CC3205 Operating Systems
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject enables students to appreciate the basic concepts, features, principles and knowledge in
computer organization and operating systems for their understanding in the functions and organizations of
modern digital computers. It also helps students to apply the knowledge to solve the problems of computer
systems using assembly programming.
Learning Outcomes
appraise the fundamentals of computer systems and associated technologies
describe the operations of components in computer systems and operating systems
develop programs to control the components in computer systems and operating systems
apply different computer interfacing techniques in designing a computer system
develop interpersonal skills in teamwork and leadership
Indicative Contents
Computer System
Computer components; Interconnection structures and bus interconnections; Bus cycle; Memory
system overview; Memory interface; Address decoding; Banking; Semiconductor and cache memory;
External device; I/O modules; Basic I/O interface; Polling; Programmed and interrupt I/O; Software
interrupt; DMA and I/O channels; DMA controller; Shared-bus operation; Disk memory systems;
Video display; Memory-mapped I/O; Handshaking; Programmable peripheral interface; Serial
interface; Asynchronous/synchronous interface; RS232.
The Central Processing Unit and Machine Instructions
Arithmetic and logic unit (ALU); Integer representation and arithmetic; Floating-point and arithmetic;
IEEE standards; Fast addition, multiplication and division algorithms; Machine instruction
characteristics and types; Assembly language; assembler; Memory addressing modes; Register
organization; Instruction cycle and instruction pipelining; Reduced instruction set architecture.
System Software and Operating System (OS)
Software hierarchy; Systems software; BIOS; Power-up sequence; Bootstrap; Command Processor;
251
System control; Automatic program execution; System calls; OS objectives, function and achievements;
Process concept and characteristics; Processor management; Multitasking and time sharing system;
Scheduling schemes and schemes; Context-switching mechanism; Memory management; I/O
management; Device Driver; File management; Protection and security; Concurrent programming; OS
design and implementation methodology; Performance evaluation; Case studies of commonly used OS.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of major theorems, principles and mathematics
techniques of computer systems and operating systems. In addition, examples of modern computer systems
and operating systems are discussed in the lectures.
Tutorials introduce to students the commonly used software in controlling computer components and they
provide students with the opportunity to practice their understanding in computer systems through the use
of computer programs and exercises. Laboratories reinforce students’ concepts and knowledge learnt in
lectures through experiments.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, assignments, group projects, programming exercises, tests and
an examination designed to develop and assess the students’ understanding of the basic computer
architectures and the structures and functions of operating system. The computer simulation group projects
assess the student’s abilities in teamwork and leadership.
Indicative Reading
Silberschatz A. and Galvin, P. Operating System Concepts. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.).
Stallings, W. Computer Organization and Architecture. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Mazidi, M. A. and Mazidi, J. G. The 80x86 IBM PC and compatible computers. Volumes I & II, Assembly
language, design, and interfacing. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Mitchell, M., Oldham, J. and Samuel, A. Advanced Linux Programming. New Riders. (latest ed.).
Tanenbaum, A. S. Modern Operating Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Tanenbaum, A.S. Structured Computer Organization. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
B. B. Barry. The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium and
Pentium Pro Processor: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
252
CC3303
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
27 hours of Lecture
6 hours of Tutorial
9 hours of Laboratory / Case study
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with the analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of theoretical
background in the design of production and service systems. It provides a conceptual framework for
students to integrate different components in such systems and enables students to apply these principles to
real-life industrial problems. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking
and problem solving skills for their life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
grasp the concepts of production and service systems
grasp the principles and techniques in the design of production and service systems
identify some components of production and service systems, such as Material Requirement Planning
for production and, Inventory Control for both production and service operations
integrate different components of a production and service system
apply the principles in the design of production and service systems to real-life industrial problems
apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible
outcomes
Indicative Contents
Forecasting
Production and service demand management; Qualitative and quantitative methods in forecasting;
Forecasting errors and control; Forecasting and its relationship to capacity planning.
Aggregate Planning
Capacity measurement; Aggregate units; Manual and mathematical methods for aggregate planning.
Inventory Control
Types of inventory; Dependent verse independent inventory; Order quantities, including quantity
discounts; Continuous review and periodic review systems; ABC analysis.
Material Requirement Planning (MRP)
Master production scheduling; MRP concepts and principles; Lot sizing.
253
Operations Scheduling
Gantt charts; Single-machine scheduling; Parallel machine scheduling; Flow shop scheduling; Jobshop scheduling; Personnel Scheduling.
Just-in-time and Lean Manufacture
Advantages and limitations; Set-up and changeover times and their reduction; Push and pull systems of
production control; Use of Kanban; Effect on inventory; Issues of implementation.
Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of relevant theories and practices in the design of
production and service systems. Occasional group discussions might be arranged.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues in the design of production and service
systems. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets
and case studies.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including interactions between teacher and students,
assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students’ achievement of subject
expected learning outcomes as well as analytical and interpersonal skills.
Indicative Reading
References
Hopp, W. J. Factory Physics. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Metters, R. Successful service operations management. Mason, Ohio: Thomson/South-Western. (latest
ed.).
Nahmias, S. Production and operations analysis. Boston, Mass: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Shukla, P. K. Production and operations management. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Sipper, D. Production: planning, control, and integration. New York: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
254
CC3304
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with broadened views of the basic principles and essential knowledge of
digital logic systems and microprocessor systems. It also enables them to gain understanding and skills for
designing and building simple digital logic circuits using logic gates and programmable logic devices for
practical applications. Moreover, it helps students to understand the structure and organisation of
microprocessors and basic assembly language programming techniques. In addition, it provides students
with the fundamental knowledge of the components in computer systems.
Learning Outcomes
appreciate the fundamentals of digital systems and microprocessor systems
analyse and design simple combination and sequential logic systems
familiarize themselves with the principles and applications of programmable logic devices
recognize the basic structure and organization and the basic assembly language programming
techniques of microprocessor systems
Indicative Contents
Combinational Logic
Decoders; Encoders; Multiplexers; Demultiplexers; Binary adders and subtractors; Binary multipliers;
Shifters; Logic operations; Arithmetic Logical Unit (ALU); HDL representation.
Sequential Logic
Sequential circuits analysis and design procedures; Registers; Counters; HDL representations; Random
access memory; Read only memory; Algorithmic State Machine (ASM).
Programmable Logic Devices
Logic circuits design with Programmable Logic Devices (PLD); Programmable logic array (PLA);
Programmable array logic (PAL); Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD); Field Programmable
Gate Array (FPGA).
Microprocessor
Register transfer operations; Microoperations; Bus-based transfer; Datapath representation; Control
255
word; Control unit; Hardwired control and microprogrammed control; Concepts of assembly and
machine languages; Operand addressing; Addressing modes; Instruction set.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of major theorems, principles and mathematical
techniques of digital and microprocessor systems. In addition, examples of modern digital and
microprocessor systems are discussed in the lectures.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to practice their understanding of the concepts taught in
lectures through the digital circuit and microprocessor problems. In addition, some commonly used
software in digital system and microprocessor system is introduced in the tutorials. Laboratory hours
reinforce students’ concepts and knowledge learnt in lectures through experiments.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used. Assignments, group projects, tests and an examination are
designed to develop and assess the students’ understanding on the principles and problem solving
techniques in digital combination and sequential circuits, programmable logic devices and microprocessor
system. The digital circuit and microprocessor group projects assess the student’s abilities in teamwork and
leadership.
Indicative Reading
Mano M.M. and Kime C. R. Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice
Hall. (latest ed.)
References
Green, D.C. Digital Electronics. Addison Wesley Longman. (latest ed.).
Mano, M.M. Digital Design. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Mano, M.M. and Kime, C.R. Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Floyd, T.I. Digital Fundamentals. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Brown S. and Vranesic Z. Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
256
CC3305
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
The objective of this course is to equip students with the skills and techniques involved in managing people,
design, projects, and other related activities in an engineering environment. It provides students with the
training on the basic principles in the dimensions of organisation structures, operations and quality
management. It introduces the critical factors that engineering managers should deal with in their own
disciplines. It also covers environmental concerns and ethical issues that might occur in the field of
engineering.
Learning Outcomes
understand the basic principles and techniques involved in the management of people and engineering
activities in the process of product design as well as the production of goods and services
appraise and analyse issues relating to engineering management and professional ethics
appraise the importance of quality management
recognize environmental factors that may affect the operations of engineering organisations in Hong
Kong
apply basic management skills in their professional career
effectively communicate information, arguments and analysis in a variety of forms
Indicative Contents
Elements of Industrial Systems
Functions and types of industrial organisations, structure, corporate objectives, strategy and policy.
Industrial Management
Roles of managers; Process of management, planning, organising, actuating and controlling of social
and engineering activities; Reliability and maintenance management; Corrective, preventive and
productive maintenance; Replacement of facilities; Total quality management.
The Management of Research and Development
Project management, matrix organisation, project specification; Management of change due to
examples such as technical innovation, organisational changes, business process re-engineering, etc.
257
Effects of Environmental Factors
The effects of environmental factors on the operations of engineering companies in Hong Kong; Legal
aspects of employment; Professional codes of conduct for engineers; Contracting; Product liability;
Sources, effect and control of environmental pollutants.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key management concepts and practices in the
engineering field. Relevant authentic cases and examples will be introduced for in-class discussion.
Occasional group discussions might be arranged.
Tutorials normally include case studies and exercises to reinforce concepts and techniques learnt in
lectures, and to provide students with the opportunity to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life
engineering management issues. Students will be encouraged to develop their own skills in presenting their
viewpoints or findings to audiences through presentations.
Assessment Approach
The course consists of assignments covering the main topics taught, which are designed to enhance the
problem solving and analytical skills of students to apply the learned concepts into real-life cases. A test
and an examination will also be used to assess students’ theoretical and analytical skills.
Indicative Readings
Babcock, D.L. Managing Engineering and Technology: An introduction to management for Engineers.
Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Mazda, F.F. Engineering Management. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Robbins, S.P. and Conltar, M. Management. Prentice-Hall International. (latest ed.).
Schermerhorn, J.R. Management. John Wiley and Sons. (latest ed.).
Smith, N.J., Engineering project Management. Oxford: Blackwell Science. (latest ed.).
Kerzner, H., Project Management: A Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling.
John Wiley and Sons. (latest ed.).
258
CC3306
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
16 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
18 hours of Laboratory / Case study
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
background in industrial engineering techniques and methods. It provides students with a conceptual
framework to integrate different techniques and methods in industrial engineering for the enhancement of
enterprise productivity. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking and
problem solving skills for their life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
carry out method studies in a company for productivity improvement using the basic skills for
analyzing and improving working methods, procedures and systems in the context of the workstation
and a department taking into account ergonomic considerations
use and compile the data of work measurement, and to identify the techniques and importance of
quantifying work in the manufacturing and service settings, so as to measure the work content
apply facilities layout techniques with appropriate material handling systems to evaluate an existing
layout and recommend improvements and/or to plan a new layout
outcomes
Indicative Contents
Productivity Enhancement
Productivity, causes of low productivity in enterprises, resources and outputs of enterprises, their
importance and measurement.
Work Improvement
Benefits, the systematic approach, identifying improvement areas in enterprises; Terms of reference;
Approach to personnel, techniques of recording information; Systems flowcharting; Design of
documents in both hard and electronic format; Principles of computer screen layout; Examination of
existing working methods and development of new methods and procedures; Implementation and
continuous improvement.
Work Measurement
Purposes of work measurement in manufacturing and service settings; Techniques for measuring
industrial and clerical work, self recording, time study; Work sampling with observations at random
259
and fixed time intervals; Introduction to predetermined motion time systems for manufacturing and
clerical work.
Introduction to Ergonomics
Human physical characteristics, applications to the design of work and layout of the workplace.
Layout Planning
Objectives, types of layout found in industry and the clerical sectors; Systematic layout planning as
applied to manufacturing and clerical work; Introduction to design of flow lines in manufacturing.
Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of relevant theories and practices in industrial
engineering techniques and methods. Occasional group discussions might be arranged.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life industrial issues. The activities in tutorials
normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies.
Assessment Approach
Indicative Reading
References
Chengalur, S.N., Rodgers, S.H. and Bernard, T.E. Kodak’s Ergonomic Design for People at Work. John
Wiley and Sons, Inc.(latest ed.).
Hodson, W.K. Maynard's Industrial Engineering Handbook. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Konz, S. and Johnson, S. Work Design: Industrial Ergonomics. Scottsdale, Ariz.: Holcomb Hathaway.
(latest ed.).
Meyers, F. E. Manufacturing Facilities Design and Material Handling. Pearson/Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Meyers, F. E. and Stewart, J. R. Motion and Time Study for Lean Manufacturing. Upper Saddle River. N.J.:
Niebel, B. W. and Freivalds, A. Methods, Standards, and Work Design. McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
Salvendy, G. Handbook of Industrial Engineering: Technology and Operations Management (Published in
cooperation with Institute of Industrial Engineers). John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (latest ed.).
260
CC3307
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial / Case study
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
background of materials processing. It provides the conceptual framework to analyse the economic and
technological factors that determine the appropriateness of competing routes for the manufacture of
specific products. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking and problem
solving skills for their life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
understand the basic principles of material processing
conduct material processing analysis for the manufacture of specific products
appreciate the use of commercial software for the simulation of material processing conditions
apply relevant material processing knowledge to identify, formulate and solve material processing
problems
Indicative Contents
Processing of Metallic Products
Classification of manufacturing processes; Casting; Powder metallurgy; Bulk formation; Sheet metal
forming; Fastening and joining; Conventional and non-conventional material removal; Bulk and
surface treatment; Surface finishing.
Processing of Polymeric Products
Injection molding; Compression and transfer molding; Extrusion; Thermoforming; Casting; Rotation
molding; Fastening and joining; Finishing of plastic parts; Advanced molding technologies.
Processing of Composites and Ceramic Products
Processing of composites: sheet molding, bulk molding, preform molding, resin-injection molding,
pultrusion, hand lay-up, spray-up and filament winding; Processing of ceramic products by casting,
molding, extrusion, pressing, sintering and finishing.
Simulation
Introducing and demonstrating process simulation software for both metal and plastic processing.
261
Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of relevant theories and materials processing
practices. Occasional group discussions might be arranged.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life material processing issues. The activities in
tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies.
Assessment Approach
Indicative Readings
Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid, R. S. Manufacturing Engineering and Technology. Upper Saddle River, N.J.:
References
Groover, M. P. Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems. John Wiley
& Sons. (latest ed.).
Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid, R. S. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials, Upper Saddle
River, N.J.: Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Schey, J. A. Introduction to Manufacturing Processes. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
262
CC3308
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Quality Engineering
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial / Case study
CC2003 Quantitative Methods OR CC2030 Mathematics OR
CC2053 Introduction to Calculus and Linear Algebra
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with the analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of the
theoretical background of quality engineering. It provides students with a conceptual framework to analyse
quality engineering issues involved in both the manufacturing and service industries so as to diagnose
quality problems and develop sustainable improvement. Studying the subject will also help students to
develop their critical thinking and problem solving skills for their life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
grasp the basic concepts of quality
identify the functions served by a quality management system
design quality elements into products that satisfy both internal and external customers
control process performance using appropriate statistical tools
diagnose quality problems and develop sustainable improvement
outcomes
Indicative Contents
Quality Management Processes
Modern quality concepts; Quality planning; Quality control; Quality improvement.
Design for Quality
Failure mode, effects and criticality analysis (FMECA); Taguchi approach to achieving quality; Design
reviews.
Statistical Quality Control
Process variation; Process capability study; Control charts for variables and attributes; Statistical
tolerancing; Acceptance sampling plans for attributes: single double and multiple sampling.
Supplier Partnership
Supplier evaluation and selection; Joint planning with suppliers; Best practices of partnership with
suppliers.
263
Quality Management Systems
Total quality management; ISO9000/14000 series of standards; Quality audits; Product and system
certification programs.
Quality Improvement
Project approach to quality improvement; Diagnostic techniques for identifying root causes;
Implementing change and sustaining gains; Kaizen; Team working; 6-Sigma programs.
Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of relevant theories in quality engineering practices.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life quality engineering issues. The activities in
tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies.
Assessment Approach
Indicative Reading
References
Aikens, C. H. Quality: a corporate force - managing for excellence. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Bentley, J.P. Introduction to reliability and quality engineering. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Besterfield, D. H. Total quality management. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Gitlow, H. S. Quality management. Boston, Mass: McGraw-Hill/Irwin. (latest ed.).
Peach, R. W.,The ISO 9000 handbook. New York: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Pyzdek, T. The Six Sigma handbook: a complete guide for green belts, black belts, and managers at all
levels. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Pyzdek, T. Quality engineering handbook. New York: Marcel Dekker. (latest ed.).
Smith, G. Statistical process control and quality improvement. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson/Prentice
Hall. (latest ed.).
264
CC3309
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
14 hours of Lecture
20 hours of Seminar
8 hours of Tutorial / Laboratory
Nil
70% Coursework
30% Examination
Aims
This subject is designed for engineering students to learn about the role of professional engineers
in real-life situations and their responsibilities towards the profession, colleagues, employers,
clients and the public. It makes students appreciate the historical context of modern technology
and the nature of the process whereby technology develops. It also enables students to describe the
social, political, and economic impact of technology on society. In addition, it helps students to
appreciate the effects of the use of technology relating to safety, health and environment and the
implied social costs and benefits. Moreover, it provides students with the information about
professional conduct, the legal and moral constraints relating to various engineering aspects.
Learning Outcomes
describe the different types of intellectual property protection and to evaluate the impacts of
modern technology on education, business and societal development
identify the importance of professional conduct and responsibilities in various engineering
activities
identify the effects on the use of technology relating to health and safety, environment and
welfare of the public in real life cases
interpret the academic, training and professional requirement of local and overseas
professional engineering institutions
Indicative Contents
Technology, Values, and Society
Trend and transfer of technology; Impact of technology on society; Research and
development; Innovation and creativity; Quality assurance and product life-cycle; The
outlook of Hong Kong's industry, its supporting organizations and impact on development
from the China Markets.
265
Safety, Health, and Environment
Industrial health and safety including the work of the Labour Department and the
Occupational Health and Safety Council; Industrial legislation; Environmental protection and
related issues; Role of the engineer in energy conservation, ecological balance and sustainable
development.
Professionalism and Codes of Ethics
Local and overseas professional institutions and education systems; Training of engineers;
Professional ethics; Bribery and corruption including the work of the Independent
Commission Against Corruption (ICAC); Social responsibilities of engineers; Intellectual
property rights such as patents and copyright protection; The work of the Intellectual Property
Department; Contract law for engineers.
Current issues and relevant topics will be introduced during the lectures, some of which may be
delivered by invited or guest speakers. Students need to read relevant articles from newspapers,
magazines and journals through guided study for their group projects. The lecturer will act as a
facilitator in the group discussion in the seminar sessions of case studies.
Assessment Approach
The coursework will include paper writing, practical assignments and mini-projects. A variety of
assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an
examination designed to develop and assess the students’ understanding and aspects on different
society issues, impacts and responsibilities, such as, technology transfer, professional conduct and
sustainable development.
Indicative Readings
Harris, C.E., Pritchard, M.S. and Rabins, M.J.
Wadsworth Cengage Learning (latest ed.)
Engineering Ethics: Concepts and Cases.
References
Fleddermann, C.B. Engineering Ethics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Herkert, J.R. Social, Ethical and Policy Implications of Engineering: Selected readings. IEEE
Press. (latest ed.).
Mitcham, C. and Duval, R.S. Engineering Ethics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Winston, M.E. and Edelbach, R.D. Society, Ethics and Technology. Thomson Learning. (latest
ed.).
266
CC3310
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces students to the probability theory and its applications to statistics. It provides
students with various statistical skills in solving practical problems under uncertainty in engineering,
business, reliability, management science, and other similar fields of endeavour. It also addresses
formulating managerial problems and skills in solving the problems by appropriate mathematical models.
Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking and analytic skills for their
life-long learning.
Learning Outcomes
recognise the use and limitations of quantitative methods in analysing real life problems.
appreciate risk and uncertainty from observed data
apply appropriate statistical methods to solve practical problems under uncertainty in engineering,
business, reliability, management science, and other similar fields of endeavour
interpret statistical results and make decisions
formulate managerial problems and solve the problems by appropriate mathematical models
use computer software to conduct management science and statistical data analysis
Indicative Contents
Probability Law
Elementary probability rules; Permutation and combination; Conditional probability; Statistical
independence; Law of Total Probability; Bayes Theorem.
Introduction to Statistical Inference
Sampling Methods; Advantages and Limitation of Statistical Inference; Roles of computer software in
data analysis.
Sampling Distributions and Parameter Estimation
Normal distribution; Sampling distributions; Central limit theorem; Confidence interval estimations
and interpretation; Sample size determination.
Hypothesis Testing
267
Null and alternative hypotheses; The use of p-values; One-sample, two-sample and paired-sample t-test;
Types of error; Analysis of variance; Non-parametric statistics.
Correlation and Linear Regression
Scatter plots; Correlation coefficient; Regression model; Assumptions; Least squares estimation;
Interpretation of slope and intercept; Prediction; Inferences of slope; Coefficient of determination,.
Queuing Theory and Network Models
Single and multiple channel queuing models; Constant service time model and more complex queuing
models; Fundaments of network models.
Linear Programming
Formulation of optimization problems as linear programming; Simplex method and Sensitivity
Analysis; Transportation and Assignment Problem.
Topics are first introduced in lectures. Emphasis is on problem formulation, problem solving skills,
assumptions, and interpretations. Tutorials are conducted in groups to reinforce the materials covered in the
lectures. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts
taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life engineering/business/industrial
problems. The activities in tutorials normally include discussions of problem sets.
Assessment Approach
assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students' achievement of subject
Indicative Readings
Navidi. Statistics for Engineers and Scientists. Mcgraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Hillier, F.S., Hillier, M.S. and Lieberman, G.J. Introduction to Management Science – A Modelling and
Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
268
References
DeGroot, M. H. and Schervish, M. J. Probability and Statistics. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Johnson, R. A. Probability and Statistics for Engineers. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Montgomery, D. C. and Runger, G. C. Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers. John Wiley and
Sons, Inc. (latest ed.).
Walpole, R. E. Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
269
CC3311
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject provides students with the fundamental knowledge of material science and
engineering. The subject also provides students with basic knowledge and concepts relating to the
properties of engineering materials and their applications in a wide range of engineering
industries.
Learning Outcomes
describe the underlying physical principles that govern materials properties.
identify the mechanical properties of materials.
differentiate the availability of various engineering materials, their characteristic structure and
properties relationship.
identify the failure of materials.
apply the knowledge of materials engineering to solve a host of engineering problems in a
global and societal context.
design simple engineering components, like gears.
develop problem-solving abilities.
Indicative Contents
Mechanics of Electrons
Historical development of modern physics; The experiment-theory cycle; Principles and
postulations of quantum mechanics; Introduction of the concept of quantum states, energy levels
and quantum jumps through quantum description of electron in a hydrogen atom.
270
Electromagnetic Properties of Materials
Energy band structure; Density of states in solids; Classification of conductors, semiconductors
and insulators; Fermi energy and distribution of electrons in energy bands; Electronic
conduction in materials (drift, diffusion, and tunneling); Optical properties; Absorption,
transmission and emission of photons in materials; Luminescence; Lasers; Hall experiment;
Magnetism; Superconductivity; Piezoelectricity.
Mechanical Properties of Materials
Bonding and crystal structure; Thermal processes and mass transport; Crystal defects; Stress
stain relationship; Microstructure and its effects; Strengthening mechanisms; Fracture, materials
degradation; Design on simple structural member; Factors of safety.
Engineering Materials and Applications
Metals and alloys; Polymers; Ceramics; Composites; Composite structures design; Shape
memory alloys and smart structures; Magnetic materials; Superconducting materials; Optical
fibres; Piezoelectric materials.
The subject will be delivered mainly through lectures but these will be substantially supplemented
by tutorial, case studies and laboratory. Practical problems and cases will be raised as a focal
point for discussion in tutorial classes, and the laboratory will be used to illustrate and assimilate
some fundamental principles of materials science.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, written reports, tests and
examination to assess the concepts as well as analytical skills.
Indicative Readings
Callister, William D. Jr. Materials Science and Engineering: An introduction, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc.. (latest ed.).
References
Giancoli, D.C. Physics for Scientist and Engineers, Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Mangonon, Pat L. The Principles of Materials Selection for Engineering Desgin, Prentice Hall.
(latest ed.).
Wolfson, Richard and Pasachoff, Jay M. Physics with Modern Physics, Addison-Wesley. (latest
ed.).
271
CC3312
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Thermofluids
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with the knowledge of basic concepts in fluids and systems
used in thermal science including thermodynamic laws, processes and cycles, work and heat. It
also provides an introduction of HVAC systems used in building services engineering to students.
Learning Outcomes
identify the implications of thermodynamic laws and their applications to heat engine.
apply basic knowledge of thermodynamics to the analysis of heat and work transfer in
thermodynamic processes.
understand the basic principles of fluid mechanics.
apply the principles of fluid mechanics in fluid motion and flow measurement.
identify the needs for and the functions of HVAC systems in buildings.
apply the fundamental principles of thermodynamics and fluid mechanics to building services
engineering/mechanical engineering.
possible outcomes.
Indicative Contents
Basic Fluid and Thermodynamics Properties
State; Close and open systems; Thermal properties; Temperature and the zeroth law; Work and
heat; Process and cycle; Ideal gas; Equation of state of ideal gas; Pure substance; Phase
diagrams; Fluid properties and thermodynamic properties of air, water and refrigerants.
The First Law of Thermodynamics
The First Law for a control mass undergoing a process/cycle; Internal energy; Enthalpy;
Constant volume and constant pressure specific heats; Conservation of mass and control
volume; The first law for a control volume; The steady-flow energy equation and its
applications.
272
The Second Law of Thermodynamics
Heat engines and refrigerators; The Second Law of Thermodynamics; Reversible and
irreversible processes; Forward Carnot cycle; Thermodynamic temperature scale; Inequality of
Clausius; Entropy and irreversibility; T-s diagram; The second law for a control mass/control
volume; Isentropic efficiency.
Refrigeration Studies
Refrigeration cycle; Compression, condensation, throttling and evaporation processes and heat
and work transfer; Corollaries of Second Law; T-s and P-h diagrams; Refrigerators and heat
pumps; Coefficient of performance; Source and sink of heat and their effects on COP; Ideal and
actual refrigeration cycles; Two-stages and multi-stage refrigeration systems; Sub-cooling and
super-cooling; Refrigeration capacity control devices; Condenser and evaporator as heat
exchangers; Refrigerants; Ozone depletion and global warming.
Compressors
Types of compressor; Factors affecting the performance of compressors.
Introduction to HVACR Systems
Functions of HVACR services in buildings; Configuration of HVACR systems in buildings;
Introduction to operations of HVACR systems including functions of individual equipment and
sub-systems; Transports of fluid and heat in the system and energy input requirement of the
systems; Heat and work transfer processes in HVACR systems.
Fundamentals of Fluids and Fluid Statics
Fluid properties; Viscosity and shear stress; Compressibility; Newtonian and Non-Newtonian
fluids; Fluid pressure; Pascal’s law; Pressure-height relation; Manometry; Forces on submerged
surfaces.
General Description of Fluid in Motion and Flow Measurement
Steady and unsteady; Uniform and non-uniform; Incompressible and compressible; Laminar and
turbulent; Continuity and Bernoulll’s equation; Streamline and streamtube; Flow; Momentum
equation.
273
Lectures and tutorials will emphasize the concepts and applications of the principles and key
issues, using an interactive approach. The laboratory sessions will be used to illustrate and
assimilate the fundamental principles of thermofulids.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, written reports, tests and an
examination to assess the concepts as well as analytical skills.
Indicative Readings
Cengel Y.A. and Turner R.H. Fundamentals of Thermal-Fluid Sciences. McgrawHill. (latest ed.).
References
Eastop, T.D. and McConkey A. Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologists., John
Wiley. (latest ed.).
Gouglas, J.F., Gasiorek, J.M. and Swaffield, J.A. Fluid Mechanics. Longman Group. (latest ed.).
McQuiston, F.C., Parker, J.D. and Spitler, J.D. Heating, Ventilating and Air-conditioning Analysis
and Design. John Wiley. (latest ed.).
274
CC3313
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Linear Systems
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject provides students with the basic concept and techniques for the modeling and analysis of
linear continuous-time and discrete-time signals and systems. It also provides students with an analytical
foundation for further studies in Communication Engineering, Control Engineering, and Digital Signal
Processing.
Learning Outcomes
describe different representations and classifications of signals and systems
analyse signals and systems using time-domain, frequency-domain, and s-domain techniques
appraise the design of analogue filters
identify the advantages and disadvantages on using different representations and modeling techniques
apply software tool to analyse and design of signals and systems
outcomes
Indicative Contents
Classification of Signals
Continuous and discrete-time signals; Signals of special importance.
Study on Transform and Responses
Impulse response and convolution; Linear time-invariant systems: Block diagram, Transfer functions;
Fourier series and transform; Spectral density functions; Pole-zero plots; Natural response, transients
and stability; Laplace transform and system responses; Poles and zeros; Root locus method; Synthesis
of analogue filters; Bode plots.
Digital Control
Sampling and digitalization of signals; Digital networks and z-transform; z-plane characterization;
Mapping between s-plane and z-plane; Introduction to digital filtering.
State-space Representation
Canonical forms; Similarity transformation; Relation with transfer function; Eigenvalues and system
stability; State-transition matrix.
275
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of basic concept and essential knowledge in linear
systems and signals, and how these can be applied to analyse continuous-time and discrete-time signals and
systems.
lectures. Laboratory sessions provide students with the opportunity to use software tools in assisting the
analysis and design of signals and systems.
Assessment Approach
develop and assess student’s achievement of the subject expected learning outcomes.
Indicative Readings
Roberts, M. J. Signals and Systems: Analysis Using Transform Methods and MATLAB. McGraw Hill.
(latest ed.).
References
Phillips, C. L., Par, J. M. and Riskin, E. A. Signals, Systems, and Transforms (3rd ed.) Prentice Hall. (2003).
Kamen, E. W. and Heck, B. S. Fundamentals of Signals and Systems: Using the Web and MATLAB ( 2nd
ed.) Prentice Hall. (2000).
Denbigh, P. System Analysis and Signal Processing. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Ziemer, R. E., et al. Signals and Systems: Continuous and Discrete. Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
Haykin, S. and Veen, B. V. Signals and Systems. Wiley. (2003).
276
CC3314
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusion
Assessment
Engineering Project
3
3
Science
English
10 hours of Lecture (to be arranged in first 5 weeks)
32 hours of Laboratory / Seminar (supervised)
32 hours of Independent Study (unsupervised)
CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing
CC3206 Programming Project &
CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project
100% Coursework
40% continuous assessment
20% analysis, design, project management
40% reports and presentations
Aims
The subject equips students with the analytical skills necessary for working on engineering
projects. It provides students with training on practical techniques in problem formation, product
modeling, project planning, computer drafting and simulation of product design, where the basic
techniques in using CAD/CAM tools in the design process will be used. It also provides an
opportunity for students to work as a team so they can appreciate different parts of the whole
process in product design and development.
Learning Outcomes
develop the techniques to formulate engineering problems in a scientific manner and propose
engineering solutions subsequently.
identify and evaluate solutions to solving the engineering problems with the use of analytical
tools and engineering software.
integrate the use of CAD/CAM tools in product design and development process.
distinguish parts in products which require engineering design and analysis.
recognise the needed skills in acquiring scientific or engineering information from libraries
and other sources.
write technical reports in a professional manner and make presentations.
possible outcomes.
develop interpersonal skills and leadership in teamwork environment.
Indicative Contents
Introduction
277
Role of engineering design in industry; Relationships of design with other engineering and
commercial functions; Conceptual, analysis and development of design.
Geometric Dimension and Tolerance
Limits and fits; Dimensional and geometrical tolerances; Applications to design.
Cost Evaluation
Categories of costs; Cost estimates; Cost indices; Cost-capacity factors; Factor method of cost
estimation; Pricing of product/project; Life cycle costing; Cost models.
Project Management
Identify objectives; Propose engineering projects to meet specific requirements; Estimate and
manage the costs of engineering projects; Manage lifecycles of engineering projects;
Accumulate experience by experiments.
The Project
This would be divided up into several stages, and students would be required to submit a
project plan and project prototype.
Lectures focus on introducing and explaining key techniques in formulating problems and the
proposed solutions in a professional manner. Emphasis is placed on developing practical skills in
writing up technical documents and making formal presentations. Lectures also cover the concepts
and hands-on techniques required in using CAD/CAM tools.
Supervised laboratory/seminar sessions provide students with the opportunity to discuss and work
on their projects in teams, with the lecturer providing guidance and feedback at different stages for
students to work consistently towards their project goals, as well as monitoring the progress of
each team to ensure projects are done at a reasonable pace. Students are required to write their log
books continuously during the project design and development process.
Assessment Approach
The course consists of a group (3-4 students) project for students to develop and apply their
engineering skills in problem formulation and product design/development. Students’ continuous
efforts in working on the project (e.g. log books writing, CAD/CAM tools competency, etc) will
also be assessed.
Indicative Readings
Reference
Black, R. Design and manufacture: an integrated approach. Basingstoke [England]: Palgrave
Macmillan. (latest ed.).
Cooper, K.G. Rapid prototyping technology: selection and application. New York: Marcel
Dekker. (latest ed.).
Grabowski, R. Using AutoCAD 2006, Advanced. Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.).
278
Grabowski, R. Using AutoCAD 2006, Basics. Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.).
Lee, K. Principles of CAD/CAM/CAE systems. Reading, Mass. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Otto, K.N. and Wood, K.L. Product design: techniques in reverse engineering and new product
development. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Tickoo S. AutoCAD 2006: A Problem Solving Approach. Thomson Course Technology. (latest
ed.).
Bertline, G. R., et al. Engineering Graphic Communication. Irwin. (latest ed.).
Giesecke F. E. et al. Engineering Graphics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Giesecke, F. E., et al. Modern Graphics Communication. Prentice-Hall, N.J. (latest ed.).
Dieter, G. Engineering Design. McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
Hurst, K. Engineering Design Principles. Arnold. (latest ed.).
Ertas, A. and Jones, J.C. The Engineering Design Process. John Wiley. (latest ed.).
279
CC3315
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Exclusion
Assessment
Applied Mechanics
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2304 Engineering Mechanics
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of principles of
static and equivalent systems. It provides practice in modeling and analysing simple load bearing system
and provide a conceptual framework for force and stress analysis.
Learning Outcomes
understand the basic principles and concepts of applied mechanics
solve for the forces and moments in a simple structure
formulate and solve equivalent force/couple systems
use computer software to solve simple structural problems
predict the formation of stresses for simple loading systems
Indicative Contents
Fundamentals of Mechanics
Basic concepts of mechanics; Scalars and Vectors: Vector algebra and components; Position and Unit
Vectors; Two and three-dimensional force systems; Moment of a force about a point; Moment of force
about a line.
Statics
Equilibrium of a particle and the associated free-body diagrams; Equilibrium of a rigid body and the
associated free body diagram; Two- and three force members equilibrium in three dimensions; Simple
trusses: The method of joints, the method of sections, zero-force members; Internal forces developed in
structural members; Stress in light weighted structure; Shear and moment equations and diagrams;
Relations between distributed load, shear and moment; Flexural formula; Theory of dry friction;
Systems with friction; Wedges; Belt friction; Rolling resistance.
Equivalent Systems
Determination of the resultant concurrent forces; Equivalent force/couple systems; Centre of gravity
and centroid: by composite parts and by integration; Resultant of a general distributed force system;
Moment of interia of areas/mass; Parallel-axis theorem for an area; Radius gyration of an area;
280
Calculation of moments of areas/mass: by composite areas and by integration; Product of inertia for an
area/mass; Application to rigid body dynamics; Principles of virtual work.
Lectures and tutorials will emphasize the concepts and applications of the principles and key issues, using
an interactive approach.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, written reports, tests and an examination
to assess the concepts as well as analytical skills.
Indicative Readings
Meriam, J. L., Kraige, L. G. and Palm, W. J. Engineering Mechanics – Statics (5th ed.) J. Wiley. (2002).
References
Beer, F. P. et al. Vector Mechanics for Engineers – Statics. McGraw-Hill. (latest SI metric ed.).
Hibbeler, R. C. Engineering Mechanics: Statics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
281
CC3316
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisite
Exclusion
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
CC2306 Built Environment
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with a basic understanding of building services and architectural principles
governing the design of a building. This subject provides students with a basic knowledge on the sensitivity
of human beings to their surroundings, the functions of buildings as controlled environment for human
activities, and the external environmental variables which can affect the building envelope and the
environmental control systems. It also develops student’s ability in the appreciation of the architectural or
building design and its development and procurement processes and relevant building technology elements
in conjunction with building services design requirements.
Learning Outcomes
describe and quantify human responses to environmental stimuli
identify the role of building services engineer in the design team within the construction industry
appreciate the processes of building design, construction and commissioning
measure and evaluate the basic parameters for assessing environment
carry out simple calculations related to variables describing the built environment
integrate the architectural and building concepts with building services installations
Indicative Contents
Human Senses
Sensation and stimulus; Non-linearity and power law; Subjective sensory perception; Visual sense and
the eye; Aural sense and ear; Skin senses of heat and cold.
Outdoor and Indoor Environment
Climatology; Seasonal variation; Wind; Temperature; Humidity; Solar radiation; Direct and diffuse
solar radiation; Microclimate; Thermal environment measurements; Thermal comfort; Visual
environment measurement; Visual comfort and performance; Lighting criteria; Aural environment
measurement; Sound and noise; Room acoustics; Natural ventilation.
Appreciation of Architecture Design
Architectural concepts based on existing set of conditions (social, political, economic climate,
functional); Design problems and solutions.
HKIA/RIBA Outline Plan of Work
282
Role of building services engineer in the design team; HKIA/RIBA outline plan of work; Formulation
of the client’s BSE requirement brief.
Building Envelop and Passive Environmental Control
Passive environmental controls and climatic design; Daylighting from windows and skylights; Noise
transmission through windows and building envelop; Concept of sustainability.
Building Technology and BSE Integration
Technology for high-rise commercial and residential developments; Building structural systems;
Enclosure systems; Interior sub-division system; Access ceiling and flooring system; Integration of
building elements with the building services installations.
Lectures and tutorials constitute the delivery of the subject. Lectures aim at delivering the basic concepts
and knowledge of building technology and building services principles. The knowledge will be
consolidated through tutorials. Tutorials will be conducted in different formats, such as problem-solving
exercises, case studies, and presentations, in order to encourage active participation and learning of
students.
Assessment Approach
An examination and coursework will constitute 60% and 40% of the overall grade of the subject
respectively. The written examination aims to assess students’ ability to apply concepts learned for solving
problems on daily maintenance works. Coursework which includes in-class tests, oral presentations and
written reports on specific topics serves to consolidate students’ knowledge, and to assess students’
understanding to the topics chosen, as well as their analytical and communication skills.
Indicative Readings
Lecher, N. Heating, Cooling, Lighting Design Methods for Architect. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (latest ed.).
References
Brown, G.Z. Sun, Wind and Light – Architectural Design Strategies. John Wiley & Sons. (latest ed.).
Building Design and Development in Hong Kong. Division of Building Science and Technology. City
University of Hong Kong Press. (www.cityu.edu.hk/press).
Ching, F.D.K. Architecture: Form, Space and Order. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (latest ed.).
Construct for Excellence. Report of the Construction Industry Review Committee. January 2001. (free
download).
Fanger, P.O. Thermal Comfort: Analysis and applications in environmental engineering. McGraw-Hill.
(1972).
Goldstein, E.B. Sensation and Perception. Wadsworth Publishing Company, California. (latest ed.).
McMullan, R. Environmental Science in Building, Palgrave Macmillan. (latest ed.).
Moore, F. Environmental Control Systems – heating cooling lighting. McGraw-Hill Inc. (latest ed.).
283
Reid, E. Understanding Buildings: A Multi-disciplinary Approach. Longman Group Ltd. (latest ed.).
Stein, B. and Reynolds, J.S. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment. John Wiley. (latest ed.).
Wong, W.S. Building Enclosure in Hong Kong, Hong Kong University Press. (latest ed.).
284
CC3317
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Food Chemistry
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the basic concepts in the chemistry of food. There is emphasis on the chemistry of
food components, including macro-constituents (water, carbohydrates, lipids and proteins), microconstituents (vitamins, pigments and food additives), and their interactions.
Learning Outcomes
comprehend basic information on the composition of foods and the chemical and physical
characteristics they undergo during processing, storage, and handling
understand the impacts of chemical reactions occurring in foods on their safety, sensory and nutritional
qualities
demonstrate their knowledge on food chemistry on the important control points and consequences of
the reactions
recognize the underlying physicochemical mechanisms responsible for food functionality in real
examples
Indicative Contents
Introduction to Food Chemistry
Major and minor components in foods. Examples of chemical reactions occurring in foods and the
impacts on their safety, sensory and nutritional qualities.
Water
Structure and properties of water and ice. Influence of water activity on food spoilage, packaging and
food processing.
Carbohydrates
Structure and properties of different carbohydrates including monosaccharides, oligosaccarides,
polysaccharides and its related compounds. Gelatinization of starch. Caramelization and maillard
reactions.
285
Lipids
Structure, properties and classification. Autoxidation and lipolysis. Hydrogenation. Rancidity and
antioxidants.
Protein
Structure, properties and classification of protein. Denaturation of protein. Food protein system: milk,
cheese, meat and bread.
Vitamins
Vitamins: water-soluble and fat-soluble. Effect of processing and storage on vitamins.
Additives
Chemistry and technical roles of food additives. Enhance nutritive value, sensory value and shelf life
of food. Antioxidants, preservatives, surface-active agents and others.
Food Flavour
Structure and taste of food flavour. Flavour enhancers. Sweeteners.
Pigments
Pigments including chlorophylls, carotenoids and flavonoids. Changes in plant pigments during
processing.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of the chemistry of foods. Real-life examples and
industrial practices are cited in lectures and tutorials to integrate chemistry and its application in food.
Lectures will be conducted in an interactive manner and students will be encouraged to participate in the
activities.
Tutorials provide students with opportunities to broaden, enlighten and reinforce the general knowledge
obtained in the lectures. Students will be involved in classroom activities, such as presentation and
discussion, to strengthen and backup the knowledge.
Laboratories provide the opportunities for students to have hands on practice.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including presentations, case studies, laboratories, group discussion, tests and
examination will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical and communication skills.
286
Indicative Readings
Coultate, T.P. Food; The Chemistry of Its Components. Cambridge: The Royal Society of Chemistry (latest
ed.)
References
Clark, N. Food Chemisty. Food Trade Press (latest ed.)
Damodaran, S., Parkin, K.L. and Fennema, O.R. (ed.) Fennema’s Food Chemistry. CRC Press (latest ed.)
DeMan, J.M. Principles of Food Chemistry. Maryland: Aspen (latest ed.)
Owusu-Apenten, R. Introduction to Food Chemistry. New York : CRC Press (latest ed.)
287
CC3318
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Physical Chemistry
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
6 hours of laboratory
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces fundamental knowledge and concepts in physical chemistry, such as atomic
structures, quantum chemistry, thermodynamics, kinetics and electrochemistry. Thus to help students gain
knowledge and understanding of chemistry required for their advanced studies in Analytical Chemistry and
related advanced level programmes.
Learning Outcomes
deploy the knowledge learned for exploring the basic principles of thermodynamics, reaction rate
equations and theories, properties of ions in solutions, electrochemical reactions;
perform basic chemistry experiments as well as to evaluate, analyze and interpret experimental
results;
identify and solve problems on learned topics in related areas of chemistry and other fields as well
as real-life cases;
function well in team work; and
perform independent and analytical thinking in physical chemistry topics.
Indicative Contents
Atomic Structure and Elementary Quantum Chemistry and the Periodic Table
The classical model of atomic structure, particle-wave duality of light, de Broglie wavelength, atomic
spectra and energy quantization, uncertainty principle, wave properties of electron, Schrödinger wave
equation of motion, quantum numbers, atomic orbitals, multielectron systems, atomic structure and
atomic spectra, electron configuration, ionization energy, electron affinity, electronegativity, Physical
properties of first 20th elements in periodic table, spectroscopy.
288
Thermodynamics and Kinetics and Equilibrium
State function, 0th law, enthalpy, adiabatic changes, thermochemistry, heat and work, internal energy,
enthalpy of chemical reactions, calorimetry, 2nd law, criteria for spontaneous change, entropy, Gibbs
free energy, Rate equations and rate constants, reaction mechanism and elementary reactions, isobaric
and reversible processes, spontaneity of reaction, Nernst equation, equilibrium constants, and factors
that affect Chemical equilibrium; Reaction rate theories: Collision and absolute rate theories, activation
energy, temperature dependence of rate constants, steady-state approximation, transition state theory.
Molecular Motion and Spectroscopy
Degrees of freedom: Translation, Rotation and Vibration, Rotational motion, vibrational motion,
electronic transitions in molecules.
Electrochemical Properties and Electrolyte Solution
Electrolyte and properties of ions: ion activities, conductivity, ionic mobility, ionic strength, DebyeHuckel theory. Electrochemical cell and its properties: Electromotive force (emf) and free energy,
Nernst equation and its applications.
Laboratory Techniques
Perform basic physical chemistry laboratory techniques and operate various instruments to solve
problems on topics discussed and interpret the data obtained.
Lectures focus on the introduction of thermodynamics, reaction rate equations and theories, properties of
ions in solutions, electrochemical reactions. Lectures will be conducted in an interactive manner and
students will be encouraged to participate in the activities.
Laboratories provide the opportunities for students to have hands on practice and enhance their report
writing skills.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including report writing, laboratories, group discussion, tests and
Indicative Readings
Atkins, P.W. The Elements of Physical Chemistry. Oxford University (latest ed.)
References
Atkins, P., and J. de Paula. Physical Chemistry. New York: W.H. Freeman and Company (latest ed.)
McQuarrie, D. A. Quantum Chemistry. Sausalito: University Science Books (latest ed.)
289
Chang, R. General Chemistry: The Essential Concepts. Mc-Graw Hill (latest ed.)
Ball, D.W. Physical Chemistry. Thomson (latest ed.)
Noggle, J.H. Physical Chemistry. Harper Collins (latest ed.)
Alberty, R.A. Silbey, R.J. Physical Chemistry. Wiley (latest ed.)
Levine, I.N. Physical Chemistry. Mc-Graw Hill (latest ed.)
290
CC3319
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Organic Chemistry
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
6 hours of laboratory
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces fundamental knowledge and concepts in organic chemistry and to show some of the
key evidence which supports the concepts. The subject also introduces technologies used in organic
chemistry that plays a key role in development of organic materials in modern world.
Learning Outcomes
state the meanings of organic chemical terms, symbols, structural representations, and abbreviations;
state how typical organic compounds react, how to synthesize selected organic compounds, and how
the mechanism of which selected organic reactions occur;
perform basic organic laboratory techniques with emphasis in laboratory safety such as chemical
reactions of different functional groups, processes in separation, purification of organic chemicals; and
deduce of simple organic compounds by using spectroscopic techniques and/or via chemical reactions.
Indicative Contents
Introduction to Organic Chemistry
Atoms, molecules, bonding of organic molecules, solubility, Lewis structures, preliminary ideas of
resonance, acids and bases reactions, introduction to orbitals, molecular orbital description of bonding,
hybridization.
Stereochemistry and Spectroscopy
Chirality, enantiomerism, R-S notation, diastereomerism, optical resolution. Principle of nuclear
Magnetic Resonance (NMR) spectroscopy and Infrared (IR) and UV spectroscopy.
291
Functional Groups
Study of various functional groups with its structure, synthesis and chemical reactions. Functional
groups including alkanes, alkyl halides, alkenes,alkynes, alcohols, aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic
acids, ester and amine.
Chemical Reactions
Nucleophilic substitution at saturated carbon. Elimination reactions. Electrophilic addition to carboncarbon multiple bonds. Electrophilic substitution of aromatic compounds. Nucleophilic additions to
carbonyl compounds.
Laboratory Techniques
Perform basic organic chemistry laboratory techniques, such as chemical reactions of different
functional groups, processes in separation, purification of organic chemicals, and analyse the
functional group of organic compounds with emphasis in laboratory safety.
Lectures focus on the introduction of chemical reactions of functional groups of organic chemicals, and
explanation of separation, purification, measurement whenever appropriate. Lectures will be conducted in
an interactive manner and students will be encouraged to participate in the activities.
Laboratories provide the opportunities for students to have hands on practice.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including presentations, laboratories, group discussion, tests and examination
will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical and communication skills.
Indicative Readings
Wade, L. G. Organic Chemistry. NJ : Prentice Hall (latest ed.)
References
Brown, W.H. Organic Chemistry. Thomson/Brooks/Cole (latest ed.)
Carey, F.A. Organic Chemistry. New York : McGraw-Hill Higher Education (latest ed.)
Hesse, M. Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemistry New York: Thieme (latest ed.)
Smith, J. G. Organic Chemistry New York: McGraw-Hill, (latest ed.)
Smith, M. March's Advanced Organic Chemistry : reactions, mechanisms, and structure. Hoboken, N.J.:
Wiley-Interscience, (latest ed.)
292
CC3401
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusion
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
6 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Laboratory (supervised)
28 hours of Laboratory (unsupervised)
Satisfactory completion of 6 or more Award-specific subjects
offered under the Associate in Statistics and Computing for
Business award including
(a) CC2201 Principles of Programming &
(b) CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods
CC3206 Programming Project &
CC3314 Engineering Project
100% Coursework
Aims
This subject provides students studying for the Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business award
an opportunity to integrate and apply their statistics and computing knowledge and skills acquired in earlier
semesters through a practical group project applied to solve business problems. It aims to develop and
explore the capabilities of students to analyse and solve a business problem.
Learning Outcomes
conduct a thorough search on relevant literature, materials or sources relating to their selected problem
area leading to an awareness, precise definition and specification of the problem
demonstrate critical thinking in the formulation of models and solutions
implement feasible solutions to business problems using one or more techniques
communicate and present clearly and concisely their solutions to business problems
manage their group project efficiently, effectively and collaboratively
Project Description
Under the guidance of the subject lecturer, students are expected to work in groups of 4 for one or more
feasible solutions for business problems. The total effort required from each student is approximately 42
hours of staff contact and 28 hours of laboratory and 98 hours of independent work and independent study,
which includes the total time spent on literature search, background reading, fact finding, project
development, and report writing.
Projects are normally proposed by the subject lecturer. However, students may propose projects in their
areas of interest, subject to the approval by the scheme leader or his/her delegate. Projects should be
problem-oriented and the nature of the problem should be related to a business application. Application of
statistical/computing technique and/or software is expected.
293
Lecture hours are for the delivery of information related to project requirements and development
environment.
Tutorial hours are used to review student’s development in the approach to the problem, to approve
work allocation proposed by students. These hours are also for progress monitoring; students’
presentations of their design and their solutions to the project.
Supervised laboratory hours are for environment familiarization, progress demonstrations and guidance
for problem solving in laboratory environment.
Each project group has to present formally the scope of the project, their approach to the project, and
demonstrate the operational features of their solutions.
Assessment Approach
The deliverables required from each project group are: an initial project proposal, an approach to the
project, and a final report (including any form of deliverables). The deadlines for these are week 3, week 5
and week 14 of the semester.
Students will be assessed by the subject lecturer based on the following set of criteria and weighting:
i.
Problem Identification and Specification (Literature Search)
20%
ii. Problem Solving (Critical Thinking)
40%
iii. Communication & Presentation (Demonstration and Reports)
30%
iv. Project Management and Self-Discipline
10%
Indicative Reading
References
Reading is based on the project topics.
294
CC3403
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with an overview of the linear model approach (regression analysis)
and the sum of squares approach (analysis of variance) to analyze data. It enables students to have a
thorough understanding of the methods of regression analysis as one of the most widely used statistical
techniques for analyzing data. The subject helps students to develop their ability to analyze the practical
problems with the use of computer statistical packages such as MINITAB and SPSS, as well as commercial
software EXCEL.
Learning Outcomes
gain basic knowledge and understanding of the analysis of variance (ANOVA) approach to analyze
data, as well as the assumptions behind ANOVA.
identify and describe fixed-effects model and random-effects model when dealing with one-factor
ANOVA problems.
analyze and report the results of the ANOVA problems and assess their significance;
formulate and tackle simple/multiple linear regression problems so as to identify the appropriate model
for the problems.
perform variables selection, estimation and inference on the parameters of the regression model built,
and to diagnose if any problems arise due to violation of assumptions of least square regression
models.
develop the competence in the use of appropriate statistical packages/commercial software for the
analysis of data using univariate ANOVA and linear least squares regression approaches.
manage their own learning and to make use of appropriate texts, learning materials and relevant websites.
develop problem-solving abilities.
Indicative Contents
Simple Linear Regression
Model and assumptions; least squares estimation of parameters; inference on the parameters;
coefficient of determination; confidence interval for the mean value of the response variable;
prediction interval; test for lack of fit; examination of residuals.
Calculation and interpretation of product-moment correlation (Pearson) and rank correlation
(Spearman’s coefficient)
295
Multiple Linear Regression Models
An extension of the simple linear regression model and as a special case of the general linear model
y = X b + e ; estimation and inference on the parameters; partial F-tests; polynomial regression.
Variable Selection and Model Building
Selection of independent variables; criteria for subset regression; the methods of all regressions,
backward elimination, forward selection and stepwise regressions.
Indicator Variables
Concept of indicator variables; use of indicator variables.
Multicollinearity
The problem of multicollinearity; multicollinearity diagnostics; solutions to multicollinearity.
Autocorrelation
Sources and effects of autocorrelation; detecting the presence of autocorrelation; parameter estimation
procedures with autocorrelated errors.
Design of Experiments
Reasons for experimentation, causality.
Principles of replication and randomisation, completely randomised design.
Analysis of Variance
One-way classification, partitioning of the total sum of squares and the degrees of freedom; ANOVA
table; fixed-effects model and random-effects model; expectations of mean squares, estimation of the
overall mean and components of variance. Regression approach to ANOVA.
The first four intended outcomes will be achieved via lectures, tutorial exercises. The fifth and sixth will be
acquired through tutorial discussions and statistical package laboratory sessions.
Assessment Approach
The first four learning outcomes are assessed by test and examinations. The third, fifth and sixth learning
outcomes are assessed by computer assignments with real data.
Indicative Readings
Kutner, M.H., Neter, J. and Wasserman, W., Applied Linear Statistical Models, Irwin (latest ed.).
Walpole, R.E, Myers, R.H. and Myers, S.L., Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists,
Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
References
Bowerman, B.L., O'Connell, R.T. and Dickey, D.A., Linear Statistical Models, An Applied Approach,
Duxbury (latest ed.).
Collet, D., Modelling Binary Data, Chapman and Hall (latest ed.).
296
Dielman, T.E., Applied Regression Analysis for Business and Economics, McGraw Hill (latest ed.).
Draper, N.R. and Smith, H., Applied Regression Analysis, Wiley (latest ed.).
297
CC3406
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Basic Immunology
3
3
Science
English
24 hours of Lecture
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the fundamental principles of immunology and helps students to understand
immunological responses encountered in the beauty and health sectors. Students are also expected to learn
some of the basic immunological techniques applicable to the beauty industry and health related field.
Learning Outcomes
track the development of immunology from past to future
familiarise with anatomy and cell types and components in the immune system
describe the underlying principles of the humoral and cell-mediated immunity
recognise the manifestations of some of the common immune responses like allergy, autoimmunity
and immunity against infection
describe the underlying principles of basic immunological techniques like vaccination and
transplantation
understand the problem of immunodeficiency and carry out simple immunological tests such as
allergen testing or tissue typing
demonstrate enhanced analytical and critical thinking skills
appreciate professional attitude of beauty therapists or health care workers
Indicative Contents
History and Future Potential
Important discoveries and theories by earlier scientists, current developments and future role in biology
and medicine.
Anatomy of the Lymphoid System
Interconnection of the blood and lymphatic systems, primary and secondary lymphoid organs,
lymphocyte recirculation.
Cells in the Immune System and immune response
Origin, properties and biological functions of phagocytes and accessory cells, B and T lymphocytes;
cell markers, characteristics of lymphokines, humoral immunity and cell-mediated immunity.
Antigen
298
Basic properties of antigen, immunogen, hapten and epitopes; adjuvants, major antigenic systems of
the body.
Immunoglobulin
Structure and function, generation of antibody diversity, regulation of antibody response.
The Complement System
Activation pathways, action of activated complement factors, biological significance.
Immunity Against Infections
Host defence mechanisms including innate immunity and specific immunity, immunization and
vaccines.
Wounds and Wound-healing
Types and phases of wound-healing; scar, hypertrophic scar, and keloid formation and treatment.
Allergy and Autoallergy
Types of hypersensitivity reactions, organ specific and non-organ specific autoimmune diseases, past
beliefs and current concepts of autoimmunity.
Immunodeficiency States
Primary and secondary immunodeficiency, possible mechanisms and its effects on skin appearance, for
example, systemic lupus erythematosis.
Transplantation Immunology
Types of grafts, tolerance and rejection, HLA typing, immunosuppressive agents including
cyclosporin.
Immunological Techniques
Antigen-antibody interaction, antibody specificity and cross-reactions, principles, methodology and
applications of immunological tests; production and use of monoclonal antibody.
Lectures emphasize the understanding and explanation of basic information and relevant concepts of
immunology. The principles are illustrated with formal lectures and supplemented with video viewing.
Tutorials provide a venue for discussion, revision and reinforcement of the lecture materials. Tutorial
questions and discussion topics are set to stimulate students’ provocative thinking and learning.
Laboratory sessions are designed to illustrate the theoretical content delivered in lectures and the
application of simple immunological tests like allergen testing or tissue typing as applicable.
Assessment
Students are required to search and read, comment and criticise, summarise and present information in one
individual assignment and several laboratory reports. One test and one end-of-year examination will be
used respectively to check the knowledge assimilated and reinforced from the lecture and tutorial. Each of
the three components, the individual assignment, laboratory reports and the test, will each contribute onethird of the marks of the continuous assessment.
Indicative Readings
299
Wood, P. Understanding Immunology. Essex: Pearson Education Limited. (latest ed.).
References
Roitt, I. and Delves, P. Essential Immunology. Oxford: Blackwell Science. (latest ed.).
Roitt, I. and Robson, A. Really Essential Medical Immunology. Oxford: Blackwell Science. (latest ed.).
Nordmann, L., Appleyard, L., and Linforth, P. Beauty Therapy-The Professional: The Official Guide to
Level 3. Thomson Learning. (latest ed.).
300
CC3409
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
The aim of this subject is to provide students with the concepts and techniques of time series and
forecasting. An applied approach will be emphasized.
Learning Outcomes
differentiate the basic theories of several time series analysis and forecasting approaches
synthesize the relevant statistical knowledge and techniques for forecasting
use popular statistical software for the analysis of time series and forecasting
interpret analysis results and make recommendations for the choice of forecasting methods
produce and evaluate forecasts for given time series
present analysis results of forecasting problems
outcomes
Indicative Contents
Introduction to Forecasting and Smoothing Model
Forecasting and time series, forecasting methods and errors, simple and double exponential smoothing,
Winter's method.
Decomposition Methods
Trend fitting, additive decomposition, multiplicative decomposition.
Nonseasonal Box-Jenkins Models and Their Identification
Stationarity, sample autocorrelation and partial autocorrelation function, tentative identification of
ARMA models.
Estimation, Diagnostic Checking, and Forecasting for Nonseasonal Box-Jenkins Models
Estimating model parameters, diagnostic checking, and forecasting.
Seasonal Box-Jenkins Models
Stationarity, identification, estimation, diagnostic checking and forecasting. Case studies.
301
The first and second learning outcomes will be achieved via lectures and exercises. The third and fourth
will be achieved through laboratory sessions and computing assignments. The fifth and sixth will be
acquired via case studies using real data sets.
Assessment Approach
The first and second learning outcomes will be assessed by written assignments, tests and an examination,
while all others will be assessed by computing assignments and case studies.
Indicative Reading
Bowerman, B. and O’Connell, R. Forecasting and Time Series an Applied Approach. Duxbury Press.
(latest ed.).
Hanke, J.E., Reitsch, A.G. and Wichern, D.W. Business Forecasting. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Reference
Harvey, A.C. Time Series Models. Harvester Wheatsheaf. (latest ed.).
302
CC3411
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Chinese Family and Culture
3
3
Non-Science
Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese), supplemented
by English
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Seminar
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
This subject introduces students to the culture of Chinese family. It equips students with both the basic
understanding of the tradition of Chinese familism in Hong Kong and Mainland China, as well as the
capacity to reflect on the continuity of traditional Chinese elements in families amid the irresistible trend of
modernization in Chinese societies.
Learning Outcomes
identify the basic elements of Chinese culture and their impacts on family relationships.
reflect on personality development and moral development and the Chinese family.
examine critically the impact of modernization on Chinese families in Hong Kong and Mainland
China.
describe and discuss core issues of development of Chinese families in Hong Kong and Mainland
China;
think critically and creatively on issues relating to Chinse family and culture.
Indicative Contents
Basic Elements of Chinese Culture and Chinese Familism
Confucianism and the relational concept of self; Three “bonds’ and five “relationships” in Chinese
humanism; Differential mode of association; Self, family, and society in Chinese culture (renquing,
mianzi, and quanxi); Chinese familism and patrilineal culture; Patriarchy and gender inequality in
Chinese familism; Traditional Chinese family structures and family rites.
Personality and Moral Development and the Chinese Family
Development of Chinese personality in family; Kohlberg’s stages of moral development; universal
ethical principle vs. Chinese situational moral-ethical consideration in interpersonal framework;
Morality and modernization in Chinese society.
Family in Transition in Chinese societies
Modernization and the changes of family structures and functions; Modern Chinese self and cultural
transformation; Changing Chinese families in Hong Kong and Mainland China: utilitarianistic
familism, new forms of Chinese families, Chinese immigrant families, and family crises.
303
Lectures will emphasize clarification of concepts, delineation of theories and summarization of contextual
information. Occasional audio-visual presentation, group discussions and exercises might be arranged in
the lectures.
Seminars will emphasize application of concepts/principles and contextual reflection with an interactive
approach. The activities in seminars normally include student presentations, class exercises and discussion
on articles and local issues.
Assessment Approach
Students will be assessed by their coursework including (1) test on their understanding of concepts and
theories, (2) tutorial presentation and movie/text reflection on their ability to relate theoretical
understanding to local context, and (3) term paper and / or project reports on overall integrative
understanding and reflection of the subject. Students will also be assessed on their participation in lectures
and tutorials.
Indicative Reading
Cherlin, Andrew, Public & Private Families: An Introduction. Boston: McGraw-Hill, 2005.
喬健 ( 編)
年
主
家庭變遷》香港香港
：《中國
及其
：
院暨香港亞太
中文大學社會科學
1991
研究所，
。
References
Slote, Walter and George DeVos, eds., Confucianism and the Family, University of California Press, 1993.
劉錫霖郭康健 ( 編) 蛻變
家庭》香港廣角出版公司 1997 年
楊樞黃光 ( 編)
心為(
)》台北桂冠
公司 1991 年
張懷承
家庭倫》北京
民出版 1988 年
費孝鄉土》香港三店(香港) 公司 1985 年
、
國
、
國
主
：《
主
：《中國人的
：《中國的
通：《
中國
與
中的中國
理
：
，
理與行
：中國人
聯書
：
鏡
一九八九
大學
有限
304
社有限
：
社，
，
圖書
。
。
，
。
，
。
CC3423
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to introduce some elementary techniques of statistics particularly useful in economic and
social investigations. These include the fundamental concepts of sample survey methods and the use of
statistical packages for the processing of data.
Learning Outcomes
understand the elementary time series analysis techniques and perform statistical forecasting;
master techniques for index number construction and assess critically its uses and its limitation;
identify the major social and economic indicators and assess critically their potential applications;
master the techniques for carrying out statistical sample surveys including sampling design;
questionnaire design, data collection and handling of non-response and bias;
master the techniques for data presentation using statistical packages;
develop problem-solving abilities; and
develop skill and abilities in data interpretation and report writing.
Indicative Contents
Time Series
Modeling time series using seasonal decomposition method, extraction of the secular trends using
methods such as least squares, moving averages and semi-average, seasonal variations, residual
component analysis, forecasting; exponential smoothing.
Index Number
Simple and weighted average of price and quantity relatives; construction of simple aggregate (Paasche
and Laspeyres) indices; time series of relatives, time series deflation, real value index; fixed and chain
base relatives, changing base; composite indices; uses, limitations of index numbers; examples of
index numbers in social and economic.
305
Survey Method
Steps in overall planning of a survey; design and selection of samples, probability sampling designs,
sampling frames, sampling errors; design of questionnaires; methods of data collection, pilot survey,
non-response and bias; report of survey results.
Data Presentation using Statistical Packages
Counting survey responses for a single variable, summarizing data, scales of measurement,
interpretation of frequency tables, charts and descriptive statistics; counting survey responses for
combinations of variables, cross-classification tables, use of graphs and plots.
Lectures will be used to introduce the indicative contents. Illustrative economic and social cases will be
used to strengthen students' knowledges. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge through
assignments.
Assessment Approach
The continuous assessment comprises of a group project, homework assignments and tests. In the group
project, official data will be used and a report has to be written. The assignments and the test are used to
assist the students to reflect and review on their overall progress. The end-of-semester examination is used
to assess the overall knowledge acquired by the students.
Indicative Reading
Hansen, M.H., Hurwitz, W.N. and Madow, L.H., Sample Survey Methods and Theory, Vol. I, Methods and
Application, Wiley (latest ed.).
Leonard, J.K., Schaum's Outline of Business Statistics, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.).
References
Moser, C.A. and Kalton, G., Survey Methods in Social Investigation, Heinemann (latest ed.).
Norusis, M.J., The SPSS Guide to Data Analysis, Prentice-Hall (latest ed.).
Sekaran, U., Research Methods for Business: A Skill Building Approach, Wiley (latest ed.).
306
CC3430
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to develop students' ability in deriving and understanding concepts of financial
mathematics by applying a mathematical approach to the valuation of all derivatives, including futures and
options.
Learning Outcomes
understand concepts in future markets
perform price evaluation for the futures
understand concepts in options markets
perform price evaluation for the options
evaluate investment risk and apply mathematical tools to analyze decisions in investment
outcomes
Indicative Contents
Futures
Futures markets; The use of futures for hedging; Forward and future prices; Interest rate futures; Swaps.
Options
Options Markets, Calls and puts; Properties of stock option prices; Trading strategies involving options;
Model of the behaviour of stock prices; The Black-Scholes analysis; Options on stock indices;
Currencies and futures contracts.; General approach to pricing derivatives.
Risk Management
Stop-loss strategy; Delta hedging; Theta, Gamma, Vega and Rho of a portfolio of derivatives; Scenario
analysis; Creating options synthetically.
Lectures will be used to introduce the subject materials. Illustrative cases on future and options will be
used to strengthen students' concepts. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge through
assignments.
307
Assessment Approach
The continuous assessment comprises homework assignments and tests. The assignments are used to assist
the students to reflect and review on their progress. The end-of-semester examination is used to assess the
knowledge acquired by the students.
Indicative Reading
Briys, E., Mai, H.M., Bellalah, M. and de Varenne, F. Options, Futures and Exotic Derivatives. Wiley.
(latest ed.).
References
Carter, C. Futures and Options Markets: An Introduction. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Hull, J.C. Options, Futures and Other Derivatives. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
308
CC3434
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusion
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
Nil
CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject identifies necessary issues on microorganisms, infections and human defences. It also provides
concepts on disinfection and disease prevention. Studying this subject can help students apply the
knowledge for the maintenance of personal hygiene and be alert to different pathological conditions caused
by microorganisms.
Learning Outcomes
comprehend and describe the structure and functions of microorganisms that infect humans and the
various modes of transmission of the infections
describe and explain host-parasite relationships
familiarize themselves with etiology and pathogenesis of infections on different body systems caused
by microbes
conduct proper methods for controlling infections in everyday life, laboratory beauty salon and health
care settings
Indicative Contents
Structure of Microorganisms
Classification of microorganisms: bacteria, viruses,prion, fungi and protozoa; Structure of
microorganisms.
Host-parasite Relationship
Host-pathogen interactions; Defense mechanisms of the human body; Pathogenicity of microorganisms.
Transmission of Infections
Airborne infections; Water-borne infections; Food-borne infections; Contact-borne infections;
Zoonotic infections; Hospital-acquired infections.
Human Infectious Diseases
Respiratory tract infections; Gastrointestinal tract infections; Urinary tract infections; Skin infections.
Prevention of Infections
309
Principles and applications of sterilization and disinfection; Immunisation; Aseptic procedures
Theories and applications of knowledge will be emphasized in lectures and laboratories. Tutorials will be
conducted with problem based activities, classroom feedback, case studies, presentations, and discussions
to enhance understanding of the knowledge acquired for disease prevention and maintenance of personal
hygiene. Students will be encouraged to discuss with teachers and other students.
Assessment Approach
The knowledge in microbiology on basic structures of microorganisms, host and parasite relationship,
infectious methods and related diseases will be assessed through presentations, classroom feedback, case
studies, group discussion, tests and examinations. In the assessment, students should analyse clinical or
real-life cases given and derive preventive measures in model clinical or ordinary settings. The assessment
tasks will be given from time to time throughout the semester to monitor the process of learning.
Indicative Readings
Talaro, K.P. Foundations in Microbiology. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Burton, G.R.W. and Engelkirk, P.G. Microbiology for the Health Sciences. Philadelphia: JB Lippincott.
(latest ed.).
Nester, E. W., Anderson, D.G., Roberts, C.E., Pearsall, N.N. and Nester, M.T. Microbiology: A Human
Perspective. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Tortora, G.J., Funke, B.R. and Case, C.L. Microbiology: An introduction. California: Benjamin/Cummings
Publishing Co. (last ed.).
310
CC3456
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This course aims to acquaint students with the value and contribution of information systems to
commercial organizations, with particular reference to the application, development and controls of
information systems.
Learning Outcomes
identify the major features of an information system and the environment within which it operates
recognize the importance of the functions and roles of information systems in administrative and
commercial organizations
understand the application of information systems in commercial organizations
develop an understanding of the development and controls of information systems from the
administrative and commercial perspective
develop a simple information system based on the requirements of commercial organizations
outcomes
Indicative Contents
Conceptual Foundations
Information, Computers and Business Management; Information Systems Concepts; Components and
Structure; Information Processing and Decision Making; Impact of Computer Based Information
System (CBIS) on Organization and Management.
System Development and Implementation
Approaches to Systems Development; Systems Analysis and Design Methods; Programming and
Testing; Implementation.
MIS Applications
Functional Applications: Accounting, Financial, Production, Marketing, Personnel & Administrative
Systems; Decision Support Systems; Expert Systems.
311
Basic principles and concepts will be introduced through lectures. In tutorials, students will meet in small
groups to discuss specific topics related to the subject or to explore further matters raised in lectures.
Tutorials are designed to allow students to have hands-on practice on the design and development of a
simple information system.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, simple system
prototyping, tests and an examination. They are designed to assess students’ understanding and
appreciation of the use of information systems in today’s business environments.
Indicative Reading
Stair, R. M. Principles of Information Systems. Thomson/Course Technology. (latest ed.).
References
Laudon, K. C. and Laudon, J. P. Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital Firm. Prentice Hall.
(latest ed.).
McLeod, R. Jr. and Schell, G. P. Management Information Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
O’Brien, J. A. Introduction to Information Systems. McGraw-Hill/Irwin. (latest ed.).
Oz, E. Management Information Systems. Thomson/Course Technology. (latest ed.).
312
CC3458
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
The aim of this subject is to provide students with a basic understanding of the nature of operations
research and of the types of problems that it can solve. It enables students to choose the correct techniques
to suit a particular problem with applications in resource management, network models, decision analysis
and project management.
Learning Outcomes
implement several basic deterministic and stochastic operations research models
synthesize the mathematical knowledge and techniques required in operations research model
formulation
execute and appraise the main algorithms for solving such operations research problems
interpret the results of findings under the application of the algorithm
evaluate critically for improvement of findings
Indicative Contents
The Nature of Operations Research
The history and development of operations research; art of modeling; phases of operations research.
Linear Programming
Formulation of linear programming models; graphical solution of linear programs in two variables; the
simplex methods; the dual problem in linear programming; the transportation problem.
Game Theory
Two persons zero sum game with applications.
Project Scheduling by PERT-CPM
Arrow/network diagram representation; critical path calculations, construction of the time chart and
resource leveling; project control.
Dynamic Programming
Mathematical formulation; functional recursion equation; Bellman's Principle of Optimality; multistage
decision making problem; relationship between dynamic programming and linear programming.
313
The first learning outcome will be achieved via lectures. The second and third will be developed via
lectures, demonstration and exercises. The fourth will be acquired via lectures and exercises.
Assessment Approach
Quizzes, short tests and assignments will be used to assess the second and third learning outcomes. All
outcomes will be assessed in the examination.
Indicative Reading
Taha, H.A. Operations Research - An Introduction. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Hillier, F.S. and Lieberman, G.J. Introduction to Operations Research. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Winston, W.L. Operations Research: Applications and Algorithms. Duxbury Press. (latest ed.).
314
CC3467
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Social Development in China
3
3
Non-Science
by English
24 hours Lecture
18 hours Seminar
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
This subject provides students with an overview of the issues in the course of social development in China
after 1949. It helps students to critically evaluate various social scientific theories relevant to the
explanation of social development in China as well as certain commonly-held views concerning China’s
development experience. Taking a critical approach, it helps students to examine the dilemmas in social
development in China.
Learning Outcomes
identify the issues in the course of social development in China.
make use of different theoretical perspectives in examining social development in China.
analyse significant issues of development in China.
identify the dilemmas in social development that China is facing.
effectively communicate information, arguments and analysis in a variety of forms.
Indicative Contents
Growing social inequality
Economic reform; Globalization; Class structure; Poverty eradication.
Population, family and women
Gender equality; Divorce; One-child policy.
Employment and state enterprise reform
Privatization; Danwei; Unemployment; Social security.
Rural reform and peasants
Rural poverty; Rural industrialization; Rural discontent; Village democracy.
Environmental problems and sustainable development
Development model; Energy policy; Land utilization.
315
This course consists of lectures and seminars. Lectures focus on the explication of concepts and methods of
social research. They will be delivered, whenever necessary, with the aid of audio-visual materials and
actual research reports. In sseminars, students are divided into small groups to conduct presentations of
their research projects. To introduce the social development of China to students, this course will focus on
specific social problems or social issues. Students are expected to choose a specific issue or problem, and
then explore how the Chinese government and the people of China respond to it.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports and term
essays, all designed to develop and assess students’ critical thinking as well as analytical and
Indicative Reading
Mok, Ka-Ho, Social and Political Development in Post-Reform China, Macmillan Press (latest ed.).
References
MacPherson, Steward (ed), Social Development and Societies in Transition, Ashgate (1998).
王偉存
郭繼嚴編
：《生
主
與發展
》北京
民出版最新版
藍皮》南南民出版最新版
：人
：《中國社會發展
書
社（
）。
雲
人
：雲
316
社（
）。
CC3471
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Social Problems and Social Issues in Contemporary China
3
3
Non-Science
by English
24 hours Lecture
18 hours Seminar
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
This subject equips students with both a reflective understanding of social problems and social issues from
different sociological perspectives and frameworks and the ability to apply such knowledge to analyse
social problems and social issues in contemporary China. Studying the subject will help develop both the
analytical capacity and ethical awareness of students in order to comprehend the complex problems and
issues encountered in the development process of modern China.
Learning Outcomes
identify social problems and social issues from different sociological perspectives and frameworks.
analyse selected social problems and social issues in contemporary China from sociological
perspectives and frameworks.
demonstrate an awareness of the ethical dimension of different approaches in resolving social
problems.
organize and articulate arguments in a variety of ways that are clear and understandable.
Indicative Contents
Understanding Social Problems
Definitions of social problems; Perspectives on studying social problems; Social problems in Chinese
conceptualization.
Historical Context of Contemporary China
Modern China from 1911; PRC from 1949; Cultural Revolution; An open China from 1978.
Social and Economic Context of Contemporary China
Open-door policy from 1978; Special economic zones; Industrialization and urbanization; Rural reform.
Selected Problems/Issues in Contemporary China
Selected topics from the following: Poverty and inequality; Corruption; Migrant labour;
Unemployment; Drug; Marital crisis; Demographic crisis; Education; Health care; Ageing; Urban
renewal; Urbanization; Social security.
317
Lectures will emphasize clarification of concepts, delineation of theories and summarization of contextual
information. Occasional audio-visual presentations, group discussions and exercises might be arranged in
lectures.
Seminars will emphasize application of concepts/principles and contextual reflection with an interactive
approach. The activities in seminars normally include student presentations, class exercises and discussion
on articles and local issues.
Assessment Approach
Students will be assessed by their coursework including (1) problems sets or test on their understanding of
concepts and theories and application of them, (2) seminar presentation and discussion paper on their
ability to relate theories to the analysis of local issues, and (3) a term paper on overall integrative
understanding and reflection of the subject. Students will also be assessed on their participation in lectures
and tutorials.
Indicative Reading
陸建華
問題》北京石油工出版 2002 年
苗啟明楊志堅
問題索》昆明南民族出版
：《中國社會
、
：
：《中國社會發展
業
社，
探
：雲
。
2000
社，
年
。
References
Loseke, D.R. Thinking about Social Problems: An introduction to constructionist perspectives. New York:
Aldine de Gruyter (1999).
Rubington, E and Weinberg, M.S. The Study of Social Problems: Seven perspectives. Oxford: Oxford
University Press (1995).
袁亞愚著
等
家析
：《社會學
的分
問題》北京
：中國社會
318
出版
：中國社會
998 年
社，1
。
CC3475
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
14 hours of Lecture
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
This subject aims to familiarize students with the various ways for analyzing data and presenting analysis
results through extensive hands-on experience, using commercial database system such as EXCEL, as well
as statistical packages such as MINITAB and SPSS.
Learning Outcomes
understand the basic functions for data analysis available in popular software packages
synthesize the statistical knowledge and techniques required in data analysis software
apply statistical techniques to analyze large data sets
produce presentable results for statistical analysis
interpret analysis results and make recommendations for actions based on analysis results
define, formulate and solve problems in a systematic approach
outcomes
Indicative Contents
File Management
Worksheets and charts; page setup; preview and printing.
Descriptive Statistics
Measures of central tendency and dispersion; histogram; rank and percentile; table and tally;
covariance and correlation.
Probability Distribution
Probabilities and cumulative probabilities of commonly used distributions such as binomial, Poisson,
normal, t-, χ2- and F-distributions.
Sampling and Simulation
Sampling with and without replacement; random number generation; simulation of simple processes.
Inferences for Means
Confidence interval for mean; hypothesis testing concerning single mean; one-tail and two-tail tests; pvalues; confidence interval for difference of two means; hypothesis testing concerning difference of
two means.
319
χ 2 - test
Contingency table; tests of goodness of fit and independence.
Regression
Simple linear regression; scatter plots; multiple linear regression.
The second learning outcome will be achieved via mainly lectures and exercises. The first learning
outcome will developed via lectures, demonstration and practical exercise. The third and fourth will be
acquired via sample cases, past student work, and practical examples. The fifth and sixth will be acquired
via group and individual case assignments. Real life data will be used in examples and case assignments.
Assessment Approach
Quizzes and short tests will be used to assess the second learning outcome. All others will be assessed via
cases undertaken in groups and individually.
Indicative Reading
References
Catapult, Inc. Microsoft Access 2000, Step by Step. Microsoft Press. (latest ed.).
King, N. Teach Yourself-Visual FoxPro 3 for Windows. MIS press. (latest ed.).
Middleton, M.R. Data Analysis using Microsoft Excel. Duxbury Press. (latest ed.).
320
CC3476
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2425 Statistics for Business I OR CC3310 Statistics for
Probability
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
The subject aims to introduce to the students the basic elements of statistical methods in estimation and
hypothesis testing. Applications in business will be emphasized by using ample practical examples to
illustrate the principles and methods.
Learning Outcomes
understand statistical techniques of estimation and hypothesis testing concerning population means,
proportions and variances under different circumstances.
formulate the appropriate models for practical problems with special reference to project goals, data
quality and appropriateness of model assumptions.
derive and assess critically the results from the analysis.
provide services to the industry with an awareness of local and international practices.
Indicative Contents
Sampling Distributions
Population and random samples. The Central Limit Theorem, sampling distributions related to sample
means, sample proportions, and sample variances.
Useful Distributions in Statistical Inference
Definitions of normal, t, F and chi-square distributions; familiarisation with the relationships between
these distributions and the use of corresponding tables.
Estimation of Parameters
Concept of a point estimator and unbiasedness. Concept of a confidence interval. Point and interval
estimates of a mean and the difference between two means, a proportion and the difference between
two proportions, a variance and the ratio of two variances. Sample size required for a specified
precision in an estimate. Illustrative examples of their applications in business.
Test of Hypotheses
Statistical hypotheses and their tests. Type I and type II errors. One-sided and two-sided tests. Tests
of significance; levels of significance; test statistics; critical regions. Tests for an assumed mean, the
difference between two means, an assumed proportion, the difference between two proportions, an
321
assumed variance, and the ratio of two variances. Illustrations of their applications in business. The
use of chi-square tests for goodness of fit and for independence; contingency tables. Illustrative
examples of their applications in business. Nonparametric tests: the sign test, the signed rank test, the
rank sum test, the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, and the run test.
Lectures will be used to introduce the contents of subject. Illustrative business cases will be used to
strengthen students' concepts of this subject. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge through
assignments.
Assessment Approach
The continuous assessment comprises of homework assignments and tests. The assignments and the tests
are used to assist the students to reflect and review on their progress on their overall learning outcomes.
The end-of-semester examination is used to assess the overall learning outcomes achieved by the students.
Indicative Readings
Carlson, W.L. and Thorne, B., Applied Statistical Methods: for Business, Economics, and the Social
Sciences, Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
References
McClave, J.T., Benson, P.G. and Sincich, T.L., Statistics for Business and Economics, Prentice Hall (latest
ed.).
Montgomery, D.C. and Runger, G.C., Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers, John Wiley (latest
ed.).
322
CC3477
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to introduce to the students the basic concepts of the survey sampling theory including a
brief introduction to the methods of sample selection, estimation, sampling variance, standard error of
estimation in finite population, development of sampling theory for use in sample survey problems, and
sources of errors in surveys and mathematical treatments of types of errors. Applications will be
emphasized by using ample practical examples to illustrate the principles and methods.
Learning Outcomes
understand concepts and techniques in sampling methods
formulate sampling plans with special reference to survey goals, sampling frames availability, and
resource constraints
assess critically the appropriateness of competing sampling plans
understand solution methodology to estimate population parameters for sampling plans
conduct sample surveys within the context of socially acceptable professional and ethical practices
be prepared for life-long learning
Indicative Contents
Need for Sample Survey and Basic Concept
Types of sampling errors, sampling and complete enumeration, principal steps in a sample survey,
terms and definitions in sample surveys.
Sample Design, Methods and Theory
Simple random sampling, stratified random sampling, systematic random sampling, varying
probability sampling, ratio and regression estimation, cluster random sampling, multi-stage sampling,
multi-phase sampling.
Types of Errors and Biases
Non-sampling errors, response and non-response errors, measurement and control of errors.
323
Lectures will be used to introduce the contents of the subject. Illustrative cases will be used to strengthen
students' concepts. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge through assignments.
Assessment Approach
The continuous assessment comprises homework assignments and tests. The assignments are used to assist
the students to reflect on and review their progress on their overall learning outcomes. The end-of-semester
examination is used to assess the overall learning outcomes achieved acquired by the students.
Indicative Reading
Thompson, S.K. Sampling. Wiley. (latest ed.).
References
Hansen, M.H., Hurwitz, W.N. and Madow, L.H. Sample Survey Methods and Theory, Vol. I & II. Wiley.
(latest ed.).
Kish, L. Survey Sampling. Wiley. (latest ed.).
Levy, P.S. and Lemeshow, S. Sampling of Populations: Methods and Applications. Wiley. (latest ed.).
324
CC3487
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology
3
3
Non-Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial / Seminar
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject focuses on the biological basis of common pathophysiological conditions and the differences
between normal body function and pathological alternations to normal functions. It also emphasizes the
general principles of pharmacology that contribute to the students’ acquisition of a general basis for further
study in areas related to healthcare and “applied biological science”.
Learning Outcomes
outline the patterns of inheritance of familial disease
list the various factors which can cause pathological changes
describe causes and consequences of selected disease states, including the common chronic diseases
such as cancer, coronary heart disease and diabetes mellitus
explore the relationship between selected environmental agents/pollution and named disease states
describe the ageing process
identify the relationship between ageing and chronic, degenerative diseases
describe the effect of nutritional and lifestyle choices on ageing and the risks of age-related, chronic
and degenerative diseases
describe the concepts of pharmacokinetics, therapeutic drug monitoring and iatrogenic disease
Indicative Contents
Causes of Disease: Inherited, Acquired and Multifactorial Disorders
Patterns of inheritance; gene linkage and penetration; multiple allele systems and incomplete
expression; normal and abnormal karyotype; translocation, balanced and unbalanced; causes and
consequences of abnormal karyotype with selected examples; factors causing acquired disease, e.g.
nutrition-related, trauma, toxins etc.
Disorders of Cell Growth & Tissue Differentiation; Carcinogenesis
Definition/explanation of causes and consequences of cellular changes, e.g., hyperplasia, metaplasia,
atrophy, dysplasia, with selected examples; comparison of benign and malignant neoplasms; criteria
and classification of malignancy; behaviour, clinical effects and methods of spread of tumours; factors
involved in carcinogenesis.
Immune Response and Disorders of the Immune System
325
Primary and secondary immune responses; the role of the spleen, the thymus, lymph nodes and
lymphoctyes; the production and action of antibodies; immunodeficiency states, including AIDS;
autoimmune disease and allergies.
Inflammatory Response
Protective action of inflammation; vascular changes and cellular responses in acute inflammation;
possible outcomes of acute inflammation; characteristics of chronic inflammation; causes and
consequences of chronic inflammation; hypersensitivity reactions; pathological changes of the
respiratory system caused by coronavirus and related immunological response of the body (severe
acute respiratory syndrome).
Disorders of Metabolism
Cellular changes in disorders of metabolism; causes and consequences of selected disorders of
metabolism, e.g. inborn errors of metabolism, diabetes mellitus and the metabolic syndrome, renal
failure, coronary heart disease.
Environmental Factors in the Aetiology of Disease
Effects of improper sewage, ionising radiation, microbes, cigarette smoking, heavy metals, stress,
pollution etc., and their relationships to named disorders and disease states, e.g., cancer, TB,
autoimmune disease, SARS.
Theories of Ageing and Impact of Age on Risks of Disease
Life span, life expectancy; theories of ageing, e.g., mitochondrial, membrane, genetic, free radical,
disposable soma, wear and tear, rate of living, biological clock; age-related changes in cells, tissues
and organs; changes in physiological/homeostatic system; signs and symptoms of age; age-related
mortality, all causes and specific causes; description of age-related diseases e.g., cancer, cataract,
coronary heart disease, dementia, diabetes mellitus, osteoporosis.
Role of Nutrition and Lifestyle in Lowering Risks of Chronic Age-related and Degenerative
Diseases
Diet and antioxidant defence; antioxidant micronutrients; overnutrition, with particular reference to
calorie intake, saturated fat and trace metals; undernutrition, general and specific marco- and micronutrient deficiencies, e.g. of protein, folate, iron, iodine, antioxidant vitamins; effects of smoking,
exercise.
Concepts of Pharmacokinetics, Therapeutic Drug monitoring and Iatrogenic Disease
Absorption and distribution of drugs; dosage calculation and monitoring; half-life and elimination;
side-effects and adverse reactions; drug-related iatrogenic diseases; selective toxicity of antibiotics.
Teaching / Learning Approach
Lectures, seminars and tutorials emphasize the concepts and principles of pathological changes and drug
therapy. Tutorials and case studies are designed to supplement the theoretical content and to further
develop students’ abilities in integrating theory into application.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, which may include case studies, presentations, exercises, tests
or an examination designed to develop and assess students’ knowledge and application of pathophysiology
and pharmacology, as well as, to evaluate students’ level of understanding regarding the various causative
factors and the pharmaceutical approaches to diseases.
326
Indicative Readings
McCance, K.L. & Huether, S.E. Pathophysiology: The biologic basis for disease in adults and children. St.
Louis: Mosby. (latest ed.).
References
Carlson, J.H., Haymaker, S.R. & Hensinger, M.A. Pathophysiolgy. Philadelphia: Lippincott. (latest ed.).
Conor, M. & Ferguson-Smith, M. (1997). Essential Medical Genetics. London: Blackwell Science. (latest
ed.).
Guyton, A.C.& Hall J.E. Textbook of Medical Physiology. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. (latest ed.).
Harman, D., Holliday, R. & Meydani, M. (Eds). Towards Prolongation of the Health Life Span. New York:
New York Academy of Sciences. (latest ed.).
Karch, A.M. Lippincott’s Nursing Drug Guide. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins. (latest ed.).
Kee, J.L. & Hayes, E.R. Pharmacology. A Nursing Process Approach. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. (latest
ed.).
Malseed, R.T. Springhouse Nurse’s Drug Guide 2004. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins.
(latest ed.).
Mera, S.L. Understanding Disease; Pathology and Prevention. Cheltenham: Stanley Thornes Publishers
Ltd. (latest ed.).
Mitchell, M.K. Nutrition across the Lifespan. Philadelphia: Saunders. (latest ed.).
Mulvihill, M.L. Human Diseases. A systemic approach. Stamford: Appleton & Lange. (latest ed.).
Nicholls, J.M. et al. Pathology of fatal sever acute respiratory syndrome, The Lancet..
Philp, R.P. Environmental Hazards and Human Health. New York: Lewis Publishers. (latest ed.).
Porth, C. M. Pathophysiology. Concepts of Altered Health States. Philadelphia: Lippincott. (latest ed.).
Robbins, S. & Kumar, V. Basic Pathophysiology. Philadelphia: Saunders. (latest ed.).
Robbins, S.L., Cotran, R.S. & Kumar, V. Pocket Companion to Robbins Pathologic Basis of Disease.
Montreal: W.B. Saunders. (latest ed.).
Sadler, M., Strain, B. & Cabellero, B. (Eds). The Encyclopedia of Nutrition. London: Academic Press.
(latest ed.).
Skidmore-Roth, L. Mosby’s nursing drug reference. St. Louis: Mosby. (latest ed.).
Tortora, G.J. & Grabowski, S.R. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. New York: Harper Collins
College. (latest ed.).
Journals
Journal of Applied Physiology
327
Journal of Anatomy
Journal of Immunology
Journal of Pathology
Journal of Physiology
Lancet
Useful Websites
http://www.biomednet.com
http://www.efa.org
http://www.joannabriggs.edu.au
Pathophysiolgy & Digestive system: it consists of information and self-evaluation guideline
http://arbl.cvmbs.colostate.edu/hbooks/pathphys/digestion/
Radiological Appearances of Recent Cases of Atypical Pneumonia in Hong Kong:
http://www.droid.cuhk.edu.hk/web/atypical_pneumonia/atypical_pneumonia.htm
Sciencexpress: www.sciencexpress.org
The Lancet: www.thelancet.com
World Health Organization: http://www.who.int./en/
Useful Websites for Pharmacology
Drug finder: http://healthanswers.telstra.com/drugdata/default.asp
DrugNetHK - A local Chinese drug net that provides drug-related information to the public:
http://www.drugnet.com.hk/dnhk_top.htmPharmacology and legal drugs in about about.com:
http://search.about.com/fullsearch.htm?terms=pharmacology&IAM=URL_pharmacology
Medline plus drug information: http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/druginformation.html
Medscape nursing - Powerful search engines enable you to search journals, drugs, definitions:
http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/druginformation.html
Rxlist -. A website for searching drugs: http://www.rxlist.com/
South African Electronic package inserts - A powerful drug search engine. You can find drugs by trade
name, generic name or classification: http://home.intekom.com/pharm/ Yahoo health - http://health.yahoo.com/
328
AV Materials
Asia Television LTD. (2003, March 30.). Newsline; Discussing the Atypical Pneumonia Outbreak with
Yeok Eng-Kiong. Hong Kong. (Video recording)
Call number: 18900 VCD
329
CC3492
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Chinese Government and Politics
3
3
Non-Science
by English
28 hours Lecture
14 hours Tutorial
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with the knowledge about the nature and characteristics of political institutions
of China after 1949, including the State Council, the National People’s Congress, and the Chinese People’s
Political Consultative Congress. It also helps students acquire a basic understanding of politics involved in
the reform process, such as the politics of enterprise reform and of rural reform.
Learning Outcomes
recognise and identify the dynamics and tensions of China’s domestic politics.
develop competence in analyzing the Chinese government and politics by relating social science
theories to the study of contemporary China.
identify the issues involved in understanding the current situation about Chinese politics and
government.
effectively communicate information, arguments and analysis in a variety of forms.
Indicative Contents
Political Institutions of the Party State
State Council; National People’s Congress; Chinese People’s Political Consultative Congress;
Hierarchy of political administration.
Chinese Communist Ideology
Marxism; Maoism; The thought of Deng Xiaoping; Nationalism.
Dynamics and tensions of China’s domestic politics
Elites and the cadre system; Provincial and local politics.
Case studies
Reform and corruption; Peasants’ burden and fee-for-tax reform; Village self-government and the
prospect of democracy.
330
Lectures focus on the introduction of major studies in Chinese politics, and the explanation of key
concepts, with specific reference to specific case studies and current issues wherever appropriate.
lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of specific issues. The activities in tutorials normally
include student presentations of specific cases and discussions of related problems.
Assessment Approach
examination, all designed to develop and assess students’ critical thinking as well as analytical and
Indicative Readings
Wang, James C.F., Contemporary Chinese Politics: An Introduction, Prentice Hall (latest ed.).
References
Jia, Hao, and Lin, Zhimin, Changing Central-Local Relations in China: Reform and State Capacity,
Westview Press (latest ed.).
Lampton, David, Policy implementation in post-Mao China, University of California Press (latest ed.).
Perry, Elizabeth, and Selden, Mark, Chinese Society: Change, Conflict and Resistance, Routledge (latest
ed.).
331
CC3728
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
CC2439 General Chemistry
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject widens students’ horizon in chemical analysis with more specific, powerful and novel methods
of analysis. Students will be equipped with a broad theoretical knowledge of analytical science and
technology. Emphasis will be put on problem solving skills for approaching analytical instrumentation.
Learning Outcomes
select suitable statistical methods for chemical analysis
carry out accurate measurement with the analytical instrument
describe the underlying principles of and distinguish various analytical instruments
integrate analytical principles to laboratory applications of instrument
identify the advantages of instrumental analysis
Indicative Contents
Statistical analysis
Statistical treatment of data; Normal distribution; Standard deviation and standard error of mean;
Experimental errors; Accuracy and precision.
Basic chemical analysis
Volumetric analysis; Methods of sampling and sample preparation; Ionic equilibrium.
Instrumentation
UV-visible and IR spectroscopy; Beers’ law; Electrophoretic techniques; Atomic emission and
absorption spectrophotometry; Magnetic Resonance Spectrometry; Inductively-coupled plasma (ICP)
atomic emission spectroscopy; Principles and applications of chromatographic techniques such as gas
chromatography; High-performance liquid chromatography.
The course is composed of three parts: lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions. Lectures provide theorybased teaching. Examples and references will be given to students wherever appropriate. Tutorials provide
students with opportunities to broaden, enlighten and reinforce the general knowledge obtained in the
332
lectures. Students will be involved in problem based activities, classroom feedback, case studies,
presentations, and discussions in the tutorial. Laboratory sessions allow students to understand, verify, and
apply knowledge developed from lectures.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including presentations, classroom feedback, laboratory reports, group
discussion, tests and an examination will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical and
Indicative Readings
Skoog, D.A., Holler, J.F. and Nieman, T.A. Principles of instrumental analysis. Philadelphia: Saunders
College Pub.; Orlando, Fla.: Harcourt Brace College Publishers. (5th ed).
References
Christian, G. D. Analytical chemistry. New York: Wiley & Sons. (5th ed.).
Dead. J.R. Atomic absorption and plasma spectroscopy. Chichester: New York. (2nd ed).
Dean, J.R. Practical inductively coupled plasma spectroscopy. Chichester, England, Hoboken, N.J. Wiley.
Fowlis, I.A. Gas chromatography: analytical chemistry. New York: Wiley & Sons. (2nd ed).
Lambert, J.B. Nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy: an introduction to principles, applications, and
experimental methods. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Pearson Education.
Lindsay, S. High performance liquid chromatography. New York: Wiley. (2nd ed).
Thomas M.J.K. Ultraviolet and visible spectroscopy. New York: John Wiley. (2nd ed).
333
CC3729
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2005 Applied Computing &
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to equip students with the fundamental concepts and algorithms for the design and
development of computer game programs. Students will be provided with hands-on practice in using tools
for designing and developing computer game programs. Through applying computer programming
languages, multimedia application programming interfaces (APIs) and development framework in the
computer game design and programming, students’ critical and creative thinking can be attained.
Learning Outcomes
describe the essential concepts and algorithms for the design and development of computer games
apply critical and creative thinking to analyze and design computer games
make use of the various features and capabilities of programming languages, multimedia APIs and
development framework to design and develop computer games
recognize the effectiveness and opportunities of the computer game industry
collaborate, organize and communicate effectively as part of team efforts in the design and
development of computer games
Indicative Contents
Computer Game Overview
Background and history of computer game industry; Issues on computer game industry; Computer game
genres; Game production process; Technological, social, cultural, legal and ethical aspects; Future
trend of computer games.
Game Design
Integration of multimedia elements; Arts and animation; Sound and music; Lighting and shading; Userinterface design; Storyline and design documentation.
Game Platforms
Game platforms – PC-based, console-based, web-based, handheld, mobile and wireless game platforms.
Programming Languages, Multimedia and Game Development Tools
Java; J2ME; C#, C/C++; Flash; DirectX and OpenGL; Game engine and other authoring tools for computer
game development.
334
Game Programming Techniques
Algorithms in game – rotation, interpolation; level of details; acceleration, motion analysis, game
physics, collision detection; Multi-threading and multi-player games.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and algorithms for computer game
development, with specific reference to related hardware and software technologies.
Under the supervision and guidance of the lecturer, students will have hands-on practice in using various
tools in tutorials for computer game programming assignments and projects, thus building up their
technical competence in applying game development applications.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including computer game design and programming assignments, group
projects, tests and an examination are designed to assess students’ understanding of the fundamental
computer game design and development concepts, applicability of computer game development tools
individually and in a team work, critical and creative thinking, analytical skills as well as communication
skills.
Indicative Readings
Rabin, S. Introduction to Game Development. Charles River Media. (latest ed.).
References
Astle, D. Beginning OpenGL game programming. Thomson. (latest ed.).
Dalman, D. Core Techniques and Algorithms in Game Programming. New Riders Publishing. (latest ed.).
Deitel and Deitel. Java How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Deitel, Deitel and Goldberg. Internet & World Wide Web How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Lewinski, J. S. Developer’s Guide to Computer Game Design. WordWare Publishing. (latest ed.).
Martz, P. OpenGL distilled. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Miller, T. Managed DirectX 9 Kick Start: Graphics and Game Programming, Sams. (latest ed.).
Seddon, C. OpenGL game development. WordWare Publishing. (latest ed.).
Walnum, C. Game programming with DirectX in 21 days. Sams. (latest ed.).
Wells, M. J. J2ME Game Programming. Thomson. (latest ed.).
335
CC3730
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject provides students with the fundamental concepts and solution strategies of planar motion of
particles, rigid bodies, and mechanical vibration problems. It provides the essential knowledge of dynamic
responses of first-order and second-order systems, and time-domain specifications. It also introduces
feedback control and its application to improve the overall system behaviour.
Learning Outcomes
describe the planar motion of particles and rigid bodies
apply classic kinetic theories and use of free body diagrams to derive the equations of motion for
particles and rigid bodies in planar motion
describe the free and forced vibration responses of a single-degree-of-freedom system
analyse the dynamic responses of first-order and second-order systems due to different inputs
design simple controllers to improve the dynamic performance of a system according to time-domain
specifications
Indicative Contents
Dynamics
Kinematics and kinetics of particles: Rectilinear motion; Plane curvilinear motion; Relative motion;
Equation of motion; Work and energy; Impulse and momentum. Plane kinematics of rigid bodies:
Rotation; Absolute motion; Relative velocity; Instantaneous centre of zero velocity; Relative
acceleration; Motion relative to rotating axes. Plane kinetics of rigid bodies: Force, mass and
acceleration; General equation of motion; Work and energy; Impulse; Momentum; Impulse-momentum
equations; Impact and applications; Balancing of rotating masses.
Vibration of a Single-degree-of-freedom System
Free vibration of particles; Equation of motion; Damping effects; Forced vibration of particles;
Vibration of rigid bodes; Energy methods; Free and forced vibration responses of a single-degree-offreedom system.
Dynamic Response of First-Order and Second-Order Systems
Mathematical modeling of system; Parameters of first-order and second-order systems; System
336
response analysis with step, ramp and impulse inputs using Laplace transform.
Introduction to Feedback Control
Analysis of open-loop and closed-loop systems; Transfer functions and block diagrams; Time-domain
specification; System stability analysis; Time-domain analysis of control systems.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of the essential knowledge in planar motion of particles
and rigid bodies, mechanical vibration systems and feedback control systems.
lectures. Laboratory sessions introduce to students the commonly used software in assisting the modeling,
analysis and design of dynamic and control systems.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and examination designed to
Indicative Readings
Meriam, J. L. and Kraige, L. G. Engineering Mechanics. John Wiley. (latest ed.).
Nise, N. S. Control System Engineering. John Wiley. (latest ed.).
References
Beer, F. P. and Johnson, E. R. Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics and Dynamics. McGraw-Hill.
(latest ed.).
Thomson, W. T. Theory of Vibration with Applications. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Steidel, R. F. Jr. An Introduction to Mechanical Vibration. John Wiley. (latest ed.).
Ogata, K. Modern Control Engineering. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Phillips, C. L. and Harbor, R. D. Feedback Control Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
337
CC3731
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This subject provides students with the basic concepts and techniques for the modeling and performance
analysis of electrical equipment in buildings. It enables them to develop system models, and the realization
of system parameters from appropriate tests and specification data. It also provides students with the
fundamental knowledge of the main performance characteristics, limitations and applications of electrical
equipment in buildings.
Learning Outcomes
describe the operations of different electro-mechanical equipment in buildings
develop equivalent circuits to model transformers, induction and synchronous machines
identify appropriate tests to obtain the parameters of equivalent circuits for different electric machines
analyse the performance of electric machines using appropriate equivalent circuit models
enhance problem-solving abilities by applying electrical engineering principles
Indicative Contents
Fundamental Concepts
Overview of electricity supply, distribution and utilisation in buildings; Magnetic circuits; Hysteresis; Eddy
currents; Energy conversion.
Transformers
Construction; Self and mutual inductance; Equivalent circuits and per unit system; Losses; Shot-circuit and
open-circuit tests; Efficiency and voltage regulation; Auto-transformers and instrument transformers;
Three-phase Transformers: Connections; Performance analysis.
Induction Machines
Classification and construction; Equivalent circuit parameters and testing; Performance characteristics;
Analysis of starting and speed control methods.
Synchronous Machines
Construction; Applications; Equivalent circuit parameters and testing; Performance characteristics;
Voltage and frequency control.
338
D.C. Motors
Construction; Performance characteristics; Speed Control.
Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of the major theorems and mathematical techniques
used in the modeling and performance analysis of electrical equipment in buildings.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to reinforce their understanding of the concepts taught in
lectures through the electro-mechanical problems.
Laboratory sessions will be used to illustrate and assimilate some principles of electrical engineering and
provide students with the opportunity to use software tools in assisting modeling and performance analysis
of electrical equipment.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and examination designed to
Indicative Readings
Cathey, J. J. Electric Machines: Analysis and Design Applying MATLAB. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
References
Sen, P. C. Principles of Electric Machines and Power Electronics. John Wiley & Sons. (latest ed.).
Theodore, W. Electrical Machines, Drives, and Power Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Rigby, B. Design of Electrical Services for Buildings. Spon Press. (latest ed.).
Lyshevski, S. E. Electromechanical Systems, Electric Machines, and Applied Mechatronics. CRC Press.
(latest ed.).
Boylestad, R. L. and Nashelsky, L. Introduction to Electricity, Electronics, and Electromagnetics. Prentice
Hall. (latest ed.).
339
CC3732
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
14 hours of Lecture
4 hours of Tutorial
Nil
100% Coursework
Aims
This subject provides students with an opportunity to learn and practice the essential knowledge and basic
skills in using some common engineering-specific software, including the computer-aided
design/drafting(CAD) and computer simulation software. It also equips students with the concepts and
techniques in engineering graphics and drafting so as to enable their abilities in engineering
communication.
Learning Outcomes
apply the engineering graphics and simulation tools effectively to everyday engineering
communications
identify and evaluate the solutions for solving engineering problems using simulation software
present simple engineering components and schematics graphically using hand sketching and CAD
tools
outcomes for engineering problems
Indicative Contents
Engineering Drafting
Engineering graphics as a communication medium; geometrical sketching; problems and visualization;
Orthographic Projection Systems; Sectioning; Auxiliary Projections; Axonometric projections and
standard practices; Dimension and tolerance; Limit and fits; Surface texture; Welding symbol.
Computer Drafting
Introduction to CAD/CAM system and basic computer drawing techniques; Construction of 2D objects;
Concepts of blocks and external referencing; Introduction to 3D solid modeling and construction of 3D
solid objects; Construction of complex 3D solid objects; Engineering documentation of 2D objects and
3D solid objects; Annotation, dimensioning and plotting; Screw fasteners; Creation of a solid model;
Design table; Assembly basics.
Electronic Design Automation (EDA)
Electronic circuit schematics and logic diagrams; EDA software; Placement of components; Capturing;
Annotation; Labelling; Net list generation; Electronic parts library; Symbols; Physical packages;
Discrete components; Integrated circuits; Logic and analogue circuits; Gate and pin definition;
340
Swappability; Device symbols and layout; System block diagrams and representation; Architectural
wiring diagram; Wiring table and diagrams for electronic and electrical installations.
Basic Scientific Computing
Scientific computing development environment; Mathematical Operations; Matrices; Linear algebra;
Polynomials and interpolation; Data analysis and statistics; Function functions; differential equations;
Programming; Application examples; flow control statements; Graphical user interface; Data structures;
Input/output; Object-oriented capabilities; Graphics; Data plotting; Formatting; Basic printing and
exporting interfaces; Pie chart; Bar chart; Area chart; Linear and log plots; 3D-View plot; Experiment
with fitting curves to data.
Lectures focus on introducing the essential knowledge and concepts on using the computer software and
the basic techniques on engineering drafting. In addition, the modeling techniques of the engineering
problems are introduced. Tutorials and laboratory sessions provide students with the opportunity to
practice and apply their knowledge gained from lectures with the hand-on experiences on using the
software and the engineering drafting.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, assignments, group projects, presentations, and tests to develop
and assess the students’ understanding on the principles and problem solving techniques in using the
computer software and the engineering drafting.
Indicative Readings
References
Grabowski, R. Using AutoCAD 2006, Advanced. Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.).
Grabowski, R. Using AutoCAD 2006, Basics. Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.).
Cheng, R. Maximizing Autodesk Mechanical Desktop 2005. Delmar Learning, N.Y. (latest ed.).
Lee, K. Principles of CAD/CAM/CAE systems Reading. Mass. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Tickoo S. AutoCAD 2006: A Problem Solving Approach. Thomson Course Technology (latest ed.).
SolidWorks Essentials: parts and assemblies Vol.1 & 2. Concord, Mass, SolidWorks Corp. (latest ed.).
Howard, W. E. Introduction to solid modeling using Solidworks. New York: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
Murray, D. Inside SolidWorks. Clifton Park, NY: Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.).
Bertline, G. R. et al. Engineering Graphic Communication. Irwin. (latest ed.).
Giesecke F. E. et al. Engineering Graphics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Giesecke, F. E., et al. Modern Graphics Communication. Prentice-Hall, N.J. (latest ed.).
Edward, A. L. Complete Guide to Understanding Electronics Diagrams. Prentice-Hall, N.J. (latest ed.).
341
Raskhodoff, N. M. Electronic Drafting and Design. Prentice-Hall, N.J. (latest ed.).
Code of Practice for the Electricity (wiring) Regulations, EMSD, The Government of the HKSAR.
Goody, R. W. MicroSim PSpice for Windows. Upper Saddle River, N. J., Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Edward W. K. and Bonnie H. Fundamentals of Signals and Systems Using the Web and Matlab. PrenticeHall. (latest ed.).
Roberts M.J. Signals and Systems: Analysis Using Transform Methods and MATLAB. McGraw-Hill. (latest
ed.).
Biran A. and Breiner M. Matlab for Engineers. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
342
CC3733
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Further Calculus
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
CC2406 Calculus
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
To provide an introduction to several-variable calculus and its applications to solving problems in business,
statistics, sciences and engineering.
Learning Outcomes
develop understanding of partial derivative of a function of several variables and its geometric meaning
apply various rules of differentiation to compute partial derivatives
develop the concept of multiple integrals of a function of several variables over a plane or space
domain
use various methods to evaluate multiple integrals
apply multivariable calculus to problems in geometry, engineering, statistics and physics
think analytically and logically
Indicative Contents
Functions of several variables
Concept of functions of several variables, limits and continuity in high dimensions.
Partial Differentiation
Partial derivatives, gradients and directional derivatives, total differential, chain rule, Taylor’s
Formula, relative extrema, Lagrange multipliers and constrained optimization.
Double Integrals
Double integrals over rectangle, iterative integrals, change of variables, Jacobians, double integrals in
polar form.
Triple Integrals
Triple integrals, triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates.
Applications of Multiple Integrals
Areas and volumes by double integration, surface areas, geometric, statistical and physical applications
such as center of mass, centroids, averages, etc.
343
The lectures aim to enforce students’ understanding and skills in calculus. The emphasis will be on the
differential and integral calculus for functions of several variables. Applications in geometry, statistics,
sciences and engineering will also be addressed.
Assessment Approach
The continuous assessment is comprised of homework assignments, in-class quizzes and tests. The
assignments are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their progress. The end-of-semester
examination is used to assess the knowledge acquired by the students and their ability to apply and extend
such knowledge.
Indicative Reading
Finney, R. L. Thomas' Calculus. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.).
Reference
Stein, S. K. Calculus and Analytic Geometry. McGraw Hill. (latest edition).
Salas, H. and Anderson. Calculus. Wiley. (latest ed.).
Stewart, J. Multivariable Calculus. Brook/Cole. (latest ed.).
344
CC3734
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces to students the importance of macromolecules and the basic biochemical reactions
in living organisms. This subject serves as a framework of fundamental information for the students who
wish to pursue further study in the biological field at college level. The design of the subject is to introduce
to students the construction of these relatively simple organic blocks into the complicate biological
macromolecules of life, the metabolic pathways and the interactions of the macromolecules as in energy
transduction and enzymic actions of the life-form.
Learning Outcomes
describe the structure and the properties of carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids and nucleic acid bases;
and to appreciate how these building blocks are made into the important biological macromolecules
relate the structure with the function of some important biomolecules
understand the mechanism of the transduction of energy by the transformation of macromolecules
appreciate the flow, control points and interplay of the metabolism of major fuel molecules
explain the essential principles of enzymology
appreciate the applications of biochemical techniques in some biotechnological fields related to our
daily lives
Indicative Contents
Properties of carbohydrate
Structure and function of carbohydrate molecule in life
Biochemical Pathway of Carbohydrate
Glycolysis, pentose phosphate shunt, gluconeogenesis and TCA cycle; electron transport &
oxidative phosphorylation, light reactions to photosynthesis
Properties of Lipid
Structure and function of lipid molecule in life
Biochemical Pathway of Lipid
Metabolism of lipid, beta-oxidation
345
Properties of Protein
Amino acids covalently linked as constituents of protein, giving the three dimensional structure and
hence function of protein molecules in life; protein folding & dynamics
Biochemical Pathway of Protein
Overview of nitrogen metabolism of lipid, nitrogen fixation, urea cycle
Enzymology
Enzyme kinetics and mechanisms
Introduction to Biotechnology
Application of biochemical technology, for example, in food production, fermentation, pharmaceutics
and environmental protection.
There are three parts in this subject: lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions. Lectures are designed to
provide with the basic theories. Examples and references will be given to students whenever appropriate.
Tutorials are conducted to reinforce the general knowledge obtained in the lectures, and to broaden the
scope of lectures, for example, into the application in the field of biotechnology. Students will be involved
in problem-based activities, classroom feedback and discussions in the tutorials. Laboratory sessions are
used to illustrate the theoretical knowledge and demonstrate to students the standard biochemical assay and
techniques in an interactive and practical manner.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including essays, laboratory reports, group discussion as well as
participation, tests and an examination will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical
and communication skills.
Indicative Readings
Berg, J.M., Tymoczko, J.L. and Stryer, L. Biochemistry. New York: Freeman. (latest ed.).
References
Champe, P.C. Biochemistry. London: Baltimore: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. (latest ed.).
Metzler, D.E. Biochemistry: the chemical reactions of living cells. London: Academic Press. (latest ed.).
Nelson, D.L. and Cox, M.M. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry. NY: Freeman. (latest ed.)
346
CC3735
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
26 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
8 hours of Laboratory and Field work
Nil
60% Coursework
40% Examination
Aims
This subject introduces the fundamental and useful concepts in the study of the environment. The
theoretical basis of environmental science will be introduced from an interdisciplinary perspective.
Students will be introduced to the key environmental problems, the ways how natural balances are
maintained within limits, and how human beings apply the knowledge to preserve and manage the
environment. The goal is to create a general understanding of the environmental issues and to show the
techniques to measure and describe the environmental parameters using a set of scientific standards.
Learning Outcomes
recognize the inter-relation among organisms, and between organisms and the environment
understand environmental pollution and its causes and impacts to the nature and mankind
understand how nature restores from pollution with limitations and once deviated outside the limits, the
preventive and remedial measures that humans can help
apply their knowledge of general environmental science to protect the environment and improve the
quality of life as a member of a society as well as a citizen in the “global village”
Indicative Contents
Environment Concerns and Balance
Environment of Earth and areas of concerns; restoration of the natural environment from deviated and
limitations of nature
Inter-relation of Organisms in Ecosystem
Ecosystems and ecological communities, biological diversity and their inter-relation, niche and food
chain, biological productivity and conservation; impact of human population on environment
Biogeochemical Cycles
Cycles and flow of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus and sulphur
Environmental Geology & Geospheric Pollution Control
Land pollution, effect on food chain, ways of control and clean up
Energy
347
Human energy consumption, resources, limitation and the pollution associated with energy
consumption, particularly over-exploitation of the fossil fuel in industry and transport; renewable and
sustainable energy sources
Air Environment
The atmosphere, atmospheric chemistry, climate, global warming, air pollution, photochemical smog,
suspended particles, acid rain, thermopollution, ozone depletion
Water Environment
Water quality, supply and distribution of drinking water, management of clean water resources, water
pollution and treatment
Waste Management
Generation, classification, handling and transportation of waste; 3R (Reduction, Recycling and Reuse)
concept in waste management, treatment and disposal of different types of municipal wastes
Environment Control & Management
Preservation of environment, local laws and reinforcement agent of environmental protection,
environmental audit and impact assessment.
The subject comprises of four parts: lectures, tutorials, field work and laboratory classes. Lectures are
designed to provide students with the basic theories. Tutorials are conducted to reinforce the general
knowledge obtained in the lectures, to clarify queries and to broaden the scope of topics covered in lectures.
Students will be involved in problem-based activities, classroom feedback and discussions in the tutorials.
Field trips show students the ways of collecting ecological samples for laboratory measurements.
Laboratory sessions illustrate the theoretical knowledge and demonstrate to students the techniques of
some standard measurements of the ecological samples. Students are required to report on the ecological
findings using a scientific format.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including tutorial discussion, field trip participation, laboratory reports, tests
and an examination will be used to assess the process of learning. Students are expected to apply
theoretical information during the field trip and practice the techniques in subsequent laboratory classes.
Last but not least, students are expected to develop an inquiry and analytical mind, and to report on and
communicate the ecological findings scientifically.
Indicative Readings
Botkin, D.B. and Keller, E.A. Environmental Science: Earth as a Living Planet. NY: Wiley. (5th ed).
References
Manahan, S.E. Environmental Science and Technology. Boca Ranton: Lewis Publishers. (7th ed).
Skinner, B.J., Porter, S.C. and Botkin, D.B. The Blue Planet: an introduction to Earth System Science.
New York: Wiley. (2nd ed).
Spiro, T.G. and Stigliani, W.M. Chemistry of the Environment. N.J.: Prentice Hall. (2nd ed).
348
CC3736
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Exclusion
Assessment
Mutlimedia and User Interface Design
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
Nil
CC3211 Human Factors and User Interfaces
40% Coursework
60% Examination
Aims
This course provides students with a broad view of both the theoretical and practical issues in human
factors in the design of human-computer interfaces (HCI). After studying this course, students will know
how to design an information system well using the HCI principles, and have a chance to apply multimedia
and hypermedia technology in HCI design and development.
Learning Outcomes
recognize the importance of HCI foundations, such as human, computer and the interface architecture
identify issues of HCI design, such as usability, the design process, models of the user, dialogue
notations, implementation support, and evaluation techniques
apply multimedia and hypermedia technology in HCI design and development
Indicative Contents
Foundation of Human Computer Interaction
What is HCI; Importance of HCI; History of HCI; Roles of various disciplines played within HCI.
Human Characteristics
Perception and representation; Models and limits of human memory; Mental models; Use of metaphors;
Support user aspects of language; Social and organizational aspects.
Usability and Evaluation
Usability engineering; Cognitive models for the HCI users; Evaluation techniques; Experiments and
benchmarking.
HCI Design Process and Dialogue Notations
Task analysis and predictive modeling; Dialogue interaction: types and techniques, multimedia and nongraphical dialogues; Response time; Statistical models for describing interaction processes.
Multimedia Tools
Sound editor; Video editor; Computer graphics; Computer animation.
349
HCI Application
Multimedia programming; Web programming; High-level tools.
Lectures will emphasize the concepts and applications of the HCI principles using an interactive approach
such as case analysis and discussion, classroom hands-on HCI design practice, etc. Tutorials will be
conducted in the laboratory to explore issues arising from the lectures by means of exercises on
hypermedia technology. Students will also be asked to analyze selected works of the others and critically
evaluate them.
Assessment Approach
Case studies, hand-on practices in computer laboratory, design homework, tests and examinations will be
used to assess students’ mastery of this subject. All of them help evaluate their understanding and
appreciation of human-computer interaction.
Indicative Reading
McCracken, D. D. and Wolfe, R. J. User-Centered Website Development: A Human-Computer
Interaction Approach. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
References
Dix, A. J., Finlay, J. E., Abowd, G. D. and Beale, R. Human-Computer Interaction. Prentice Hall. (latest
ed.).
Gosselin, D. XHTML Comprehensive. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.).
Shuman, J. Multimedia Concepts - Illustrated introductory, Thomson Course Technology. (latest ed.).
Vaughan, T. Multimedia Making It Works. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.).
350
CC3744
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Biotechnology
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
8 hours of Tutorial
6 hours of Practical
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject aims to develop the conceptual framework of biotechnology so as to facilitate students’
understanding of some applications such as in cloning for drug production, genetic engineering for crop
selection, and DNA fingerprinting for familial identification. Students will have the opportunity to develop
some hand-on experience on some common basic biotechnological techniques that will be used to illustrate
the concepts. The subject also creates awareness of the impact of biotechnology to the society, for example,
its potential risk and ethical issue.
Learning Outcomes
understand the concepts of biotechnology and the theories behind its techniques and applications
relate biotechnological techniques with the practical uses in agriculture, pharmaceutical and DNA
profiling
develop skills on some basic biotechnological techniques
aware the ethical and social impact of biotechnology on the community
Indicative Contents
Genetic Engineering
DNA technology: splicing and sequencing; restriction enzymes, plasmid and viral transfection,
polymerase chain reaction; DNA finger printing and practical application in forensic cases and familial
identification.
Protein Technology
Protein production from genetically modified bacteria; protein engineering: engineered enzymes and
antibodies.
Microbial Biotechnology
Microbial products: single cell protein, enzymes, antibiotics, fuel and plastics; treatment of waste water
using microorganisms.
Food Biotechnology
Fermentation of dairy products and wine making; crop selection, animal breeding; genetically modified
food; gene transfer methods in animals; transgenic animal; ecological consideration, ethical issues,
351
legislation and social impact of the technology.
The basis of biotechnology will be presented in lectures, and concepts will be reinforced in tutorial.
Tutorials also provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in
lectures. Students will have the practical experience to apply some of the theories in common
biotechnological techniques like plasmid transfection, DNA fingerprinting and microbial biotechnology in
laboratory classes as appropriate. Occasional group discussions particularly on the ethical issues and social
impact arising from the application of biotechnology in daily life might be arranged as activities in tutorials.
Assessment Approach
Assessment tools include written practical reports, tests and examination. Practical reports will be graded
according to students’ practical and analytical skills. Written test and examination will be used to assess the
theoretical understanding of the subject and the progression of the students.
Indicative Readings
Ratledge, C., Kristiansen, B. Basic Biotechnology. Cambridge University Press. (latest ed.).
Barnum, S.R. Biotechnology: An Introduction. Wadsworth Publishing Company. (latest ed.).
References
Egorov, A.M., Zaikov, G.E. (ed.). New Aspects of Biotechnology and Medicine. Nova Science Publishers.
(latest ed.).
Glazer, A.N., Nikaido, H. Microbial Biotechnology: Fundamentals of Applied Microbiology. Cambridge
University Press. (latest ed.).
Krylov, I.A., Zaikov, G.E. (ed.). Industrial Application of Biotechnology. Nova Science Publishers.
Shetty, K. et. al. Food Biotechnology. Taylor & Francis. (latest ed.).
Steinbuchel, A., Doi, Y. (ed.). Biotechnology of Biopolymers: from Synthesis to Patents, Wiley-VCH.
(latest ed.).
Walsh, G. Pharmaceutical biotechnology: Concepts and Applications. John Wiley & Sons. (latest ed.).
Wellons, H.B. Biotechnology and the Law. American Bar Association. (latest ed.).
352
CC3745
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
Cell Biology
3
3
Science
English
24 hours of Lecture
Nil
50% Coursework
50% Examination
Aims
This subject equips students with the knowledge on the molecular basis of cellular structures and functions.
Lectures focus on the biochemical function of cellular organelles, as well as the interactions of the cells
with the extracellular environment. It provides an insight of how organelles maintain the homeostasis of
the cell, and how various cells interact and maintain the organisms and hence the preservation of our
internal environment.
Learning Outcomes
reinforce the understanding of the parts of cells and the mechanisms of how they work
appreciate how various cellular mechanisms maintain the integrity of cells, and hence the life of the
organism
communicate information and interpret data in a scientific way
Indicative Contents
The basic of the cell
Prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells; microscopy; membrane structure and functions; chemical foundations
of biology; protein structure and functions; cytoskeleton: actin and myosin, tubulin and microtubules;
enzyme; motile structures: cilia, flagella and centromeres
Organelles
Types of organelles: mitochondria, chloroplast, nucleus, endoplasmic reticulcum, Golgi apparatus
Molecular basis and biological processes of the cell
Components and characteristics of membrane; membrane transport: carrier protein, ion channel;
cellular respiration; photosynthesis; cell signaling; communication with the environment; cell cycle
and division; cell specificity
Cellular communication
Hormones: autocrine, paracrine and endocrine; cytokines and interferon; cellular events following
peptide and steroidal hormone stimulation
Cell differentiation
Control of genetic expression and translation; mechanism of cell differentiation; disorder: tumour and
cancer; ageing of cell; environmental factors like radiation and pollution on cells
353
Lectures reinforce the knowledge of cellular structures and functions. The maintenance of the integrity of
cell, the interaction of cells to preserve the internal environment for the organism, and the interaction of
cell with the external environment will also be introduced. Lectures will be conducted in an interesting and
interactive manner, and students will be encouraged to participate in class.
Tutorials provide students with opportunities to broaden, appreciate and reinforce the general knowledge
obtained in the lectures. Students will be involved in case studies, classroom activities, presentation and
discussion to strengthen and backup the knowledge.
Laboratories enhance the knowledge learnt in lectures / tutorials with introduction of some basic
techniques of cell biology.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools including presentations, case studies, laboratories, group discussion, tests and
Indicative Readings
Cohen, N. Cell structure, function and metabolism. Biology: form and function. Hodder and Stoughton,
The Open University. (latest ed.).
Copper, G.M., Hausman, R.E. The cell: a molecular approach. ASM Press: Washington D.C. (latest ed.).
References
Avers, C.J. Basic Cell Biology. D. Van Nostrand New York. (latest ed.).
Davey, J., Lord, M. Essential Cell Biology: Practical Approach Volume 1: Cell structure. Oxford
Davey, J., Lord, M. Essential Cell Biology: Practical Approach Volume 2: Cell function. Oxford
Sadava, D.E. Cell Biology: Organelle Structure and function. Jones and Bartlett Publishers Boston. (latest
ed.).
354
CC3751
Level
Credits
Nature
Teaching Pattern
Prerequisites
Assessment
3
3
Science
English
28 hours of Lecture
14 hours of Tutorial/ Laboratory Class
In order to enhance learning, it would be advantageous to
students if CC2418 Human Biology II is also taken before
enrolling on CC3751
100% course work
Aims
This subject aims to provide students with basic knowledge in the science of human movement. It prepares
students a good foundation in understanding the movement and function of the human body required for
various health related services ranging from promotion of physical fitness, delivery of preventive health
care to provision of rehabilitative services in institutional care or community-based settings. This subject
also prepares those students who would further their study in the relevant field of the health professions.
Learning Outcomes
On successful completion of this subject, students will be able to:
Professional / academic knowledge and skills:
understand the biomechanical properties of different tissues and structures in the musculoskeletal
system
perform basic movement analysis of normal and abnormal body motions
identify some factors affecting physical performance
recognize the physiological effects of exercises
apply various methods of assessing physical fitness
appreciate the use of movement science concepts in delivering preventive intervention, health
maintenance and rehabilitative care
Attributes for all-roundedness:
exercise critical thinking and enquiry mind in pursuing knowledge in science
develop an interest in movement science which may enhance further learning in relevant fields or
health-related professional programmes
acquire a positive and self-reliant attitude in life-long learning
Indicative Contents
Basic principles of biomechanics
Basic kinematics and kinetics of body motion
Biomechanical properties of body tissues and structural materials
Biomechanics of muscle and joints
Function of the limbs and the spine
Posture and balance
355
Effects of exercise and physical fitness assessment
Motor control and learning
Both self-directed and interactive learning approaches are adopted in this subject. Students are required to
have pre-reading before lectures. Scientific principles are illustrated with interactive teaching aids during
lectures. Tutorials are given to consolidate and expand learning through discussion, case studies and
problem solving activities. Experimental and laboratory work encourage students to think critically and
reinforce theoretical concepts.
Assessment Approach
A variety of assessment tools will be used, which may include quizzes, MCQ test, written assignment,
presentation, laboratory report. The assessment methods are designed to assess students’ abilities in
adopting a scientific approach to understand human movement.
Indicative Readings
Trew, M. and Everett, T. Human Movement – An Introductory Text. Elsevier Churchill Livingstone. (latest
ed.).
Recommended Reading
Hamilton, N. and Luttgens, K. Kinesiology – Scientific Basis of Human Motion. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.).
Oatis, C.A. Kinesiology – The Mechanics & Pathomechanics of Human Movement. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins. (latest ed.).
356

Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology

Transcription

Similar documents

Old Ebbitt Grill - Paper Because

MX7538TQ - Hytronics

FY13

here to the GAMO G-Magnum 1250 Air Rifle flyer

lemcs0543.

EE 3444-005 Electronics II Lab - The University of Texas at Arlington

SOCIAL BUSINESS COLLABORATION 2015

Transfer Credit Guidelines

“Getting Started” User Guide - Acland`s Video Atlas of Human Anatomy